Home

FQ2 Smart Camera User's Manual

1. Description Setting range Data Refer ence y Model region Same as for the Search item settings Scene 2 g Insp region Scene Adjust judgement Adjusts judgement parameters without Scene p 175 8 stopping measurements Auto adjustment Automatically adjusts the judgement OK Teach NG Teach parameters by using actual workpieces which are considered as good or faulty products Method Selects the expression to use to auto Threshold minimum Threshold aver matically adjust the judgement parame age default or Threshold maximum ters Auto display trend Same as the trend monitor and histogram for Run Mode p 184 monitor and histo p 185 gram only Display range trend monitor and histo gram only Number of data p 184 trend monitor only Number of data p 185 histogram only Erase display Save data Saves scene data Calibration data and p 178 system data Run Tab Page from Setup Display Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Switch to Run mode Switches to Run Mode p 180 Tool Setup Mode Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Select scene p 190 ou Menu Tables Select Switches to a registered scene Rename Used to delete copy or change the 15 alphanumeric characters name of a scene Copy Clear FQ2 User s M
2. Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 g 2 Data settings Data0 to Data31 Scene E fra 2 2 Data settings Sets the output data Inspection item text strings Scene p 259 E 8 g Rename Changes copies or clears the data Scene 2 Copy Scene p Delete Scene nd 8 Output for Sets the output form Binary default or BCD Scene p 260 E mat 2 2 z z gt c Q Z Output form Sets whether to output the data No Yes default Scene p 260 FRE cfa 5 5 2 Ola a s 3 0 Oo a A5 O a 1 O monitor Used to check I O connections so p 203 5 amp e Test Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Continuous test Used to check the individual judgement _ p 170 results for the inspection items and to adjust the judgement parameters Graphic Displays the input image Graphics Details Displays the inspection item individual judgement results and measurement val ues All results Region Displays the inspection item individual p 177 judgement results for all inspection items Trend Monitor Displays the individual judgement results p 170 saved in the Sensor in a trend monitor Histogram Displays the individual judgement results saved in the Sensor in a histogram FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 419 z L seoipueddy Menu command
3. Table 1 Single function models Standard models Field of view Installation dis Num Weight HxV 1 tance ber of NPN PNP NPN PNP LEDs FQ2 S10010F FQ2 S15010F FQ2 S20010F FQ2 S25010F 7 5 x 4 7 to 38 to57mm 4 Approx 13 x 8 2 mm 160g FQ2 S10050F FQ2 S15050F FQ2 S20050F FQ2 S25050F 13 x 8 2 to 56 to215mm_ 4 53 x 33 mm FQ2 S10100F FQ2 S15100F FQ2 S20100F FQ2 S25100F 53 x 33 to 220 to 970 mm 8 Approx 240 x 153 mm 150g FQ2 S10100N FQ2 S15100N FQ2 S20100N FQ2 S25100N 29 x 18 to 32 to 380mm 8 300 x 191 mm High resolution models Field of view Installation dis Num Weight HxV 1 tance ber of NPN PNP LEDs FQ2 S30010F FQ2 S35010F 7 5x6 7 to 38to57mm j4 Approx 13x11 6 mm 160g FQ2 S30050F FQ2 S35050F 13x11 6 to 56 to215mm_ 4 53x47 3 mm FQ2 S30100F FQ2 S35100F 53x47 3 to 220 to 970 mm 8 Approx 240x214 mm 150g FQ2 S30100N FQ2 S35100N 29x25 9 to 32 to 380mm 8 300x268 mm 1 Tolerance 10 max 2 Applicable standards IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN 60825 1 1994 A1 2002 A2 2001 and JIS C 6802 2005 Table 2 Item NPN PNP Input specifi ON Shorted to 0 V or 1 5 V max ON Shorted to power supply voltage or power supply volt cations OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max age 1 5 V max OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max Output speci NPN open collector PNP open collector fications 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 2 0 V max
4. Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Edge Pitch Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Edge pitch 0 to 999 0 Average pitch P 0 to 99999 9999 0 Max pitch maximum PH 0 to 99999 9999 0 pitch Min pitch minimum PL 0 to 99999 9999 0 pitch Average width W 0 to 99999 9999 0 Max width maximum WH 0 to 99999 9999 0 width Min width minimum WL 0 to 99999 9999 0 width Color Data Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error R average AR 0 to 255 0 G average AG 0 to 255 0 B average AB 0 to 255 0 Color diff dens Av AD Color difference 0 to 442 0 color difference density Density average 0 to 255 average Clr deviat color devia DV Color difference 0 to 221 0 tion density deviation Density deviation 0 to 217 Area Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Area AR 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Gravity X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Gravity Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference area SA 0 to 999999999 0 Ref position X refer SX 999
5. Signal name Variable name FLG ElPinput StatusFlag F 0 BUSY ElPinput StatusFlag F 1 READY EIPInput StatusFlag F 2 OR ElPinput StatusFlag F 3 RUN ElPinput StatusFlag F 4 ERR ElPinput StatusFlag F 15 GATE EIPInput StatusFlag F 16 Command code EIPInput CommandCodeEcho Response code E IPiInput ResposeCode Response data E IPinput ResposeData e Output Area Signal name Variable name Output data 1 ElPinput OutputData 0 Output data 8 ElPinput OutputData 7 Accessing Communications Areas by Specifying I O Memory Addresses AT specifications can be set for variables to individually specify the O memory addresses that are assigned in the communications areas 1 Setting Tag Sets Network Configurator Specify the tag names in the PLC directly by using the I O memory addresses that are assigned in the communications areas Output tags are specified for the input connections to the Sensor and input tags are specified for output connections to the PLC Setting Examples Output tag DO Input tag D100 2 Setting Variables Sysmac Studio Define variables with AT specifications to the I O memory addresses that are assigned in the communi cations areas as shown below jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog Setting Examples Variable a AT specification DO 0 Variable b AT specification DO 1 Variable c AT specification D0 15 Variable d AT specification D1 0 6 3 Setting Connections
6. Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing the OR and D signals However do not clear the OR and D signals while the BUSY signal is ON The command will not be executed correctly OR If this signal was ON it will be turned OFF DO to D15 If these signals were ON they will be turned OFF GATE This signal does not change while clearing the OR and D signals However do not clear the OR and D signals while the GATE signal is ON The command will not be executed correctly Also the D and GATE outputs may not function correctly ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn OFF IN1 Turn ON IN2 to IN5 Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for clearing the OR and D signals FQ2 User s Manual Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 279 Zo S o v2 2 3a O ge F 5308 DO 2s 2 o 05 Sa O S O E a Q w D v D 280 Saving Data in the Sensor This command saves the current settings scene data and system data in the Sensor Parameters Execution Command Input exampl
7. Type of change Change Reference Changing the type of measurement trigger Performing continuous measurements p 237 Changing the output method of the judgement results Obtaining individual judgement results p 241 Adjust the judgement output timing p 242 Changing the judgement output ON conditions p 244 Changing the polarity of the BUSY output Reversing the polarity of the BUSY signal p 244 Changing the BUSY output condition Adjusting the end timing of the BUSY signal p 244 Changing the polarity of the output signals OUT1 to Reversing the output polarity of OUT1 to OUT3 p 244 OUT3 Setting the Measurement Trigger The measurement trigger can be chosen from the following two types One shot measurement One measurement is performed for each external trigger e Continuous measurement Measurements are performed continuously FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection Zo S o v2 2 3a O Be 98 32 Do Qs 2 o 05 Sa O S O E a l Q w D v D 235 Performing One Measurement for Each External Trigger A measurement trigger is input as the TRIG signal from a proximity sensor PLC or other external device One measurement is performed when the TRIG signal turns ON 1 TRIG signal ON Or other iN i device Trigger input Sensor 2 Performs measurements once Wiring Color
8. Making the Extraction Results Easier to Check You can invert the black white extraction results Press lt q Reverse and select Yes e You can select whether to display a binary image Press lt q Binary image display and select OFF or ON FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item 143 suonoedsu dN Bues y 144 Changing the Area Detection Conditions You can fill in the area detected through color extraction or binary conversion to perform a stable extraction of the areas and their characteristics or to mark only areas inside the measurement region for inspection gt Inspect Inspection Aria Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Fill profile and select Filling up holes or Fill ypu Outline Item Parameter Setting Description Meas Parame Fill profile Filling up holes None Holes are not filled ter measure Fill Outline Filling up holes Processes areas that are surrounded by the specified ment None color like in the shape of a donut as the specified color parameter Default None Input Image Filled Image Fill Outline Measures the image between the first extracted point and the last extracted point in the X axis direction in the measurement area as the extracted color Because filling is performed only in the X axis direction this method is faster than filling up holes Input Ima
9. FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 T amp Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 138 SS 8 g judgement results of an inspection item 2 a 5 2 in the overall judgement 2 3 0 See Q g F S Fill profile You can set how to process holes for an None default Filling up holes Fill Out Scene p 144 a e Area inspection item line S fy a w o S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 142 2 judgement results of an inspection item S in the overall judgement 5 a z g 2 S Filling up Sets how to process areas surrounded Yes No default Scene p 150 T 2 holes by the specified color glS og r g Extract Select this option if there are areas of the Yes No default Scene p 150 7 image specified color inside the measurement y region that you do not want to measure Extraction Scene p 151 condition Number of Set the maximum number of labels to Range 1 to 100 Scene labels detect Default 100 Area Specify the area range to judge as a Range 0 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene label Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 Lower limit 0 Gravity X Specify the gravity X position to judge as Range 99 999 999 9999 to Scene a label 999 999 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Gravity Y
10. 5 6 35 36 7 8 37 38 9 10 39 40 29 30 59 60 For the I O connector harness use an FQ VP1 Parallel Cable for the FQ SDU1 or a MIL standard harness such as the OMRON XZ2F The Cables are sold separately OR NG FQ WUO Sensor Data Unit Cable Power supply 24 V Screw size M3 Tightening torque Power supply 0 V 0 54 N m Frame ground Signal Application Power supply 24 V These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V Power supply 0 V e Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influence of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load cur rent exceeds 50 mA Frame ground This is the frame ground terminal Connect it to the ground wire 4 Wiring FQ2 User s Manual FQ SDU10 SDU15 Terminal Signal Names Pin Signal IN Function Pin Signal IN Function OUT OUT 1
11. 444 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 15 Mea Standard position X1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data sure only 99 999 9999 ment 16 result Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 17 Standard midpoint Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SMX Logged data position X only 99 999 9999 18 Standard midpoint Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SMY Logged data position Y only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 image sition 1 Previous image 140 Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification 141 Edge color RO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 142 Edge color G0 Setting Acqui 0 to 2
12. 0 000 e eee eee eee 229 Initializing the Sensor and Touch Finder 0 0000 eee eee 229 Restarting the Sensor and Touch Finder 00000 e ee eee 229 Checking Versions ss ss 2 44 0c3o eed ed baie E ed as 230 Checking the Touch Finder Battery Level 0 00000 cee eae 230 Changing the Sensor Name 0 c cee eee eee 230 Checking Available Memory in the Sensor 00 0c e eee eee 230 Correcting the Touch Screen Positions of the Touch Finder 230 Setting the Resolution of Measurement Objects Displayed on the PC Tool 230 Rotating the Touch Finder Image by 180 0 000 e eee ee 230 Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 231 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection 8 1 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 234 Basic Operation with a Parallel Connection 000 cee eae 234 Setting the Measurement Trigger 0 000 c cee eee eee 235 Setting the Outputs 2 2 0 0 eee eee 240 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device 000 246 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 256 OVEINVIOW 40 3 ste neti dere a ae i teed need dane heee das 256 Setting the Measurement Trigger 0 0 0 c cece eee eee 256 Setting
13. External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X0 Logged data X0 only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X1 Logged data X1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 NA Logged data Y1 only 99 999 9999 11 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 12 Standard position YO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SYO Logged data only 99 999 9999 13 Standard position X1 Acquisition A 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 441
14. If you connect the PC Tool to a Sensor on a different network through a router set fixed IP addresses If you use an EtherNet IP connections set fixed IP address for the Sensors FQ2 User s Manual Setting Up Ethernet c suo osuuo pue UOT e e Su MEMO E Setting Up Ethernet FQ2 User s Manual Taking Images 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration 000e cece eee 58 3 2 Setting Conditions for Taking Images 0 000ee ee ee eee 59 3 3 Adjusting Image Quality 0 0 22 cee eee 60 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images 020eee eens 66 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 255 68 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration If multiple Sensors are connected to a single Touch Finder or computer a list of the Sensors that are connected is displayed by default Use the following procedure to change to the Sensor to set up 1 Press Switch Sensor 2 Press the image of the Sensor to be set up will be displayed for Sensors that are not yet set Note Once the Touch Finder detects and records a Sensor the display or der for showing more than one Sensor is fixed Even if the system configuration is changed to reduce the number of Sensors the pre vious display location will remain for Sensors that were removed To update displays of multiple Sensors to the current connection sta tus press lt q Auto conne
15. YO display sition 706 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1 display sition 707 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition 447 z L seolpueddy 448 Edge Rotation Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Position compensation Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DT Logged data TH only 99 999 9999 6 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X0 Logged data XO only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x1 Logged data x1 only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y1 Logged data Y1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 TH Logged data only 11 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 12 Standard position YO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SYO Logged data only 99 999 9999 13 Standar
16. FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item 115 suonoedsu dN Bues Y Changing the Number Region Divisions You can change the number of divisions of the registered model The default setting is 5 x 5 p gt Inspect Inspection Sensitive Search Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter Sub model number Parameter Setting Description Sub model number 3 x 3 5 x 5 default or 9 x 9 Sets the number of divisions of the registered model Inspecting Plain Regions Density deviations are used to inspect sections that are set as plain regions during teaching gt Inspect Inspection Sensitive Search Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter Plain inspection Parameter Setting Description Plain inspection Yes or No default Enables or disables inspecting plain sections Unstable Search Results Inclined Measurement Objects Adjust the Angle range parameter to increase the range in which a search is made for the model The Search inspection item judges whether an image is OK or NG according to the correlation with a previously registered image pattern For this reason if the object is at an angle the correlation is reduced and the image may be judged as NG To achieve an OK judgement for the same image pattern even when the object is at an angle the rotation range must be widened gt Inspect
17. Modify 1 Press q Suppression level on the right of the Lower limit Upper limit display 2 Press lt RGB setting on the right of the display 3 Select the method to use to specify the brightness range This setting applies to Sensors with Color Cameras only Common RGB Settings Set the upper and lower limit values of the brightness range The same limits will be used for all RGB colors e Individual RGB Settings Set the upper and lower limit values of the brightness range for each RGB color Press R G and B and set the upper and lower limits for each of them 4 Setthe upper and lower limit values of the brightness range for Sensors with Monochrome Cameras or after a Color Gray Filter FQ Serie o e 5 Press Back Press OK 7 Press Back FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken G s bewj uiye L Parameter Setting Description Common common RGB Range 0 to 255 Set the upper and lower limit values of the background suppres setting Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 255 sion level The same limits will be used for all RGB colors The range from the specified lower to upper limits is converted to 0 to 255 Individual individual Range 0 to 255 Set the upper and lower limit values of the background suppres RGB settings Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 255 sion level for each RGB color The range from the sp
18. SIN Finds the sine The result is a value between 1 and 1 The angle in the expression is in degrees SIN angle COS Finds the cosine The result is a value between 1 and 1 The angle in the expression is in degrees COS angle ATAN Finds the arctangent of the value Y component X component The result is a radian value between n and z ANGL Y_component X_component Example Finding the angle between the straight line joining the centers of region 0 and region 1 and horizontal ATAN R1 Y RO Y R1 X R0 X If the two arguments are both O the result is O and the judgement is NG AND Finds the logical AND If one of the arguments is 0 the calculation result is 0 Otherwise it is 1 AND argument_1 argument_2 OR Finds the logical OR If both of the arguments are 0 the calculation result is 0 Otherwise it is 1 OR argument_1 argument_2 NOT Applies a logical NOT operation If the argument is 0 the calculation result is 1 Otherwise it is 0 NOT argument ABS Finds the absolute value ABS argument MAX Returns the larger of the two arguments MAX argument_1 argument_2 MIN Returns the smaller of the two arguments MAX argument_1 argument_2 FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 159 suonoedsu dN Buijes Y 160 Function Description ANGL Finds the angle of the straight line joining two p
19. coordinates 0 X Origin of 7 Camera Y Positive coordinates direction for angles Origin of actual Origin of actual coordinates Origin of Camera coordinates Calibration Conversion Methods There are the following three conversion methods for calibration Point specification You can enter the actual pixel coordinates of any position Reference You can measure a registered model and then enter the actual coordinates of the model Parameter You can enter the calibration values directly e Setting Calibration Use the following procedure to set calibration 1 Set the conversion method to use for calibration Select the calibration method point specification reference or parameter and enter the actual coordi nates or other values that are suitable for the selected method You can register up to 32 calibration patterns Calibration type Description Reference Specify point point specifica Specify from two to ten points and enter their actual coordinates tion LT Jp 194 Reference sampling refer Search for a registered model and enter the actual coordinates ence of the position where the model is detected LT Jp 196 Parameter Enter the numeric values of the parameters directly to calculate the calibration data LT Jp 198 FQ2 User s Manual Calibration ioe suoyouny ju ju auoo J 2 Select the calibration pattern to use Select the calibration pattern to use from
20. Execution Control Command Command Execution condition Completed FLG Active BUSY Turns ON Command Execution Bit Control Command Completed FLG When the control command is completed the Command Execution Bit is turned OFF Create the ladder program to control the TRIG signal so that it does not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input error will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON Note While the trigger input TRIG signal for parallel measurements is ON the EtherNet IP BUSY signal will also be ON Therefore no EtherNet IP commands will be executed Any EtherNet IP commands will be executed after execution of the parallel commands You can also use a EtherNet IP to perform measurements and output data with the paral lel 1 O measurement trigger signal TRIG Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled Execution Data Output condition Completed GATE Vt Data Output Completed GATE Data Output Request Bit DSA RSET Data Output Request Bit DSA FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 323 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 324 9 3 PLC Link Connections You can use a PLC Link to communicate between the PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications metho
21. Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 3 BIE 5 Edge 0 Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene Ela o c region surement region changes the measure H a ar 1 2 Edge1 ment direction etc 3 S j 8 g region S PO Edge 0 clr Sets whether to specify an edge color ON or OFF default Scene E S 5 ON OFF F Edge 1 clr E ON OFF DE 2 Set color Specifies the color of the image for edge R 0 to 255 Scene ala detection i e the border between the B 0 to 255 5 K measurement object and background G 0 to 255 o D 5 A Color Displays a palette for color specification Hi palette O gs o c Edit Ref Set the reference angle 0 to 180 default 0 Scene DO oF angle T 2 Edge Rota Q tion Position 55 Compensa cE 8 tion only Judgement Shape Search II Position Compensation Item and Search Position Compen Scene sation Item Almost the same as for the Search inspection item Edge Position Compensation Two edge Position Compensation Two edge Midpoint Compensation and Edge Rotation Position Compensation Almost the same as for the Edge Position inspection item Meas Parameter Shape Search II Position Compensation Item and Search Position Compen Scene D sation Item PODNE A Output parameter Almost the same settings as for the Search inspection i
22. for sub region number sition 1 Data logging ON 324 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for sub region number X sition 1 Data logging ON 325 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for sub region number Y sition 1 Data logging ON 326 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 ior measurement position sition 1 Data logging ON X sub region 327 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 ior measurement position sition 1 Data logging ON Y sub region 700 Display Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 701 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 702 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 display sition 704 Density deviation dis Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 play sition 705 NG sub region display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 sition 800 Mea Position X display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 sure tern sition tive value ment 801 result Position Y display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 display tern sition tive value 802 Measured angle display Setting Acqui 0 Absolute
23. 10000 zZ 3Z4S LE to na NO do M 0 SV 0614V gt LKA SV 0813V Lhe LAA SV 1214V He A SV 1614V 7to 5 Sa soe SV 3518V ECMO SV 5018V i 2 0 SV 7527V 5 i A 1 SV 10035V 1000 100 Camera installation distance mm t Macro ring Examples t0 Macro ring is not required 10 t5 A 5 mm macro 1 10 100 1000 ring is required Y axis of field of view mm FQ2 User s Manual Installation c SuONOeUUOD pue UOTE e Su 36 The X axis in the above optical diagrams represent field of view mm 1 The Y axis represents the camera installation distance mm or WD mm These optical diagrams show the relationship between the detection range and installation distance for different CCTV Lenses The values vary for each Lens Pay close attention to the Lens that you are using when you refer to these optical diagrams The macro ring thickness to be used is given as for example t5 0 on the graphs t0 means that a macro ring is not required t5 0 means that you must use a 5 mm macro ring Y Field of view lt X gt 1 The Y axis in the optical charts represents the height of the field of view Example If you use an 3Z4S LE SV 2514H Lens for a measurement object
24. Error code Returns the latest error code If there is no error record the response is 00000000 Q 11 1 Error Histories p 398 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 282 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 MEMO 0 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Connecting with RS 232C 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections s sssssseseseeeeeeneneeees 392 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No proto GOl GOMMUMIGATIONS snas araa che Ta ea EEEE nicer 393 392 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections You can connect an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to the I O cable connector on the FQ2 If you connect a Sensor Data Unit you can use no protocol communications to send and receive commands inspection item parameters and other data between the Sensor and the external control device that is connected with the RS 232C cable Sensor Data Unit External device Sensor RS 232C Refer to the following sections for the specifications and wiring methods of the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit LT p 32 p 483 and wiring Sensor Data Units p 44 Parallel Input Signals for an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit If you make a parallel connection through the parallel I O connector on the Sensor Data Unit the specifications of the parallel I O signals will
25. Weak Smoothing Strong Smoothing Used when there are minor irregularities in the measurement object The image is feathered to reduce unevenness Dilate Used when there is dark noise Dark noise is removed by dilating bright places Erosion Used when there is bright noise Bright noise is removed by eroding bright places Median Used when there are minor irregularities in the measurement object Unevenness is reduced while maintaining outlines Extract Edges Extracts image edges between light and dark Extract Horiz Edges extract horizontal edges Extracts horizontal edges between light and dark in the image Extract vertical edges Extracts vertical edges between light and dark in the image Enhance edges Enhances image edges between light and dark FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 69 sobew uiye L 70 Selected filter item Description Background Suppression Extracts a specific range of brightness to increase the image contrast and suppress the unnecessary background Example Increasing Contrast Any areas that are outside of the specified range of brightness are removed as the background Also the brightness within the specified range is converted to 255 levels to enhance the contrast Setting Filter Items gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add filter Eme 2 Press the filter item
26. j 484 ar P A E Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual FQ SDU20 SDU25 Unit mm g Eyes a 5 13 7 6 3 485 FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions z L soolpueddy 486 System Requirements for PC Tool for FQ The system requirements for the PC Tool are given in the following table Item Requirement OS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional SP2 or higher 32 bit edition Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium or higher 32 bit edition or 64 bit edition Hardware CPU Core 2 Duo 1 06 GHz or the equivalent or higher RAM 1 GB min HDD 500 MB min available space Monitor 1 024 x 768 dots min 1 Available space is also required separately for data logging Options Specifications e I O Cables Item Model FQ WD002 FQ WD010 FQ WD020 Cable length 2m 10m 20m Cable type Robot cable Wire gauge Power line AWG24 AWG24 to AWG20 Other lines AWG28 Cable diameter 6 4 6 4 to 6 7 Minimum
27. 0 00 e ee eee 175 Adjusting Judgement Parameters While Looking at Measurement Results 175 Setting Up the Best Judgement Parameters Automatically 175 5 4 Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results 0005 177 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor 002200 eee eee eee 178 6 Operation 6 1 Starting Operation 1 0 0 eee eee 180 Run Mode Display 0 00 000 aada aaea diaa a aba i Ea Aaa 180 Moving to Run Mode seei dku nassa atna eaea ea a a Ea ae ee a aas 180 6 2 Configuring the Run Mode Display 200 c cece e eee 182 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs 184 Trend MONTOR r aitoi ia ee a E Bile cana E baa de eae eh 184 HIStOGhAMS c ecande awed rn Ea ae ena peeing rd RAA EOE aad 185 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation 187 Preparations arri deaig 2 ate anera iaa use pee drapes Glam Aad Ba a 187 Changing the Judgement Parameters in Run Mode 4 187 7 Convenient Functions 7 1 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 190 What Are Scenes 0000 c ect tenes 190 Creating New Scenes 0 000 ccc eee eens 191 Changing Scene Names Copying Scenes and Deleting Scenes 191 Switching Scenes from an External Device 00 000 e ee eee 191 Setting the Startup Scene 2 0 0 eee ees 192 FQ2 User s Manual 13 14 U2 GAlDTAt
28. 00000 e ue 150 Changing the Label Extraction Conditions 0 2 00 cee eae 151 Sorting Extracted Labels 0 0 0 0 00 ccc een eee 151 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 00 152 Editing the Measurement Region 000 cc eee eee 152 Increasing the Processing Speed 0 00 ccc ene 153 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 153 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Labeling 154 ERRORS Su bos ee a Na E Wee he ee sa Ree wie BAPE Rogen Sin a shane the hoe 154 FQ2 User s Manual 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 155 Calculations lt a eao en tener anata tones Sista ashe E A e tangles nee Deana AS 155 Examples for Calculation 0 0 0000 157 Procedure Calculation amihanan aa eee eee 157 Function LISU 2 citatiraegeheonbeatrea whore bed peta te E IE 159 5 Testing and Saving Settings 5 1 Performing Test Measurements 220002 eee eee 170 Performing Test Measurements with Samples 00000005 170 Performing Test Measurements with Saved Images Re measuring 170 5 2 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time 020 eee ee eeee 172 Checking the Measurement Takt Time 0 00000 cece eee ee 172 Increasing Image Input Speed 6 0 eee 173 Changing the Image Input Mode 0 0 0 eee 174 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters
29. 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Edge pitch This is the number of objects 0 to 999 Average pitch This is the average pitch 0 to 99999 9999 PH Max pitch This is the maximum pitch 0 to 99999 9999 PL Min pitch This is the minimum pitch 0 to 99999 9999 Ww Average width This is the average width between 0 to 99999 9999 edges WH Max width This is the maximum width between 0 to 99999 9999 edges WL Min width This is the minimum width between 0 to 99999 9999 edges LT 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Pitch The following values can be logged as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error This is the judgement result from the measurements Edge pitch 0 to 999 This is the number of objects that were detected Average pitch 0 to 99999 9999 This is the average pitch that was detected Max pitch 0 to 99999 9999 This is the maximum pitch that was detected Min pitch 0 to 99999 9999 This is the minimum pitch that was detected Average width 0 to 99999 9999 This is the average width that was detected between edges Max width 0 to 999
30. 81 y 1 i 3 38 8 20 49 38 42 Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia 2040 1 Tightening torque 1 2 N m See the diagram below when mounting bracket FQ XL2 is attached Unit mm 57 Optical axis Yo B 59 ol Mi z of q e Aj ioe ojo o q oI 4 M4 1 4 20UNC Depth 6 Depth 6 Plate Screw set double head Cushion Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia D A 20 0 1 r 8 i i 49 Tightening torque 1 2 N m 476 ar P F Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 S30 13 S35 13 S30 13M S35 13M 38 Optical axis MAH j s 38 FQ2 User s Manual 4 M3 Depth 4 9 78 wa 12 5 d a iE no gis BDO ae 4 M3 Depth 4 3 8 3 5 69 5 6 M3 Depth 4 ico NI 3 5 Unit mm Mounting hole dimensions Four 3 4 dia yi 1 26 0 1 69 5 0 1 I lt Mounting screw recommended tightening torque 0 54 N m 12 3 13 1 The shape of opposite side isomorphous
31. Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications Set the time in seconds to generate a timeout error 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored default 0 s FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Output You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item The setting procedure is the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 352 Data Output Time and TRIG Signal Input Interval Set the input interval for the TRIG signal so that it is equal to or greater than the data output time If the input interval for the TRIG signal is shorter than the data output time the output data buffer will eventually overflow and output data will be discarded Setting the Output Format Set the output format for the output data The setting procedure and the data output formats are the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection 0J Setting the Output Format p 355 Controlling
32. Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON X 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 _ _ detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON Y 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui Position compensation X 0 settings X display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui Position compensation Y 0 Y display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui Detected edge position X 0 X display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui Detected edge position Y 0 Y display sition display 0 ON 1 OFF External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual Two edge Position Compensation
33. External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 DX Logged data only 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 DY Logged data only 8 Position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 x Logged data only 9 Position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 Y Logged data only 11 Reference X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SX Logged data only 12 Reference Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SY Logged data only 14 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 122 condi Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 tions image sition 1 Previous image 436 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters E
34. External Reference Parameters 469 z L seoipueddy 470 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 300 Logging Number of data log Setting Acqui 1 to 100 100 condi records sition tions 310 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 number of labels sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 area sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 gravity X sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 gravity Y sition 1 Data logging ON 319 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 total label area sition 1 Data logging ON 326 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 master angle sition 1 Data logging ON 602 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 1 to 100 100 ment for number of la
35. Labeling Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement If more than one result was detected 2 Press the parameters and set the OK ranges youcar swith toadisplay spr each result Set the range for each of the following parameters Con tinuous measurements will be performed for the images that are taken 3 Press OK to accept the value Upper limit Lower limit Blue for OK Red for NG 147 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item suono dsuj dN Bues Y 148 Item Parameter Setting Description Judgment Number of parameters labels Range 0 to 100 Defaults Upper limit 100 Lower limit 0 Set the upper and lower limits of the number of labels for an OK judgement Total label area Range 0 to 999 999 999 9999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 0 Set the upper and lower limits of the total label area for an OK judgement Area Range 0 to 999 999 999 9999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 0 Sets the upper and lower limits of the area for an OK judgement Gravity center X Range 99 999 999 to 99 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 99 999 999 Lower limit 99 999 999 Set the upper and lower limits of the gravity X for an OK judgement Gravity center Y Range 99 999 999 to 99 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 99 999 999 Lower limit 99 999 999 Set the upper and lower limits of the gravity Y for an OK judgement
36. Labeling One region of the color you want to measure is counted as a Label You can sort these labels by position or size and assign numbers to them You can then output the total number of labels and size and position of a desired label Sample Settings Sample Measurement Regions of the extracted color are detected as labels Total number of detected labels 3 Label 2 from the measurement object Note If a Sensor with Color Camera is connected you can specify up to four colors to measure If a Sensor with Mono chrome Camera is connected the image is converted to a black and white binary image Then white pixels are measured Setup Procedure for Labeling Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press W Add item item 2 Press Labeling adi el BA Registering Inspection Items p 93 Note Drag the arrow boul at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to register the region and label characteristics in that region as reference data for measurements e Sensors with Color Cameras Only gt Inspect Inspection Add item Labeling Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag the rectangle to move it 2 Place the objec
37. Master angle Range 180 to 180 Defaults Upper limit 180 Lower limit 180 Sets the upper and lower limits of the master angle for an OK judgement Unstable Labeling Results The Desired Color Cannot Be Detected Add a specific color or enlarge the color range Extraction Is Automatically Performed for an Undesired Color When Teaching Manually set the color for which to measure the labeling p gt Inspect Inspection Area Modify Settings Tab Page Teach e Sensors with Color Cameras Only 1 Press lt Set color on the right of the display 2 Drag around the color for which you want to measure the labeling Labeling with that color will be automatically detected Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are displayed Only the extracted color will appear on the display 3 Press OK 4 Press TEACH 5 Press Back to end teaching Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item Color pick from the image FQ2 User s Manual Note Measuring More Than One Color Set the colors using the color palette Press lt q Color palette on the Set Color Display to display the color palette Up to four colors can be specified If the Color inv Option is selected the color outside the region will become the selected color The Inv Check Box applies to all colors Select the Exclusion Check Box to exclude the select
38. The BUSY signal will remain ON while external teaching is being executed If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection Zo S o v2 25 3a O ge F 5308 Do 25 2 o 05 Sa O S O E Ey l Q w D v D 255 256 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Overview If you mount a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit in addition to outputting OR judgement results you can also use the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to output the judgement results of judgement conditions that you set for parallel output called parallel judgement output and the results of measurement values and expressions for inspection items called parallel data output Measurement trigger Sensor Data Unit External device single continuous measurements e Control commands Sensor Output Data OR judgement result Parallel judgement output e Parallel data output Setting the Measurement Trigger The measurement trigger can be chosen from the following two types e Single measurement One measurement is performed for each external trigger Continuous measurement Measurements are performed continuously Refer to the following page fo
39. _ scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 position X sition 1 Data logging ON 316 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 435 z L seoipueddy External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 Y display sition 702 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sation display sition 703 Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 704 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 705 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 706 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 display sition Search Position Compensation
40. s er Delimiter l Delimiter Scene number Scene number 2 digits max 2 digits max lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally K CR Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r erl Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 to change to FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications ay u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 368 Data Acquisition Setting Commands POSITIONDATA or PD Get Image Adjustment Data This command acquires parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item lt Command Format gt Command External reference data 4 digits max oNO oo Pfols ijt ifo njojatr a l er or Space Item Delimiter 0x20 number Space Space ele TT Et ie 020 020 Delimiter Command as an External reference data 0x20 0x20 4 digits max Space Item 0x20 number lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Acquired value ane ae When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r fer Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number __ Specifies the item number of the position compensation item or of the filter item External reference data Specifies the external reference data number number LT 12 2 External Refer
41. 4 Press Back to end making the setting Parameter Setting Description Correlation Range 0 to 100 Set the correlation range that is to be judged as OK If the correlation in Defaults Lower limit 60 Upper limit 100 the measurement results is 0 the judgement will be NG regardless of the setting of the lower limit Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Set the range of movement in the X direction that is to be judged as OK Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Set the range of movement in the Y direction that is to be judged as OK Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Angle Range 180 to 180 Set the angle range that is to be judged as OK Defaults Lower limit 180 Upper limit 180 Count Range 0 to 221 Set the density difference range that is to be judged as OK The value Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 221 will increase for larger percentages of areas with no pattern This param eter is valid when setting a plain inspection area for a divided model Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Note You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result type on the right of the display Absolute value default The measured coordinates are output as absolute values Relative valu
42. Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions The ON condition for the OR signal or the ORO to OR31 signals can be set to be output when the judgement results are OK or when they are NG The default setting is when they are NG Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OR output Item Description OR output OK ON The output is turned ON if the judgement is OK For the overall judgement the output is turned ON if all judgements are OK NG ON default The output is turned ON if the judgement is NG For the overall judgement the output is turned ON if even one judgements is NG Changing the Polarity of the BUSY Output The Sensor turns ON the BUSY output signal during measurements and other processing to indicate that a measurement trigger cannot be received The polarity of the BUSY signal can be reversed so that it is ON only when a trigger signal can be received In the default settings the BUSY signal is assigned to OUT1 If you change the assignment of the BUSY signal change the polarity of the corresponding output Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OUT1 Polarity Item Description OUT1 Polarity Positive default The BUSY signal is ON while the Sensor is processing data Negative The BUSY signal is ON while the Sensor can receive a trigger signal All timing charts in this manual show the operation of the BUSY signal w
43. Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled p 321 Setting range e Yes No default Yes Output data size Set the data size to output from the output area Any changes in the setting are applied when the Sensor is restarted Note If the total size of the data that is specified as output data exceeds the size that is set here all of the data will not be output at the same time but will be separated over more than one cycle BA Output Data Size and Number of Out put Data Upper Value Setting p 298 Set the input connection input tag set to 16 bytes greater than the size that you set for this parameter 32 bytes 64 bytes 128 bytes or 256 bytes default 32 bytes Refreshing task period Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP Set the communications cycle for cyclic tag data link communications for the Vision Sensor Set the same value as you set for the requested packet interval RPI on the Network Configura tor e Set this parameter to the same value as you set for the requested packet interval RPI in the PLC e This parameter is necessary for the FQ2 to synchronize with the communications cycles of the cyclic tag data link communications that are set for tag connections on the Net work Configurator and in the PLC If the value in the FQ2 is longer than the value in the PLC cyclic data exchange will not be performed accordi
44. Image Image adjustment 2Edge midpoint comp Modify Basic Teach The settings are the same as those for the Two edge Position Compensation item LT Teaching p 82 e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2ed midp comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 77 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the Y coordinate XO Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sure
45. Min color deviations GION eaessescs Min color deviations and densities 10 60 15 gt 30 and densities 15 95 149 lt 30 Judges that there is an edge and performs measurements Judges that there is no edge measurement result is NG Screen Display When the Edge Level and Noise Level Are Changing A bar showing the threshold level moves up and down on the graphic as the edge level noise level value changes A cross key cursor will also appear at the detected edge position Edge level Blue Noise level Yellow 7 0 Screen display when the edge level are changing 123 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item suonoedsu dN Buas Y 124 Undesired Edge Position Is Automatically Detected When Teaching Sensors with Color Cameras Only Manually set the color of the edge that you want to detect gt Inspect Inspection Edge Position Modify Settings Tab Page Teach 1 Press lt q Color ON OFF on the right side of the display Press ON 3 gt Press lt Set color on the right of the display 4 Press lt q Detection mode on the right of the dis play and select one of the following detection modes Wanahikiudka annnak 5 Drawa rectangle around the color that you want to use to extract an edge The specified color will be extracted 6 Press OK to enter the edge color 7 Press TEACH again 8 Press Back Ca Only a rectangle can be used to specif
46. PLC Link Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual Item Single function Standard mod High resolution models models els Model NPN FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S30 13 FQ2 S30 10 20 30 08 30 08M 13M PNP FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S35 13 FQ2 S35 S15 S25 S35 08 S35 08M 13M I O specifi Input signals 7 signals cations Single measurement input TRIG Control command input INO to IN5 Output signals 3 signals Control output BUSY Overall judgement output OR Error output ERROR Note The assignments of the three output signals OUTO to OUT2 can be changed to the individual judgements of the inspection items the image input ready output READY or the external lighting tim ing output STGOUT Ethernet specifi 100Base TX 10Base T cations Communica Ethernet TCP no protocol tions Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol EtherNet IP or PLC Link I O expansion Possible by connecting FQ SDU1L Sensor Data Unit 11 inputs and 24 outputs RS 232C Possible by connecting FQ SDU2L Sensor Data Unit Input specifica Refer to Table 2 tions Output speci
47. Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Use a power supply that meets the following specifications The power supply is sold separately Item Description FQ2 S2 FQ2 S30 Power supply voltage 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Recommended Power Supply S8VS 06024 24 VDC 2 5 A S8VS 01524 24 VDC 0 65 A External power supply terminal screws M4 tightening torque 1 2 N m Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class II DC power supply Attaching the LED Warning Label Attach the enclosed LED warning label to the cable or other location The LED warning label must be attached to a location that is readily visible from the Sensor Attachment Example Warning Label EYE R m z NZ Warning Label _ 7522 LEDS sc 08022008 CI 12 6 LED Safety p 497 LED RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM FQ2 User s Manual Wiring c suo osuuo pue uonejjesu Wiring Sensor Data Units Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU1L FQ2 S3 Sensors with Built in Lighting or Ns Sensors with C mounts SENSOR 0 PWR ERR RUN omron FQ SDU1 susy IN SENSOR OR OK
48. Specifications and Dimensions 477 z L seoipueddy Mounting Base Unit mm 1 4 20UNC Depth 4 Two M3 Depth 4 i Mounting Hole Dimensions Two 3 4 dia Q Four 4 5 dia aje gt t 7 2 20 2 16 3 0 1 23 5 20 2 0 1 3 65 57 8 0 1 L 80 5 J Mounting screw recommended tightening 3 torque 0 54 N m 47 ar P A E Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual Touch Finder Specifications Item Model with DC power supply Model with AC DC battery power supply FQ2 D30 FQ2 D31 Number of connectable Sensors Number of sensors that can be recognized switched 32 number or sensor that can displayed on monitor 8 Main Types of measurement displays Last result display last NG display trend monitor histograms func tions Types of display images Through frozen zoom in and zoom out images Data logging Measurement results measured images Menu language English German French Italian Spanish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean or Japanese Indica LCD Display device 3 5 inch TFT color LCD tions Pixels 320 x 240 Display colors 16 777 216 Backlight Life expect 50 000 hours at 25 C ancy Brightness Provided adjustment Screen saver Provided The time setting can be changed Indicators Power indicator color green POWER Power indicator color green POWER E
49. The region within which the model is searched can be changed In the default settings the whole display is set as the measurement region p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Settings Tab Page Teach O Search G4 700 419 Insp region 1 Press lt lt Insp region on the right of the display The Insp region Display will appear 152 2 Adjust the size and position of the measurement re gion e Change the size Press the frame at one corner The processing time can be shortened by making the region smaller Po ala pK cance e Change the position Drag the figure to move it 2012 08 Changing Output Coordinate Positions You can specify which part of the model to detect as coordinates during inspections Normally the center position of the registered model is used as the detection point p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Settings Tab Page Teach lt q Detection point 1 Use one of the following methods to move the cross Drag the cross cursor cursor to the desired position The position of the cross cursor will be the coordinate eo alee position that is output This position is registered rela tive to the model region g e Drag the cross cursor to move it 201 2 08 e Press lt q Console on the right of the display to dis play the console You can use the cross cursor on the console to change
50. 1 position X sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 measurement angle sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 detection count sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 701 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 702 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 display sition 704 Count display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 800 Position X display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 tern sition tive value 801 Position Y display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 tern sition tive value 802 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 display pattern sition tive value FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 459 z L seoipueddy Edge Position External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement
51. 101 109 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item suonoedsu dN Bues Y Increasing Processing Speed The following two methods can be used to reduce processing time e Reduce the range in which a shape search II is performed for the model BA Changing the measurement region p 102 e Reduce the angle range setting Adjust the Angle range parameter to reduce the range in which a shape search II for the model is performed O Setting the angle range p 99 Editing the Model Regions and Measurement Region Changing the Model Regions This section describes how to edit the model regions You can edit the model region in the same way as for a search region Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle LT p 100 Model registration region Bho ke Measurement region region that is searched for the model If the model region is changed perform teaching again LL p 96 Changing the Measurement Region The region within which the model is searched can be changed In the default settings the whole display is set as the measurement region You can edit the measurement region in the same way as for a search region Changing the Measurement Region 0J p 102 119 Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and ou
52. 12 1 Menu Tables accens ntiair GaGa se aai ee Meee eee ee 404 Image Tab Page 0 00 eee eee 404 Inspect Tab Page resgate i ce ce ce eee eee ee ln SAR tenes 407 In Out Tab Page orasi masseto akiaga e t a a bea ea pt ana ea a E a eens 414 Test Tab Page ee ccc saree and da tee kee Gan eee eee and ae enw T 419 Run Tab Page from Setup Display 0 0 00 eee Sorat sai 420 TOO geite a E iia E E E ae deur away E OE 420 Common Menu Commands 000 eect eee 429 12 2 External Reference Parameters 0000 eee ee eee eee 430 Color Gray Filter 2326 4de anc eeea dead ooh eaten see eh EGGS 430 Weak Smoothing 000 c cece eee eens 431 Strong Smoothing 0002 cece eee cee eee eee teens ees 431 Dilate 2 ives ee pee ie eee eed eh ee Bede eRe ee we 431 Erosion Median Extract Edges Extract Horizontal Edges Extract 432 Backgroviid Suppression 3 46 00 69h Scena hate ee eee hee wed 432 Shape Search II Position Compensation 0 000 cece 434 Search Position Compensation 0 00 000 cee eee eee 436 Edge Position Compensation 0 000 cece eens 438 Two edge Position Compensation 20 000 cece eee 441 Two edge Midpoint Compensation 2 0 0 0 cece eee ee 444 Edge Rotation Position Compensation 0 00000 cece eee ee 448 SSAC MM css meee eE eE Ea eee eE E aaen tre E E thas E Eren E e E 451 Sensitive Search po aeetis uae Di a aa a a ee
53. 2 2 3 OUTO Used to assign output signals to OUTO OR total judgement default READY System p 242 OUT1 and OUT2 RUN STG strobe trigger ORO item 0 o ol O judgement to OR31 item 31 judgement 2 Q and expression 0 judgement to expres sion 31 judgement OUT1 BUSY default READY RUN STG System strobe trigger ORO item 0 judgement to OR31 item 31 judgement and expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement OUT2 ERROR default READY RUN STG System strobe trigger ORO item 0 judgement to OR31 item 31 judgement and expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement OR output You can set the output conditions for the OK ON or NG ON default System p 244 OR signal and for output signals to which judgements are assigned Output mode You can set the output mode for the OR One shot output Level output default System p 242 signal and for output signals to which judgements are assigned Output delay When one shot output mode is selected 0 to 1 000 ms default 0 ms System this parameter sets the delay from when measurement processing is completed until when the OR signal turns ON Output time When one shot output mode is selected 1 to 1 000 ms default 5 ms System this parameter sets the time that the OR signal is ON BUSY output Specifies when to turn OFF the BUSY Measurement default Data logging System p 245 signal after starting measurement pro Image logging or Result display ces
54. 31 29 33 35 45 47 39 Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit parallel judgement outputs password PC Tool PNP Polarizing Filter using Position compensation position compensation items Position X Position Y Positive 27 244 234 101 245 244 243 244 270 243 42 42 42 42 42 42 240 482 489 490 259 32 256 258 223 486 43 49 245 65 183 74 96 106 114 121 96 106 114 121 270 power supply and ground terminal block 32 power supply switch Touch Finder preventing mutual interference of multiple Sensors 31 67 FQ2 User s Manual R R average 138 Record separator 212 reference color re registering 246 RESET 45 47 restarting Sensor and Touch Finder 229 Rotation 77 RS 232C connections 392 RS 232C connector 32 RS 232C no protocol commands 395 RS 232C no protocol communications 393 RUN 45 47 Run Mode 23 S saturation 137 saved images displaying 201 saving data 178 218 saving image data 227 scene data saving 218 scene group data saving 218 scenes changing 190 changing names 191 copying 191 deleting 191 switching 246 SD card available space 222 formatting 222 information 222 operations 221 slot 31 SD card formatting 222 search position compensation 78 searching inspection items 95 105 113 selected color images 143 149 sensitive search 113 Sensor connector 32 Sensor data saving all Sensor data 218 Sensor Data Unit Cable 44
55. 46 489 Sensor Data Units 32 483 Sensor information 230 sensor monitor 183 Sensor selection 225 Sensor system data saving 218 Sensors renaming 230 single function models 472 specifications 472 standard models 472 switching 58 Sensors with Built in Lighting 29 FQ2 User s Manual Sensors with C mounts 30 Set color 124 142 148 setting data communications specifications Parallel Sensor Data Unit 262 setting the data to output automatically after measurements 395 EtherNet IP 295 no protocol RS 232C 395 no protocol TCP 351 PLC Link 329 setting up communications specifications EtherNet IP 289 no protocol RS 232C 394 no protocol TCP 351 PLC Link 327 setting up Ethernet 53 setting up no protocol communications 394 Setup Mode 23 Shape Search II 105 shape search position compensation 77 SHTOUT 45 47 Shutter speed 62 slider 32 sorting method 107 source image 70 startup display 183 startup mode 192 startup scene 192 startup setting 192 Statistical data 182 statistical data logging 216 STGOUT 45 47 straps 40 Strong Smoothing 69 subnet mask 55 Sub pixel 97 Summary of Requirements to Manufactures 498 Summary of Requirements to User 500 Switch Sensor 58 Switching Hub 27 system configuration 26 takt time 172 TCP no protocol communications 350 teaching errors labeling 154 sensitive search 119 test measurements continuous test 170 performing 170 threshold average 176 maximum 176 minimum 1
56. 8 UON UUOD a eseg e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado Buljjosju0D Input Format IN7 to INO IN7 IN6 INS IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO Execution Command Changing the Scene This command changes the scene to shift to a different process Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 01 Input the scene number as a binary value 10100001 Changes to scene 1 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 signals ON IN7 signal OFF ON ACK signal ee OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is ready to take measurement and it is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal indicates that the Sensor is currently changing the scene Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON The process that is currently being executed and the com mand that is input will not be executed correctly ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time 272 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Input Signals to Change the Scene Signal Function INO to IN4 These signals specify the scene number 0 to 31 IN5 Turn ON ING Turn OFF IN7 This signal functions as the execution trigger Set the INO to IN6 sig
57. 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge position Y yi 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 ref position X SXO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0 ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y 2Edge midpoint Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position X XO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position X x1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge1 position Y yi 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Midpoint X MX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Midpoint Y MY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 ref position X SX0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0 ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y Ref midpoint X refer SMX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence midpoint X Ref midpoint Y refer SMY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence midpoint Y FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and
58. Edge Enhancement filter item 1 Search Position Compensation position compensation item Camera image with results of Search Position Compensation item If the source image is set to the camera image the results of position compensation are applied to the Camera image Measurements are performed with inspection items Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Shape Search Position Compensation With this position compensation item an image pattern is registered in advance When the registered image pattern is detected the image is adjusted so that the image pattern is in the same position as when it was registered This position compensation item performs the same type of processing as the Search Position Compensation item but it performs special processing for the shape of the image pattern Use this position compensation item to correct the position of a rotated image pattern p gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp 2 Press Model Shape Sear pos comp 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the posi tion compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Shape Search Position Compensation below Press OK Press Back rch position cump aA e Detailed Settings for Shape Search Position Compensation The settings for the Shape Search Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Search
59. Images that are logged in the Sensor s internal memory e Logging image file Images that are logged in the SD card e Camera image file Images that were saved as logged images with the Log Image Button 3 The display switches to the saved image and mea surements are taken again LT saving images p 227 FQ2 User s Manual Selecl image display Logging Image file Camera image file Va es Performing Test Measurements 171 sBulyjas Bulaes pue Bunsel G 172 5 2 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time Checking the Measurement Takt Time The measurement time of this Sensor can be checked from the Setup or Run Mode display Measurement time Fa 0 Scenel Il The measurement time is the time taken from when a trigger is input until when all measurement processes are executed During the measurement time this Sensor will not accept the next trigger This means that the measurement time is the basic measurement takt time Inputting a trigger Measurement time Measurement takt time File Image input Measurement logging Display Shortening the Measurement Takt Time FQ2 User s Manual Increasing Image Input Speed With the partial input function it is possible to input only images that are in the region that is necessary for measurements The image measurement region becomes smaller and therefore the image input time is shortened Consider the offset in the measurement object when yo
60. Judging according to shapes and quantities Judging the number of labels Labeling p 146 E TA 00 NG oo 00 FQ2 User s Manual Inspection Item Selection Guide 91 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 92 4 2 Setup Procedure for Inspection Items The basic steps for setting up inspection items are shown below Step 1 Configuring Inspection Items Step 2 Teaching Step 3 Setting Judgement Parameters If measurements are unstable Step 4 Setting Detailed Items Step 5 Re teaching Note Only one inspection item can be used with the FQ2 S1U1 Up to 32 inspection items can be combined and used with the FQ2 S2 or FQ2 S3L Setup Procedure for Inspection Items FQ2 User s Manual 4 3 Configuring Inspection Items Adding New Inspection Items 1 Press Inspect Inspection 2 Press an unused inspection item number 3 Press Add item on the menu 4 Select an inspection item such as Search Note Setup a proc ing item Inspec O Inspection 2012 08 Inspec O Inspect iun Fo 0 Scenel 4 2012 08 When registering multiple inspection items press the inspection item number after 1 and set it in the same way If more than six inspection items are set drag the ea icon at the bottom of the menu upward to display the next inspection item numbers FQ2 User s Manual Configuring Inspection Items 93
61. Note For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ Saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image You can save the Camera image that is displayed on the Touch Finder or computer p gt R Setup Mode Log Image Button The Camera image that is being displayed when the Button is pressed is saved in external memory e Storage Location and File Names Storage location File name CAPTURE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_MS IFZ Example The following name would be used for an image that was captured at 10 10 21 350 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21_350 IFZ Make sure an SD card is inserted in the Touch Finder before capturing display images Note For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ 224 A A Convenient Functions for Operation FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Startup Run Display Pattern You can select the startup run display pattern gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Startup display Display pattern 1 Select from the following Graphics Graphics Details Statistical data All results region Trend monitor or Histogram Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously You can specify one Sensor to connect to the Touch Finder The Touch Finder will connect to that Sensor each time the Touch Finder is started p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings S
62. Output voltage 15 VDC 5 Output current 1 A max Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 40 C Storage 20 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 80 with no condensation Material Case PPE Cable length 1 5m Dimensions 78 x 50 x 30 mm without power cable Weight Approx 270 g Contents of label on AC Adapter FQ2 User s Manual Simo AMERICAN MODEL 5 SA115B 15U avis NG ADAPTER UE INPUT 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 4A OUTPUT 4 15V 1A 15W Jaa YATAYDY De Ret 4 PUT AC 100V OIDE NVA OUTPUT DC 15V 1A Oui Eki Liv be ie rei J MADE IN CHINA ta Specifications and Dimensions 487 z L seoipuseddy 488 Dimensions e I O Cables FQ WD002 Unit mm s Ez ire S lo no 1 The cable length is given in the following table Model L FQ WD002 2m FQ WD010 WD020 39 8 LM Unit mm 5000 3 100 10 kej 1 The cable length is given in the following table Model E FQ WD010 10m FQ WD020 20m e FQ Ethernet Cable FQ WNO002 WNO010 WNO020 Unit mm 44 7 L 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model L FQ WNO002 2m FQ WN010 10m FQ WN020 20m Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual e Sensor Data Unit
63. P Sensor settings Data output No protocol data 1 Press Communication type No protocol RS 232C 2 Set the RS 232C communications parameters Note If you connect to an OMRON PLC set the PLC to Host Link communications Baud rate 38400 Data lengh Item Description Stop bit 1 Flow contr Non Parameter Baud rate bps Set the baud rate to use for RS 232C communications Set the same baud rate as the external device that you will communi cate with 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 default 38400 Data length bits Set the same data length as the external device that you will communi cate with 7 bits or 8 bits default 8 bits Parity Sets the parity Set the same setting as the one in the PLC communica None Odd or Even default tions specifications none Stop bit Set the number of stop bits Set the same value as the one in the PLC 1 bit or 2 bits default 1 bit communications specifications Flow control Controls the flow of communications with the software None or Xon Xoff default none Delimiter Set the delimiter to add to the end of commands and responses CR LF or CR LF default Set the same delimiter as the external device that you will communicate with CR Interval timeout Set the time in seconds to generate a timeout error 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored default 0 s Total timeout 394
64. Press lt q Color palette on the Set Color Display to display the color palette Up to four colors can be specified If the Color inv Option is selected the color outside the region will become the selected color If the Inv Check Box is selected the color outside the region will become the selected color The Inv Check Box applies to all colors Select the Exclusion Check Box to exclude the selected color from extraction Making the Extract Color Easier to Check The display for the extracted color can be switched by using lt q Display setting The following display patterns can be selected for the extracted color Measurement image All color image default Selected color image or Binary image e Press lt q Background color to change the display for colors other than the extraction color The color can be chosen from Black default White Red Green or Blue e Sensors with Monochrome Cameras or for a Color Gray Filter 1 2 aA Press lt q Set color on the right of the display Press lt q Binary level Specify the range of brightness to detect and then press OK Specify the range of brightness to convert to a binary im age Measurement is performed after the image taken by the camera in 256 color grayscale is converted to a bina ry image Then white pixels are measured Press OK Press TEACH Press Back to end teaching Note
65. Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00501010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Position compensation Specifies the number of the position compensation item or filter item to set item number External reference num Specifies the external reference number ber Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Set value Specifies the set value Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 ZE Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Getting the Inspection Item Data 280F 00401020 This command acqu ires the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Inspection item number 4 bytes External reference 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00401020 Inspection item number from 00 External reference to 1F 2 digits max number Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Acquired value 4 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes bytes 28 OF End code 00401020 Acquired value 1 000 times the actual value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution end
66. Search Position Compensation Edge position comp edge position The color distribution or density changes in the object are used to detect and correct the position compensation Edge position comp Edge Position Compensation e 2Edge position comp Two edge Position Compensation e 2Edge midpoint comp Two edge Midpoint Compensation Edge rot pos comp Edge Rotation Position Compensation Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual e Features of the Position Compensation Items Edge Position Compensation The position is corrected in either The position is offset in the X or Y direction only one direction BA Edge Position Compensation p 80 Two edge Position Compensation PE z The position is corrected at the Mr e is offset in F same time in both the X and Y WO erections directions BE Two edge Position Ahe measure Compensation p 81 ment object is Two edge Midpoint Compensation not at an angle z The positions of two edges are detected and then the coordinates of the midpoint between eae T those two positions is used to correct the corrected to the midpoint tos position in either the X or Y direction between two edges BA Two edge Midpoint Com pensation p 83 Search Position Compensation The position needs to be s bewj uiye L An image pattern is recognized to detect and correct the position BA Search Position Compensation p 78 There is a char
67. Section 2 Symbol and border black Background yellow Figure A Warning label Hazard symbol FQ2 User s Manual Requirements from Regulations and Standards 499 z L seoipueddy Summary of Requirements to User For Europe EN 60825 1 Requirements sub clause Laser safety officer Classification Class 1 Class 1M Class 2 Class 2M Not required but recommended for applications that involve direct viewing of the laser beam Class 3R Class 3B Class 4 Not required Required for visible emission Required for non visible emission Remote interlock Not required Connect to room or door cir cuits Key control Not required Remove key when not in use Beam attenuator Not required When in use prevents inad vertent exposure Emission indicator device Not required Indicates Indicates laser is energized laser is ener gized for non visible wavelengths Warning signs Not required Follow precautions on warn ing signs see note 2 Beam path Not required Class1Mas Notrequired Class 2Mas_ Terminate beam at end of useful length for Class 3B for Class3B see note 2 see note 3 Specular No require Class 1M as_ No require Class 2Mas Prevent unintentional reflections reflection ments for Class 3B ments for Class3B see note 2 see note 3 Eye protection No requirements Not required Required if eng
68. Sets the interval for retrying communications This setting is enabled only when Retry details is set to ON 0 to 2 147 483 647 ms Default 10 000 ms Max output data Sets the maximum data size that can be output at one time through PLC Link communications Set the number of bytes Any output data that is beyond this value is discarded 32 to 1 024 bytes Default 256 bytes Connection mode Sets the TPC connection mode TCP server or TCP client Default TCP server PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Changes to settings are not applied until the Vision Sensor is restarted Therefore save the settings and then restart the Vision Sensor aa 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor p 178 LT Restarting the Sensor p 229 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set in advance the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Output You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure
69. Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 701 Color deviation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 702 R average display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 G average display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 704 B average display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 705 Density average display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 706 Density deviation dis Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 play sition Labeling External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Number of labels Acquisition 0 to 100 0 Logged data only 6 Area Acquisition 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 AR 0 to Logged data only AR 99 7 Gravity center X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 X 0 to Logged data only X 99 8 Gravity center Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 O Y 0 to Logged data only Y 99 9 Reference area Acquisition 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 SA only 10 Reference position X Acquisition
70. Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Pink TRIG Trigger signal Refer to the following information for signal wiring Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default Wiring p 42 assignment aa ve Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default assignment Timing Chart ON TRIG signal feel ON for 1 ms min OFF d ON 3 BUSY Sonal EE ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions OR signal lt Turned ON when overall judgement is NG OR output ON for NG 1 Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process 3 When the measurement has been finished the measurement result is output using an OR signal and the BUSY signal is turned OFF 1 1 You can also set the signal to be turned OFF after data logging image logging or displaying results in the BUSY output When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the timing when images are taken is delayed LT Triming Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is ON p 61 226 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Sample Ladder Program The following sample program is used to input a TRIG signal to perform a single measurement A single measurement will be performed when W0O 00 turns ON W0 00 When the single measurement command bit W0 00 turns ON the TRIG signal i
71. Xoff reception 3 Communication Sets the communications type to use for Invalid default PLC link SYSMAC System p 327 E type EtherNet IP or PLC Link outputs PLC link MELSEC EtherNet IP 2 Area set p 328 Dl x tings Only when communications type is PLC Link amp Sets the area to write command data to PLC Link SYSMAC CS CJ CP One System g the Sensor CIO Area CIO default Control inputs command codes and Work Area WR 8 lt command parameters are written to this Holding Bit Area HR area Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO to EMC PLC Link MELSEC QnU Q QnAS Data Register File Register Link Register 2 Set the first address of the command 0 to 99 999 default 0 System 5 area jel xt Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence fey 3 3 D 2 amp Sets the area to write execution results CIO Area CIO default Work Area System p 328 S S 5 from the Sensor WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary 2 Ol a ae Control outputs command codes Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area _ 8 response codes and response data EMO to EMC Sias g S n S EI 2 Set the first address of the response area 0 to 99999 default 100 System 5 jel xt 3 amp Sets the area to write output data from CIO Area CIO default
72. ao FF fitttetmyotatriay T sero or Space Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 0x20 odel Tt TI setting A l n a m nspection item xternal reference et value Delimiter Command number data number 2 digits max 4 digits max Space Space Space 0x20 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E R eR Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number __ Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 9999 number LT 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Acquired value Returns the data for the specified inspection item BA 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 371 jeusay y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 372 VERGET Acquire Software Version This command acquires the version information of the Sensor software lt Command Format gt Command Parameter oo or OO vietRiefe r i s for Space Delimiter 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Software version Date Space Delimiter o k Jer Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Software version Retur
73. attached 8 Connector cover Part Names and Functions This cover is attached to the connection when an Ethernet Cable is not con nected FQ2 User s Manual Touch Finder 5 11 9 No Name Description 1 Operation POWER Lights green when the Touch Finder is turned ON indicators ERROR Lights red when an error occurs LI 11 1 Error Histories p 398 SD ACCESS Lights yellow when an SD card is inserted Flashes yellow when the SD card is being accessed CHARGE Lights orange when the Battery is charging 2 LCD touch panel Displays the setting menu measurement results and images input by the camera 3 SD card slot An SD card can be inserted 4 Battery cover The Battery is inserted behind this cover Remove the cover when mounting or removing the Battery 5 Power supply switch Used to turn the Touch Finder ON and OFF 6 Touch pen holder The touch pen can be stored here when it is not being used 7 Touch pen Used to operate the touch panel 8 DC power supply connector Used to connect a DC power supply 1 p s0 9 Slider Used to mount the Touch Finder to a DIN Track 10 Ethe
74. dis tance between two points calculation symbols TJG Rename Deletes copies the expression or Scene p 157 changes the expression name Copy Scene Delete Scene Judgement Specifies the parameters for judgement Scene p 161 of results 2 5 Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 161 f g judgement results of a calculation in the A g overall judgement 2 a O In Out Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 Statistical data Sets whether to record the number of ON default or OFF System p 214 measurements and the number of NG 2 overall judgements a Image logging Sets the parameter to log measurement All Only NG or None default System p 209 image data p 214 Data log Condition Sets the parameter to log measurement All Only NG or None default System p 209 ging data from inspection items Select data You can select the parameters to log Parameter names for the filter items System p 209 from the parameters in the filter items position compensation items inspection position compensation items inspection items and expression that are set items and expression that are set Delete Log Resets the log data without turning OFF System p 216 the power supply 414 Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence
75. e Timing Chart for Strobe Trigger Output Signal The STGOUT signal turns ON in sync with the trigger input signal from an external device ON Trigger input TRIG OFF c Trigger delay ON i SEA ee j i shutter signal OFF Strobe output delay L I ON 1 STGOUT Strobe output time OFF Polarity of all output signals Positive Controlling Operation from an External Device The following Sensor functions can be controlled with command inputs from an external device without connecting the Touch Finder Operation Description Reference Switching the scene This command changes the scene when the line process changes p 272 Clearing measurement This command clears the measurement values p 273 values The OR signal and D signals are not cleared Clearing an error This command turns the ERROR signal OFF p 274 The ERROR indicator is also turned OFF Re registering the model This command re registers the model and reference color p 276 and reference color Teaching This command uses the image that is currently being input to execute p 277 teaching for all of the registered items Clearing the OR and D sig This command clears the OR signal and D signals p 278 nals Saving data in the Sensor This command saves the current settings scene data and system data p 280 in the Sensor FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit
76. e g MEASURE for a single measurement The Vision Sensor then returns a response such as OK NG or some value Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single or continuous measurement the Vision Sensor will automatically output to an external device e g a PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the external device Sensor Data Unit Vision Sensor External device Ly bate Up to 32 specified data a lE items can be automati external device in either ASCII or binary format through a continuous serial connection There is no handshaking from the external device to confirm if it can receive the data FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 393 OL ozez su wm Bunosuuoo Setting Up No protocol Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details BA 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 53 Initial Settings for No protocol Communications To perform no protocol communications with RS 232C you must set the communications baud rate data length and other RS 232C communications parameters
77. ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Edge position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Edge position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 y Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Standard position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX only 99 999 9999 8 Standard position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY only 99 999 9999 9 Difference in position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DF Logged data only 99 999 9999 120 Set color Set color Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification 132 Mea Edge level Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sure sition ment 133 condi Noise level Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 tions sition 136 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 137 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 138 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 139 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sit
78. field of view The vertical field of view depends on the model as follows FQ2 S Approx 60 of the horizontal field of view FQ2 S0O0O0OL 0 080 Approx 90 of the horizontal field of view Note The tolerance is 10 FQ2 SLILI100F FQ2 SLIL1100F Installation distance L mm 1 000 7 600 ae Pa 200 7 0 100 200 300 Horizontal field of view mm FQ2 SLILI100N FQ2 SLIL100N Installation distance L mm 400 gt OL 0 200 400 Horizontal field of view mm Installation c SUONNeUUOD pue UOT E e Su e There is a certain amount of deviation among Sensors in the center of the optical axis For this reason when install ing the Sensor check the center of the image and the field of view on the LCD monitor of the Touch Finder and in the PC Tool Removal Procedure 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver between the Mounting Brack et and the Sensor case on either side and remove the Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket FQ2 S30 O00 Sensors with C mounts Installation Procedure Directly Mounting the Sensor 1 Mount the Sensor with M3 screws Tightening torque 0 54 N m Effective depth of mounting holes 4 mm Refer to the dimension drawings in the appendix for the positions of the screw holes Mounting the Sensor to the Base 1 You
79. s Manual ON i OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON or OFF ON T Control Command gt Execution Active OFF i ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ttt 5 6X7 4 4 7 1 2 3 3 T The command code and command parameters are set from the PLC 2 The PLC turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the Vision Sensor When the Vision Sensor receives the execution command the Command Execution Active BUSY signal turns ON the READY signal turns OFF and the command is executed The command code response code and response data are set when the Vision Sensor completes execution of the command The Control Command Completed FLG signal turns ON When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal When the Vision Sensor detects that the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it turns OFF the Control Command Completed FLG signal and the Command Execution Active BUSY signal and turns ON the READY signal If the PLC does not turn OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal within the time that is set for the retry interval in the PLC Link settings the Control Command Completed FLG signal and Command Execution Active BUSY signal will be f
80. s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof COPYRIGHT AND COPY PERMISSION This document shall not be copied for sales or promotions without permission This document is protected by copyright and is intended solely for use in conjunction with the product Please notify us before copying or reproducing this document in any manner for any other purpose If copying or transmitting this document to another please copy or transmit it in its entirety FQ2 User s Manual Meanings of Signal Words The following signal words are used in this manual Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in minor or VAN WARNING moderate injury or may result in serious injury or death Additionally there may be significant property damage Meanings of Alert Symbols The following alert symbols are used in this manual Indicates general prohibitions for which there is no specific symbol Indicates the possibility of laser radiation Indicates the possibility of explosion under specific conditions Indicates prohibition when there is a risk of minor injury from electrical shock or other source if the product is disassembled This product is not designed or rated for ensuring safety of persons Do not use it for such purposes Ope oO The Sensor emits visible light which may adversely affect the eyes in rare instances Do not look directly
81. signal Command code Command Execution Active BUSY signal Response READY signal Area Response code Response data Control Command Completed FLG signal ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Control Command gt Execution Active OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF i 1 i i i i i i i i j i i 1 T i i i i i 1 i i 1 ON H i i i i i 1 i i i I i 1 i i i i 1 t ft t ttt 1 2 3 4 5 6X7 1 Set the command code and the command parameters from the PLC while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The Controller turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the Vision Sensor 3 When the Vision Sensor receives the execution command the Command Execution Active BUSY signal turns ON the READY signal turns OFF and the command is executed 4 The command code response code and response data are set when the Vision Sensor completes execution of the command 5 The Control Command Completed FLG signal turns ON 6 When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal 7 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF th
82. sition Density change 0 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT 0 sition Edge level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 sition Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 en ae sition Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification Edge color R1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color G1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color B1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Density change 1 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT 0 sition Edge level 1 Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sition Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 pa dee sition Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 1 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 1 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion External Reference Parameters 449 z L seoipueddy 450 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement en
83. suo osuuo pue uoneljesu Connecting to Sensors from External Devices Such as PLCs Set the IP address of the Sensor according to the network where the external devices such as PLCs are connected gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press Fixed 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network where the external devices such as PLCs are connected Note If you connect OMRON CS CJ series PLCs to the Ethernet the following default IP addresses are assigned to the PLCs IP address 192 168 250 node_address Connecting to Sensors from a Computer Using the PC Tool Configurations Consisting of Only Sensors and a Computer PC Tool If the configuration consists only of Sensors and a Touch Finder set the network settings on the computer as described below No IP address settings are required on the Sensors The following procedure is for Windows XP Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu 2 Click Network and Internet Connections in the control panel and then double click Network Connections 3 Right click the Local Area Connection Icon and select SLocal Area Connection Properties Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename Properties chi Setting Up Ethernet FQ2 User s Manual 4 On the General Tab Page double click Internet Proto col TCPIIC Local Are
84. suonoedsu dN Bues 174 94 Modifying Existing Inspection Items 1 Press the number of the inspection item to be set 2 Press Modify on the menu Deleting Inspection Items 1 Press the number of the inspection item to be delet ed 2 Press Delete on the menu Note Inspec O Inspection 2 Dat Popa Inspec O Inspection Executing Similar Measurements in Different Places Copy an inspection item that is already registered Copy Change the name of an inspection item Rename Configuring Inspection Items FQ2 User s Manual 4 4 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item Search Inspection Item This inspection item is used to perform inspections for shapes or for presence The image pattern that is to be measured is registered in advance and measurements are performed to see if the pattern is present or if the shape is different The image pattern that is registered in advance is called the model The degree to which the image matches the model is called the correlation Sample Settings Sample Measurement Model desired image pattern Search for sections that are similar to the model Search region region to OK NG search for the model Setup Procedure for the Search Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Search tal Edge Pit
85. upper Scene area for an OK judgement limit 999 999 999 999 lower limit 0 Gravity X Set the upper and lower limits of the 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 defaults Scene gravity X for an OK judgement upper limit 99 999 9999 lower limit 99 999 9999 Gravity Y Set the upper and lower limits of the 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 defaults Scene gravity Y for an OK judgement upper limit 99 999 9999 lower limit 99 999 9999 Master angle Sets the upper and lower limits of the 180 to 180 defaults upper limit 180 Scene master angle for an OK judgement lower limit 180 Result type You can change the output form of the Absolute value default Relative value Scene p 97 Except for measurement values or Ratio Edge Position or Area only p 107 Edge Posi p 115 tion Edge p 122 Pitch and p 129 Labeling p 133 Display set You can change the parameters of the The names of the judgement conditions Scene p 96 ting judgement conditions are displayed p 106 p 114 p 121 p 128 p 132 p 137 p 141 Auto Automatically adjusts the judgement OK Teach or NG Teach Scene p 175 adjustment parameters by using actual workpieces Except for which are considered as good or faulty Labeling and products Edge Pitch Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 F S Rotation
86. 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi switch sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Judgement logging Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 switch sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Average deviation den Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 sity average logging sition 1 Data logging ON switch 313 Color deviation density Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 deviation logging switch sition 1 Data logging ON 314 R average logging Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 switch sition 1 Data logging ON 315 G average logging Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 switch sition 1 Data logging ON 316 B average logging Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 switch sition 1 Data logging ON 318 Standard deviation log Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 ging switch sition 1 Data logging ON 319 Density average differ Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 ence logging switch sition 1 Data logging ON 320 Density deviation differ Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 ence logging switch sition 1 Data logging ON 467 z L seoipueddy 468 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 700 Display Average color display
87. 0 ence position X Ref position Y refer SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position Y Reference angle ST 180 to 180 0 NG sub region CT 0 to 100 0 Sub region number AN 1 to 99 0 Sub region number X ANX 0to9 0 Sub region number Y ANY 0to9 0 Sub region pos X sub DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 region position X Sub region pos Y sub DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 region position Y Correlation sub region CRN O to CRN 80 O to 100 0 Deviation sub region DVN 0 to DVN 80 O to 221 0 Edge Position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position X refer SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position X Ref position Y refer SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position Y Offset amount DF 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge width Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error D edge width DF 0 to 99999 9999 0 Ref edge width SW 0 to 99999 9999 0 Edge width Ww 0 to 99999 9999 0 FQ2 User s Manual 165 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data suonoedsu dN Bues 174 166
88. 11 4107 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code mo f w coro aoa it cormangcoge or nen S 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Sapani adh 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired scene number Select Scene Command Code 1000 0030 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents A a 12t015 8to11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Scene number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents pict alts ahead ee Pa oe 8 to 11 4107 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 5 E B e B Ea a or nich ne 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 P e ae 2i PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Get Image Adjustment Data Command Code 1010 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents Salis 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 5 0000 0000 0000 coon e number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 aE ao Reierence Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents A Gn EAE 8to11 4to7 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code i 0000 0000 0100 0
89. 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition X compensation amount 0 DX Logged data only 6 Scroll Y Acquisition Y compensation amount 0 DY Logged data only 7 Scroll 6 Acquisition Rotational compensation 0 DT Logged data only amount 8 Position X Acquisition Measurement value X coordi 0 x Logged data only nate 9 Position Y Acquisition Measurement value Y coordi 0 Y Logged data only nate 10 Angle Acquisition Measurement angle 0 TH Logged data only 11 Reference X Acquisition 0 to 9 999 0 SX Logged data only 12 Reference Y Acquisition 0 to 9 999 0 SY Logged data only 13 Reference angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ST Logged data only 14 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR Logged data only 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compensa 1 tions sition tion 1 Position compensation based on internal search 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 image sition 1 Previous image 123 Model Rotation Setting Acqui 0 No rotation 1 Rotation 1 region sition 124 Reference X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 sition 125 Reference Y Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 sition 126 Reference angle Setting Acqui 180 to 180 0 sition 140 Rotation angle upper Setting Acqui 180 to 1
90. 2012 img_2012_05_10 22_10_21_000 IFZ NNN is a serial number that is added when images are logged at the same time 41 Files are stored in the following folder when the PC Tool is used My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard 2 You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name 3 You can change the img at the beginning of the file name 216 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 User s Manual e File format Statistical data The data is saved in the following CSV format Number of measurements number of OKs number of NGs OK rate NG rate delimiter Image data Image data is saved in a special format for OMRON Vision Sensors The file name extension is IFZ Measurement data Measurement data is saved in CSV format The same format is used to log the most recent results to files for the inspection item region and expression region in the file logging function LT Fite Logging Format Items 8 and 9 on p 212 The saved recent measurement data cannot be loaded back into the Sensor and displayed on a trend monitor or histo gram The data and time are not recorded with the measurement data The file name is created from the time when the file is saved It does not indicate when the measurement was made The recent log data will be cleared if the scene is changed Changing the Format for Saving Measurement Data The output CSV file format can be changed according to the external devic
91. 288 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Timing Chart Operation When Number of Delay Is Set to 2 RUN signal TRIG signal BUSY signal OR signal DO signal GATE signal a A UNa Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered A OFF ON for 1 ms min ON oT 1 2 3 4 5 ON while measurements are being processed ON 4 depends on BUSY output conditions OFF Overall judgemen Overall judgement Overal judgement Overall judgement Overall judgement result for 1 i i for 2 result for 3 result for result for 5 The results for 1 is output when the TRIG signal turns ON the third time eae not ON ae GATE ON delay T OFF Output time Repeatedly turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF The OR signal is output when the TRIG signal is turned ON When the TRIG signal turns ON for the third time the measurement result D0 for the first time that the TRIG signal turned ON is output and the GATE signal is also output at this time When the TRIG signal turns ON for the fourth time the measurement result D0 for the second time that the TRIG signal turned ON is output and the GATE signal is also output at this time Each time the TRIG signal turns ON after that the measurement result D0 from when the TRIG signal turned ON two times previously is output FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputtin
92. 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 2 0 V max 3 Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual Dimensions FQ2 S10010F S10050F FQ2 S20010F S20050F Unit mm FQ2 S15010F S15050F FQ2 S25010F S25050F FQ2 S30010F 08 S35010F 08 S30010F 08M S35010F 08M FQ2 S30050F 08 S35050F 08 S30050F 08M S35050F 08M The mounting bracket can be attached to any side Optical axis amp Oty nia ol 4M4 3 Depth 6 2 1 N 7 l 2 amp 4 4 20UNC Lye B Depth 6 ae o enl als lo Mounting hole dimensions Two 4 5 dia 20 0 1 Tightening torque 1 2 N m FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions 475 z L seoipueddy FQ2 S10100F S10100N S20100N FQ2 S20100F Unit mm FQ2 S15100F S15100N S25100N FQ2 S25100F FQ2 S30100F 08 S35100F 08 S30100F 08M S35100F 08M FQ2 S30100N 08 S35100N 08 S30100N 08M S35100N 08M Optical 46 axis L e000 je E amp aalala a Nc Ng l 9 t some iM aes 5 2 1 4 20UNC y 12 Depth 6
93. 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for standard position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Edge position offset Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 settings display sition 701 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 X display sition 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 Y display sition 800 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 X display pattern sition 801 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 1 Y display pattern sition Edge Width External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 7 Difference in edge Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 DF Logged data width only 121 Set color Set color Setting Acqui Edge color specification 0 _ sition 0 Not specified 1 Specified 131 Mea Edge color red Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sure sition ment 132 condi Edge color green Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 tions sition 133 Edge color blue Settin
94. 4 10 Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item Color Data Inspection Item This inspection item is used to perform inspections for foreign matter with a different color or for presence The region is set for a portion of the image with the color that is to be measured This region is called the measurement region The average color within the measurement region is measured If a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera is connected the average density in the measurement region is found and inspections are performed for the difference from the registered reference value density average and the variation within the measurement region density deviation Sample Settings Sample Measurement Judges using the average Measurement region color of the measurement region OK NG na na we we If a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera is connected the average density in the measurement region is measured and the density deviation is used for judgements Setup Procedure for Color Data Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Color Data Edge aS B Gil Edge Pitch BA Registering inspection items p 93 Labeling Cancel Note Drag the arrow lal at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items igo Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item FQ2 User s
95. 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SX only 11 Reference position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 SY only 15 Total label area Acquisition 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 TAR Logged data only 55 Master angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ATH 0 to Logged data only ATH 99 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 127 Extracte Background color Setting Acqui 0 Black 1 White 2 Red 3 0 d image sition Green or 4 Blue display condition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 131 Set color Area color inversion Setting Acqui 0 None or 1 Enabled 0 sition The binary value is displayed Binary for a Monochrome Camera 132 Mea Filling up holes Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 133 condi Outside trimming Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 tions sition 136 Label sort condition Setting Acqui 0 Ascending order of area 1 sition 1 Descending order of area 2 Ascending order of gravity X 3 Descending order of gravity X 4 Ascending order of gravity Y 5 Descending order of gravity 146 Binary Binary level upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 leve
96. COMOUT1 Output signal common DOO to 31 COMINO Input signal common all inputs DO15 except TRIG 2 Nc 32 COMIN1 Input signal common TRIG 3 DO OUT Data outpu 33 TRIG IN Measurement trigger input 4 D1 OUT Data outpu 34 INC 5 D2 OUT Data outpu 35 NC 6 D3 OUT Data output 36 RESET IN Reset input 7 D4 OUT Data outpu 37 INO IN Command input 8 D5 OUT Data outpu 38 IN1 IN Command input 9 D6 OUT Data outpu 39 IN2 IN Command input 10 D7 OUT Data outpu 40 IN3 IN Command input 11 D8 OUT Data outpu 41 IN4 IN Command input 12 D9 OUT Data outpu 42 IN5 IN Command input 13 D10 OUT Data outpu 43 IN6 IN Command input 14 D11 OUT Data outpu 44 IN7 IN Command input 15 D12 OUT Data outpu 45 Nc 16 D13 OUT Data outpu 46 NC 17 D14 OUT Data output 47 DSA IN Data send request signal 18 D15 OUT Data outpu 48 Nc 19 INC 49 NC 20 Nc 50 INC 21 NC 51 Nc 22 NC 52 ACK OUT Command execution completed flag 23 Nc 53 RUN OUT ON during measurement mode 24 NC 54 BUSY OUT ON during process execution 25 NC 55 OR OUT Overall judgement result 26 Nc 56 ERROR OUT ON during error 27 INC 57 STGOUT OUT Strobe trigger output 2 3 28 INC 58 SHTOUT OUT Shutter trigger output 29 NC 59 GATE OUT ON during the set output time 30 NC 60 COMOUTO Output signal common ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT SHTOUT and GATE 1 Leave all sig
97. Cable FQ WU002 WU005 WU010 WU020 Unit mm 100 4 12 pin round connector 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model L FQ WU002 2m FQ WU005 5m FQ WU010 10m FQ WU020 20m e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 FQ VP1002 VP1005 VP1010 30 pin flat cable connector Unit mm 42 7 7 1 Diaj C m 16 1 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model E FQ VP1002 2m FQ VP1005 5m FQ VP1010 10m FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions 489 z L soolpueddy e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 FQ VP2002 VP2005 VP2010 30 pin flat cable connector Unit mm 24 9 oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo L 71 p Sig 1 The cable lengths are given in the following table Model E FQ VP2002 2m FQ VP2005 5m FQ VP2010 10m e AC Adapter FQ AC1 Unit mm 1 800 to 2 000 78 1 500 30 490 ar P F Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual 12 4 Updating the Software The most recent version of the software and PC Tool can be downloaded from the following website for OMRON members Refer to the Member Registration Sheet that is enclosed with the Sensor http Awww omron cxone com vision_sys After you download the software use the following procedure to update When you update the software always update the software for the Touch Finder or PC Too
98. Check to see if communications were cut off with the data link partner device and to see if a cable is broken Check the cable connection to the data link partner device EtherNet IP communica tions error Error code 01010101 A timeout occurred in process ing to output the measurement results via EtherNet IP Make sure that handshake pro cessing is being performed by the master Also make sure that the measurement interval is long enough Check the measurement interval and handshake processing Change the timeout time so that it is suitable for the ladder program processing time Output buffer error Error code 01010701 An output data buffer overflow occurred during output process ing of measurement results for PLC Link or EtherNet IP e Check the measurement inter val to see if it is long enough e Make sure that handshake pro cessing is being performed by the master Check the measurement interval and handshake processing SD card output error Error code None A write to the SD card failed An attempt was made to save more data than the available space on the SD card Check to see if the SD card is locked Check to see if there is sufficient space available on the SD card Unlock the SD card Delete unnecessary files from the SD card Note ere If an error that is indicated by this icon occurs the ERROR operation indicator will light and the ERROR signal will tur
99. Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 339 jeusey y YBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Clear Measurement Values Command Code 2010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FEFFEFFF NG Save Data in Sensor Command Code 3010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Command code 5 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Re register Model Command Code 4010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 EJ PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Command
100. Communications Specifications 502 dex atorra iania naa a a a ane mata nae ete amateur des 506 Revision History cesso correns vee rres niretu ee crnka ee eee eee 512 FQ2 User s Manual Introduction 1 1 FQ2 series Vision Sensors 000 c cece eee eee eee 20 1 2 Measurement Process 00002e cece eee e een eeeeeeeas 21 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements 02 22 1 4 Basic Operational Flow 0 cee eee eee eee 24 1 1 FQ2 series Vision Sensors The FQ2 Series features Vision Sensors with integrated cameras and controllers They can be used to easily achieve simple inspections and measurements You can use parallel controls no protocol communications on Ethernet PLC Link communications on Ethernet and EtherNet IP communications on Ethernet as standard features You can also use a Data Unit to enable control with full scale parallel communications or RS 232C communications To set up and monitor the Vision Sensor you can use either the Touch Finder or the PC Tool running on a computer For actual operation you can use the Vision Sensor on a stand alone basis Setup Image Confirmation and Logging Tools Touch Finder FQ2 Vision Sensor Used to check images and set the judgement parameters It can also be used to save measurement results and check status during operation Sensor with C mount Sensor with Built in Lighting After the Sen
101. Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 tions sition Background Suppression External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 432 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External refer ence number Category 120 Mea sure ment 121 condi tions 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 FQ2 User s Manual Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data sition sion text Judgement string parameter Source image Setti
102. Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error WwW Edge width Edge width 0 to 99999 9999 SW Ref edge width reference This is the reference edge width from O to 99999 9999 edge width when the model was registered DF D edge width difference in This is the difference between the ref 0 to 99999 9999 edge width erence edge width and the measured edge width LT 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item 129 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 130 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Width The following values can be logged as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Edge Width edge in 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the difference between the reference width and the measured width edge width 1 When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table If more than one item is stored results are output for each model OJ 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the edge position cannot be detected when teaching Perform the following e If the color of the me
103. Fil Install Exe S OMRON FO FO Item Selector SensorData New Install Filebin C J 10 if there is more than one network card NIC installed in the PC select the NIC that is connected to the Sensor More than one NIC will be displayed for a PC with a wireless LAN I4 FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Select Fi A install Exe S OMRON FQ FQ Item Selector SensorData New Install Filebin _ sthod O i E Select C 10518198 a 1051819B A L soolpueddy FQ2 User s Manual Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor 495 11 Click the Update Sensor List Button FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Select File Install Exe s OMRON FQ FQ Item Selector SensorData New Install Filebin Sensor Find Method Local Auto O File List Select Network Cord 105510 Sensor List Select Sensor Name l Progress IP Address 10550 oO i Update Sensor List FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Select File Install Exe s OMRON FQ FQ Item Selector SensorData New Install Filebin Sensor Find Method Local Auto O File List Select Network Cord 105510 Sensor List 055100 FQ Stand by Update Sensor List If Installation completed normally is displayed in the dialog box the data has been overwritten normally 13 Reset the Se
104. Finder Use this function to correct the touch screen positions if they are offset from the opposite position p Setup Mode TF settings Touch screen calib Setting the Resolution of Measurement Objects Displayed on the PC Tool Use this function to set the resolution of measurement object that are displayed on the Touch Finder on the computer p Run Mode TF settings Resolution Rotating the Touch Finder Image by 180 You can rotate the Camera image by 180 This setting applies to logged images as well p gt Image Camera setup lt lt Rotate 180 Functions Related to the System FQ2 User s Manual Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator You can change the BUSY indicator to a RUN indicator gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output BUSY LED FQ2 User s Manual Functions Related to the System 231 suoyouny jua ju auoo J MEMO 2 Functions Related to the System FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection 8 1 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 000 c eee eee eee 234 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 0 0 c cee 256 234 8 1 Controlling Operation and Qutputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection Basic Operation with a Parallel Connection This s
105. Functions for Setup This section describes the functions that can be used when setting inspection items Making Settings with Stored Images With an FQ2 Vision Sensor judgement parameters can be set by using the following images e Images saved in internal Sensor memory e Image files in an SD card Note You can also use images that were captured on the display capturing the Displayed Image p 224 Saving Image Data e Temporarily Saving Images in the Sensor The measured images can be temporarily saved inside the Sensor These images are held until the Sensor power supply is turned OFF gt In Out Log setting Image logging 1 Setting Logging Parameters for Image Data p 214 e Saving Images in the Sensor to an SD Card The images that are temporarily saved inside the Sensor can be saved to an SD card p gt Setup Mode Save to file Logging Tab Page 1 Press Logging image 2 Select whether to save the most recently logged image or to save all of the data that is logged in the Sensor Storage location File name sensor_name LOGIMAGE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS IFZ Example The following name would be used for files saved at 10 10 21 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21 IFZ e Saving Images in an SD Card The image data can be saved in the SD card each time measurements are performed p Run Mode Logging LT Logging All Data File Logging p 209 You can also s
106. GATE signal ON period so that it is longer than the cycle time of the PLC and longer than the packet interval RPI e When operating under high load conditions a considerable leeway is required in the measurement interval to enable stable communications e On a network to which many devices are connected performance may drop e g responses may be delayed or packets lost or communications errors may occur when there is temporarily high traffic on the network Test the operation under actual conditions before you start actual operation of the system If the measurement interval is short communications errors may occur depending on the measurement processing time of the Sensor and the settings in the PLC Set the timeout time in the connection settings so that it is longer than the measurement processing time of the Sensor or increase the measurement interval a These are the connection settings for tag data links Make these settings from the Network Configurator 322 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Sample Ladder Programming Command Response Communications The following sample program is used to clear measurement values The Clear Measurement Values command lower bytes 2010 upper bytes 0010 is sent to the Vision Sensor First RUN Period Flag Sets the lower word of the Clear Measurement Values command Sets the upper word of the Clear Measurement Values command
107. IN Command input 19 TRIG IN Measurement trigger input 5 IN4 IN Command input 20 Nc 6 IN5 IN Command input 21 Nc 7 Nc 22 RESET IN Reset input 8 Nc 23 INC 9 NC 24 ACK OUT Command execution completed flag 10 NC 25 RUN OUT ON during measurement mode 11 NC 26 BUSY OUT ON during process execution 12 NC 27 OR OUT Overall judgement result 13 Nc 28 ERROR OUT ON during error 14 Nc 29 STGOUT OUT Strobe trigger output 15 Nc 30 SHTOUT OUT Shutter trigger output 16 NC 31 INC 32 COMOUTO Output signal common ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT and SHTOUT 1 Leave all signal terminals that are labeled NC open FQ SDU20 SDU25 RS 232C Pin Signal Names RS 232C Connector Pin No Signal name Function 1 NC Not connected 2 RD For RS 232C 2 9 3 SD For RS 232C 4 8 4 NC Not connected 3 7 5 GND Signal ground 2 6 NC Not connected 1 6 7 NC Not connected 8 NC Not connected 9 NC Not connected Pin numbers will depend on the external device being connected Refer to the manual for the personal computer or PLC being connected Use a compatible connector e Recommended items Manufacturer Model Socket OMRON Corporation XM3D 0921 Hood OMRON Corporation XM2S 0913 FQ2 User s Manual Wiring c suoNoeUUOyD pue UOTe e Su 48 Wiring The maximum cable length is 15m e RS 23
108. IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that the scene has been changed processing after changing the scene is performed W0 01 turned ON e I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 ClO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 CIO 1 15 Note The BUSY signal will be ON while the scene it being changed If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Registering the Measurement Reference Again The model and reference color can be re registered with commands from an external device such as a PLC based on the image that was just input when the line process was changed Inspection item Re registered data Search Shape Search II Model data Color Data Reference color hue saturation and brightness Edge Position Edge Width Area Note None Application is possibly only from the Run Mode If the parameter is applicable to more than one inspection item it will be re registered for all inspection items Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input
109. In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Data settings 2 Press Data 0 F 3 Press I0 Search 4 Press Position X X Position X X Reference F of Cancel f FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 259 8 UOND UUOD J lleIed e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uogesado BuljjouoD 260 5 if the inspection item allows multi point output Sellings press the number 0 to 31 of the inspection result a for which to output the data from the list of inspec En ee To register something to data 1 or higher repeat this pro Re Setting the Output Form p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Set Data form to Binary or BCD Stopping Data Output You can also prevent the output data that is set from actually being output The default setting is Yes p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Parallel Data Output Setting Details Tab Page Output parameter Data output Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text Data name Description Data range string JG Ju
110. Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left are Gray INO OFF Command parameter for registering the model used again Refer to the following information for Green IN1 OFF g ny signal wiring Red IN2 OFF oo in an LT 2 4 wiring p 42 Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for registering the model again Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart 1 Turn OFF IN O to IN4 and turn ON IN3 INO to N4 signals gt lt 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the IN5 signal BUSY signal FQ2 User s Manual La Allow 5 ms min and then turn BUSY signal is OFF to register the ON INS model data and reference color again ON i E ON for 1 ms min from the image that was just input OFF i 3 The BUSY signal turns ON while the parameters are being re registered Start re registering End re registering Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 249 8 UOND UUOD a eseg e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uogesado BuljjouoD Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to input IN5 to re register a model W0 00 t Model re register bit When the mode re register bit W0 00 turns ON IN3 is turned ON wo 00 Model l i If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after IN3 turns re register bit ON the command input for r
111. Inspection Sensitive Search Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter 1 Set Rotation to Yes 2 Press Angle range and set the following range Parameter Setting Description Angle range Range 180 to 180 A search is performed within the set angle range Default Lower limit 180 The larger the angle range the longer the processing time Upper limit 180 If you change the angle range perform teaching again O p s Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Low Contrast Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast of the mark BA Adjust the brightness p 61 11 z PE 6 Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Variations in the Measurement Object Inconsistent portions can be masked so that they are omitted from matching 0 Model masking p 101 Increasing Processing Speed The following two methods can be used to reduce processing time e Reduce the range in which a search is performed for the model BA Changing the measurement region p 102 e Reduce the angle range setting Adjust the Angle range parameter to reduce the range in which a search for the model is performed O Setting the angle range p 99 Editing the Model Regions and Measurement Region Changing the Model Regions This section describes how to edit the model regions You can edit the model region in the same way as for a search region
112. Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 163 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Edge rot pos Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 Comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll 0 DT 180 to 180 0 Edge0 position X XO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge position X x1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge position Y Y1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180 0 Edge0 ref position X SX0 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion X Edge0 ref position Y SYO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 0 reference posi tion Y Edge ref position X SX1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion X Edge ref position Y SY1 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 edge 1 reference posi tion Y Reference angle STH 180 to 180 0 Search Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation CR 0 to CR 31 0 to 100 0 Position X X 0 to X 31 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 0 to Y 31 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 0 to TH 31 180 to 180 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 999
113. Manual Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and the average color in the region as reference data for the measurement gt Inspect Inspection Add item Color Data Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag the rectangle to move it 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure Drag a corner to size the rectangle ment reference in front of the camera Move the rectangle to the location to be measured Press OK A 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching BA Changing the measurement region p 102 The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Hue The hue to use as a reference is set automatically Saturation The saturation to use as a reference is set automatically Brightness The brightness to use as a reference is set automatically Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Color Data Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Press the parameters and set the range that is to be judged as OK The measured value is displayed beside the parameter name Continuous measurements will be performed for the images that are displayed You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the D
114. Normally If process is completed normally the Sensor is restarted There is therefore no response When the Command E R cr Delimiter FQ2 User s Manual Is Not Processed Normally Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 365 jeusey y YBnosy Bunosuuog 6 366 TEACH Perform Teaching This command performs teaching for all of the registered inspection items lt Command Format gt Command a Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o k Jor Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter Scene Control Commands SCENE orS Acquire Scene Number This command acquires the scene number currently being used lt Command Format gt x Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally lerl n Delimiter Scene number 2 digits max Delimiter Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r er Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Scene number The acquired scene number currently used scene number is returned Example When Scene 0 Is Being Used lt Command gt stele Ie Tee lt Response gt Change Scene Number This command changes the scene number to use lt Command Format gt slelejnje for
115. Parallel Input Command LT r 246 p 272 e Changing Scenes with a PLC Link Command LT p 342 e Changing Scenes with an EtherNet IP Command LT p 314 e Changing Scenes with a TCP No protocol Command LT r 367 e Changing Scenes with a FINS TCP No protocol Command LT p 384 FQ2 User s Manual Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 191 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 192 Setting the Startup Scene p Setup Mode Sensor settings Startup settings The following items can be set Item Startup mode Purpose Select whether the startup scene number is set manually Setting range ON OFF The scene number when the settings were saved will be the startup scene number The star tup mode is set to OFF in the default settings Startup scene Set the scene number to use at startup Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process Standard models 0 to 31 Single function models 0 to 8 Default 0 FQ2 User s Manual 7 2 Calibration Calibration Calibration is used to convert Camera coordinates into actual coordinates You can set calibration to output the detected position in the actual coordinates You can convert pixels to actual dimensions and then output them Example 540 pixels 30 mm You can also compensate for offsets in the origin and coordinate system Camera coordinates
116. Sample Settings Sample Measurement Model desired image pattern Search for sections that are similar to the model Search region region to OK NG search for the model Setup Procedure for the Shape Search Il Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Shape Search Il saist Edge Positio BA Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow ka at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items 105 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item suonoedsu dN Bues 174 106 Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and partial image as reference data for the measurement p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Shape Search II Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag a corner to size the rectangle Drag the rectangle to move it 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera Move the rectangle to the location to be measured A Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Model image This is the partial image that is stored as the refer
117. Sensors any Sensor with an NG result Green display OK Red display NG p Run Mode Sensor monitor Specifying the Startup Run Mode Display The display that appears when power supply is turned ON can be set The default setting is Graphics gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Startup display Display pattern You can set the scene to be displayed when the power supply is turned ON LU setting the Startup Scene p 192 Displaying the Inspection Item Results You can scroll though the measurement results of all the configured inspection items by using the following operations Switches to the previous inspection item Switches to the next inspection item The following are also displayed in addition to the measurement results for each inspection item e Filter item The results of a filter item is displayed Camera input The image that is being measured is displayed Position comp The result of position compensation is displayed All Region The measurement regions for all inspection items are displayed Calculation Displays the results for each expression registered to an inspection item FQ2 User s Manual Configuring the Run Mode Display 183 uonesado 9 184 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs Measurement result histories can be checked using the trend monitor and histograms To display trend monitors or histograms in Run Mode yo
118. Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 704 Width display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition Area External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Area Acquisition 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 AR only 11 Area deviation Acquisition 999 999 999 9999 to 0 DF Logged data only 999 999 999 9999 FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 127 Mea Background color Setting Acqui 0 Black 1 White 2 Red 3 0 sure sition Green or 4 Blue ment 128 condi Fill profile Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Fill outline 0 tions sition 2 Filling up holes 129 Area color inversion Setting Acqui 0 None or 1 Enabled 0 sition The binary inversion is dis played for a Monochrome Cam era 135 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui O to 999
119. System p 328 measurements Work Area WR Output data 0 to 31 Holding Bit Area HR Erd Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO EM Area EM1 EM Area EMC 2 Set the first address of the output area 0 to 99999 default 200 System ael xt Output hand Sets whether to establish an interlock No default or Yes System p 328 shake with the PLC when data is output Retry details Enables or disables retrying communications ON or OFF default System p 328 This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to a PLC Link Retry interval Sets the interval for retrying communications 0 to 2 147 483 647 ms default 10 000 System p 328 This setting is enabled only when Retry ms details is set to ON This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to a PLC Link Max output data Sets the upper limit of the number of out 32 to 1024 default 256 System p 328 put data to use for PLC Link outputs Any output data that is beyond this value is discarded This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to a PLC Link Output data size Sets the data size to output for EtherNet 32 bytes default 64 bytes 128 bytes or System p 290 IP output 256 bytes If the data size that is set is exceeded data will be output in more than one transfer This can be set only when the communi cations type is set to EtherNet IP Connection Sets the TPC connection mode TCP server def
120. TRIG so that they do not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON Switch from a device with con tacts e g relay to a device without contacts e g SSR or PLC transistor output IN Input Error AO RR Error code 11020900 A no protocol command or PLC link command was input when the BUSY signal was ON Is an interlock or other counter measure provided e g ina ladder program in the PLC e Program interlocks such as in a ladder program so that no protocol commands and PLC link commands are not input while the BUSY signal is ON Scene Data Error a err Error code 01030800 The scene data to switch to is corrupted The scene data to be switched to is corrupted Reset the scene data from the beginning Model Error AO ERR Error code 01050405 or 01050500 A model was re registered with an image with low contrast Check the image to see if the contrast is too low to register the model Increase the image contrast and try again to register the model Logging Error Error code 02160702 or 02160703 Some data was not saved when logging data to files on an SD card Check to see if the BUSY output parameter is set to Measurement Set a sufficiently long measure ment interval or set the BUSY output condition to Data logging or Image logging Communications error Error code 01010100 Normal EtherNet IP communi cations became impossible after they were established
121. This bit canbe data ments d only wh Ma ee e Turn OFF the DSA signal from the PLC when the Data g Output Completed GATE signal from the Vision Sensor enabled turns ON ERCLR Clear Error Turn ON this signal to turn OFF the error ERR signal Command from the Vision Sensor response com icati Turn OFF this signal from the PLC when the error ERR O ONS signal goes OFF Command code Command code _ This I O port stores the command code Command Parameters 1 to 3 Command param These I O ports store the command parameters response on munications eters Output Connection to PLC Vision Sensor Originator to PLC Target e Response Area Bits Contents 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv RUN OR READY BUSY FLG Vision Sta tus Flags 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv GATE 32 bits 2 Command code Command code 32 3 bits 4 Response code Response code 32 5 bits 6 Response data Response data 32 7 bits Signal Signal name Function Application method FLG Control Command This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor completes Command Completed execution of the control command response com This signal turns ON after the control command code munications response code and response data have been stored This signal automatically turns OFF when the Control Co
122. Wiring Color Signal State Description Gray INO ON Command parameter for clearing mea surement values Green IN1 OFF Red IN2 ON White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for clearing measure ment values Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart IN5 signal ON BUSY signal 252 OFF e Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON INS ON i fea ON for 1 ms min OFF The signals shown at the left are used Refer to the following information for signal wiring LJ 2 4 wiring p 42 1 Turn ON INO and IN2 and turn OFF IN3 and IN4 PNOO Sigrials O 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the The measurement values are ra cleared from the Sensor BUSY signal is OFF to clear the measurement values Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Save Data in Sensor You can save the current settings scene data and system data in the Sensor This function can be used in Run Mode only Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Description The signals shown at the left are used information for signal wiring LT 2 4 wiring p 42 Wiring Color Signal State Gray INO ON Command parameters for saving data to the Sensor Refer to the following Green IN1 OFF Red IN2 OFF White IN3 OFF Pu
123. Wiring them together or placing them in the same duct may cause induction resulting in malfunction or damage e Use the products within the power supply voltages specified in this manual e Use the specified size of crimp terminals to wire connections Do not connect wires that have been simply twisted together directly to the power supply or terminal block e Use a DC power supply with safety measures against high voltages safety extra low voltage circuit Use independent power sources for the products Do not use a shared power source e Tighten mounting screws at the torque specified in this manual e Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables or the power supply wiring 3 Battery Do not short the positive and negative terminals of the Battery Do not use the Touch Finder in an environment that exceeds the operating temperature range of the Battery If the Touch Finder is used at temperatures that exceed the operating temperature range the protective device may activate and prevent charging e Do not connect the Battery directly to a power supply or car cigarette lighter socket e Do not use the Touch Finder with any other type of battery e Turn OFF the power supply immediately if the Battery leaks or produces an odor Electrolyte leaked from the Battery may ignite possibly causing smoke rupture or fire e If during usage charging or storage the Battery produces an odor heats becomes disc
124. Y tion 7 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item 153 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 154 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Labeling You can select to log any of the following values Measurement item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error This is the measurement judgement results Number of labels 0 to 100 This is the number of labels Total label area 0 to 999 999 999 9999 This is the total area of all extracted labels Area 0 to 999 999 999 9999 This is the area of the detected label 100 max Gravity center X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the gravity coordinate X of the detected label 100 max Gravity center Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the gravity coordinate Y of the detected label 100 max Master angle 180 to 180 This is the master angle of the detected label 100 max When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table If more than one item is stored results are output in order for each label Example of label Total label area Area 0 X Area 0 Y Gravity center 0 X Gravity center 0 Y Mater angle 0 ATH Area N X Ar
125. a certain correlation are detected 2 if Multi point output is set to Yes you can specify the output conditions for more than one result Ex 2012 08 traction X Y and Detection count 4 q 3 Pa Extraction condi Range Description tion Candidate level O to 100 Outputs only objects with a correlation that is higher than the specified candidate level Extraction X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Results are output only for objects with a measured X coordinate that is within this range Extraction Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Results are output only for objects with a measured Y coordinate that is within this range Detection count 1 to 32 Sets the maximum number of detection results to out put Note The processing time changes if you change the candidate level Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Search Details Tab Page Output parameter Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Unstable Search Results Inclined Measurement Objects Adjust the Angle range parameter to increase the range in which a search is made for the model The Search inspection item judges whether an image is OK or NG according to the correlation with a previously registered image pattern For this re
126. ae 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 E 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 7 0000 0000 0000 ooo0 21 Set Image Adjustment Data Command Code 1010 0050 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents A AN 12 to 15 8to 11 4to7 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 5 0000 0000 0000 Goon i 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 TAT nererence 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 9 0000 0000 0000 oooo Yaue FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 343 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 344 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents response area 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 33 0000 0000 0101 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Get Inspection Item Data Command Code 1020 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command arog 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 O0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 12
127. being output The default setting is Yes p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Details Tab Page Output parameter Data output Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text Data name Description Data range string JG Judgement This is the judgement result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error DO to D15 Data 0 to 15 These are the results of the expressions that are set 999 999 999 9999 to for output judgement data 0 to 15 999 999 999 9999 JOO to J15 Judgments 0 to 15 These are the judgement results of the expressions 0 OK that are set for output judgement data 0 to 15 1 NG 2 Not measured Parallel Data Output You can output the following data as 16 bit data by setting them as the output data data 0 to data 31 measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings Setting the Data to Output You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of 0 Search to data 0 for a parallel output p gt
128. bending radius 41 4 mm Weight 100g 500 g 1500 g e FQ Ethernet Cable Item Model FQ WNO02 FQ WN010 FQ WN020 Cable length 2m 10m 20m Cable type Robot cable Minimum bending radius 40 mm Weight 125g 620g 1780 g e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 Item Model FQ VP1002 FQ VP1005 FQ VP1010 Applicable Units FQ SDU10 Cable length 2m 5m 10m Cable type Flat cable Minimum bending radius 5 5 mm Weight 150g 380 g 750g Do not bend any Cable beyond the specified minimum bending radius Doing so may damage the Cable Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual e Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 Item Model FQ VP2002 FQ VP2005 FQ VP2010 Applicable Units FQ SDU2U Cable length 2m 5m 10m Cable type Flat cable Minimum bending radius 5 5 mm Weight 80g 200g 400g e Sensor Data Unit Cable Item Model FQ WwuU002 FQ WU020 Cable length 2m 20m Cable type Robot cable Cable diameter 7 Minimum bending radius 35 mm Weight 200 g 400g 800g 1500 g Do not bend any Cable beyond the specified minimum bending radius Doing so may damage the Cable e AC Adapter Item Model FQ AC1 FQ AC2 FQ AC3 FQ AC4 FQ AC5 FQ AC6 Plug type A A A Cc BF O Certified standards PSE UL CSA CCC mark Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC 90 to 264 VAC Input current 0 4 A max 100 VAC 50 Hz when connected to maximum load Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz
129. between neighboring pixels The maximum value of the differenti ated waveform that exceeds the threshold edge level is detected as an edge This detection method is used for low contrast images Unstable Edge Position Results There Is an Edge But It Cannot Be Detected p gt Inspect Inspection Edge Position Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter Edge Level Parameter Setting Description Edge level Range 0 to 100 Set the color change level to detect as an edge Default 50 The edge point is found based on a threshold that is set for a color change If you change the edge level perform teaching again Note Edge Level An edge is detected in the following way 1 The color change distribution of the entire measurement region is determined 2 The minimum color change is 0 The maximum color change is 100 3 The location where the color change intersects with the edge level is detected as the edge 100 pesss Maximum color change Measurement 50 4 Edge level a 0 eM assess sense Minimum color change Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Noise Is Mistaken as an Edge p gt Inspect Inspection Edge Position Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter Noise Level Parameter Setting Description Noise level Sensors with Color Cam Sets the density level to
130. cable connector An FQ WN Ethernet Cable is used to connect the Sensor to external devices such as PLCs the Touch Finder or computers 5 Focus adjustment screw Used to adjust the focus of the image 6 Operation OR Lights orange when the overall judgement output OR signal turns ON indicators ETN Lights orange during Ethernet communications ERROR Lights red when an error occurs JT 11 1 Error Histories p 398 BUSY Lights green when the Sensor is executing a process You can change the BUSY indicator to a RUN indicator This indicator is set by default to a BUSY indicator but if you change it toa RUN indicator it will light green during operation 0J Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator p 231 7 Mounting Bracket FQ2 User s Manual Used to mount the Sensor The Mounting Bracket can be attached to the front left side right side or back of the Sensor Part Names and Functions 29 c suo osuuo pue uoneljesu 30 FQ2 S3L LILILI Sensors with C mounts No Description 1 3 2 Bottom Name C mount lens mounting surface 6 Sensor Mounted to Base The C mount lens and macro ring are attached here Determine the appro priate CCTV lens C mount lens to use based on the field of view required for the size of the measurement object BA Optical Diagrams p 3
131. can attach the mounting base to the bottom top left or right surface Recommended mounting screw tightening torque 0 54 N m Tightening torque 0 54 N m Effective depth of mounting holes 4 mm 2 Mount the Sensor with M3 screws Tightening torque 0 54 N m Effective depth of mounting holes 4 mm Se Installation FQ2 User s Manual Lens Selection Use the following optical diagrams to determine the Lens camera installation distance and detection range Optical Diagrams The following values are estimates only Adjustment is required after installing the camera 3Z4S LE SV H High resolution Low distortion Lenses 10099 AZA 3Z4S LE we Z SV 0614H Z on SV 0814H N o eg oad Sv 454 AL T ay AEG SV 1214H E py A Ge 7 wl NEIT a SV 1614H 2 1000 oso ee Lees oa _SV 1614F 5 g ag i D ee SV 2514H Ss bd NEA manne 5 150 zq Sa a Ae LE Aa SV 3514H S N ff oe we AZ ee SV 5014H t t50 125 20 n 4 Cae E AV ARO EASA SV 7525H a t30 t25 20 FT To 2 ae ae ee ee 400 LM OO MOL SV 10028H 8 ep AA 5 g bo t Macro ring oO o Examples t0 Macro ring is not required t5 A 5 mm macro 10 ring is required 1 10 100 1000 Y axis of field of view mm 3Z4S LE SV V series Lenses
132. condition X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge sure upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment ment 153 condi Extraction condition X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge tions lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 154 Extraction condition Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 155 Extraction condition Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 161 Detection count Setting Acqui 1 to 32 32 sition 170 Model mode Setting Acqui 0 Fast 1 Stable 0 sition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 300 Logging Number of data log Setting Acqui 1 to 32 32 condi records upper limit sition tions 310 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF
133. corresponding to the number of measurements made are out put when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 352 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications p61 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 End Continuous Measurements The command ends continuous measurements lt Command Format gt m efer Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally jo k or Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally o Jor Data returned result for the number of continuous measurements Measurement CR result CR made Delimiter Note Set the data output to output measurement results If data output is not set only the command response is output BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 352 362 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Utility commands CLRMEAS Clear Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values lt Command Format gt Command oT Oo jefe Rim e als jer Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o k cr Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter FQ2 User s Manual Con
134. data number Delete Clears the content of the selected data number Output form p 333 Output form Selects the format of the data to be out ASCII default or Binary Scene p 355 put O Digits of inte Sets the digits of the integer part 1 to 10 Default 6 Scene 2 ger including the sign However is not out oa put for positive numbers a Example Setting 4 digit data 5963 is E output as 999 45 Digits of dec Sets the output digits for the decimal 0 to 4 default 4 Scene imal part If it is set to 0 the decimal part is 2 rounded off before the data is output o Negative Selects what to display as the sign when Default or 8 Scene the number is negative 0 suppress Selects the method to adjust unused dig ON or OFF default Scene its on the left in output data ON Zeros are inserted for unused digits OFF Spaces are inserted for unused digits Example The following examples are for when five integer digits and three decimal digits are set and the data is 100 000 ON 00100 000 OFF _ 100 000 The underscore indi cates a space FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 417 z L seoipueddy 418 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 3 E Field Selects the separator to use between None default comma tab space CR Scene p 355 l S 2 2 separa output da
135. ee eee a A 454 Shape Search thse s 4 eredet wavs oth eee Steed Wawa aah 4 a tne aye a Yas 457 Edge Position erstes iaae aei aaa daa ep eee ae eae es 460 Edge Width ssie eag asi ia diy dnb aye 461 Edge Pitch 2p20to0ts doa y need obec beedan ehh d ped dee adbed ds 462 AIGA pic tka eee HRS aie eee Hea EA eee pe Ee We epee aS 464 Color Data 2 4222 ndede i cied E OENE ih ecedoa ge sms meagan 466 MAD SUNG oss eren deg teen e ede era Sela at eaten eae E erie 468 12 3 Specifications and Dimensions 200 000ee ee eeeee 472 SGNSO i sarean kapne hirs ieai daii e a Sandee gas nea Sages A 472 TOUGH Finde sock ya eke hts ea eee els a a ea Gade kl a eae 479 Sensor Data Units 2 4 0 4 cces cece eee eed eee a eed 483 System Requirements for PC Tool for FQ 000 cee eee eee eee 486 ODPIONS hehe eee euachd de edad SEAR Me eee eee eee deen 486 12 4 Updating the Software 0 cece eee 491 12 5 Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor 20 0c ee 492 12 6 LED Safety en f ce de ee cee a eee eee a bee eke eas 497 Warning tabel sa cncoda wd aaa det joa med Bea ea bee he eek a 497 17 18 12 7 Requirements from Regulations and Standards 498 Summary of Requirements to Manufactures 000000 c ee eae 498 Summary of Requirements to User nananana 000 ccc eee 500 Definitions of Laser Classification 0 00 000 cc eee eee 501 12 8 Detailed EtherNet IP
136. eee eee 2 2 Part Names and Functions 0 00 eee eee eee eee 2 3 Installation o gs 20k wen ee ee eee ea eae ee a ae FQ2 S Sensors with Built in Lighting 0 FQ2 S3L Sensors with C mounts 00 00000000 Installation Precautions 0 06 42 00 Joba aise oe wane eae kee Mounting to DIN Track 2 cs6 peewee ek eee Re eke ee Mounting to a Control Panel 1 2 2 2 2 eee eee Using the Touch Finder as a Portable Device with Battery Mounting to DIN Track 0 0 0 eee 274 WING 2 205 cited ane loa Bee debe REY TOES Soe EE VO Signal Circuit Diagrams lt 5 c 0cs2 aaa ene onda r eae eaaa Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Attaching the LED Warning Label 0 0 0 000000002000 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet 0 cece eee eee eee Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder 2 0000 ee aee Connecting to Sensors from External Devices Such as PLCs Connecting to Sensors from a Computer Using the PC Tool 3 Taking Images 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration 0 00 e eee eee 3 2 Setting Conditions for Taking Images 0 00 eee eee eee ee FQ2 User s Manual 6 s u u09 Jo jqeL 3 3 Adjusting Image Quality 0 0 0 c eee eee 60 Adjusting the Focus aE ana a aegon ani eee 60 Adjusti
137. if desired but keep in mind that all settings that are not saved explicitly are replaced by the settings that are stored in the memory of the FQ2 Vision Sensor the next time you turn ON the FQ2 Vision Sensor Do not turn the power supply OFF while data is being saved The data that is being saved may become corrupted p gt Test 1 Press Save data 2 Press Yes Note Scene data and system data can be saved in this way BA Scene data and system data details p 218 Measurement data and image data cannot be saved in this way QJ Logging measurement data p 209 Settings data can also be backed up to an external memory O Saving settings p 218 178 Saving Data to the Sensor FQ2 User s Manual Operation 6 1 Starting Operation oss aceae aaa E aa eee 180 6 2 Configuring the Run Mode Display 020eeeeeeeee 182 6 3 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs 184 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation 187 6 1 Starting Operation When test measurements and adjustments in Setup Mode have been finished change to Run Mode and begin actual measurements In Run Mode the Sensor operates stand alone and outputs the measurement judgement results on the I O lines accordingly to the settings If the Touch Finder or the PC Tool is connected via network to the Sensor the operation of the Sensor can be monitored in the following ways Run Mode Display The
138. imaging elements false detection or failure may occur Sensor Waterproof Sheets Do not remove or damage the waterproof sheets on the sides of the Sensor Doing so may allow dust dirt or water drops to enter the Sensor and damage it Other Do not use this product in safety circuits associated with nuclear power and human life Do not disassemble repair modify deform by pressure or incinerate this product Dispose of this product as industrial waste Connect the special products Sensor Touch Finder Cables The product might break down or malfunction if you use a part not included in the special products If you notice an abnormal condition such as a strange odor extreme heating of any product or smoke immediately stop using the product turn OFF the power and consult your dealer The Sensor surfaces become hot during use Do not touch them Do not drop or subject the products to shock Use the special Sensor FQ2 S Touch Finder FQ2 D Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU Cables FQ WN FQ WD FQ WU and FQ VP Battery FQ BAT1 and AC Adapter FQ AC Using other than the specified products may cause fire burning malfunction or failure If the product has a lock mechanism always make sure it is locked before using the product Laws and Regulations Standards This product complies with the following EC Directives and EN Standards EC Directive No 2004 104 EC EN Standards EN61326 FQ2 User s Manual Precautions for Correct
139. in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the contrast of the image within the model registration region is too low Select a region with a larger contrast between light and dark areas compared to the region that was registered as the model and re register it as the model 104 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual 4 5 Inspecting with the Shape Search Il Inspection Item Shape Search Il Inspection Item This inspection item is used to search for the portion of the input image that most closely resembles an image pattern that is called a model The model is registered in advance based on a characteristic feature of the measurement object You can output the correlation which tells how closely the portion of the image matches the model You can also output the position of the measurement object and the angle of the measurement object For the normal Search inspection item a model that concentrates on the color and brightness of the image pattern is used but in the Shape Search II a model that concentrates on the outline information is used This inspection item enables robust high speed high precision detection of models even when lighting is reflected from the workpieces when the shapes of the workpieces are inconsistent when the orientation of the workpieces change when noise is superimposed when part of the image is blocked or when there are other fluctuations in the environment
140. inspection results e Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results e Inspection results that support multi point output You can assign inspection results within the specified range 0 to 31 The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection result to data 0 p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data 3 Set the following items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 3 10 X 10 Y LPC 0 10 C 10 X 10 Y Const Used to insert numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Item at Inspection Item 0 Inspection item 10 Search Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corre CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted e LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You
141. into the light emitted from the Sensor When the subject is a specular reflective object protect your eyes from reflected light gt A lithium ion battery is built into the Touch Finder and may occasionally combust explode or burn if not treated properly y Dispose of the Touch Finder as industrial waste and never disassemble apply pressure that would deform heat to 100 C or higher or incinerate the Touch Finder N High voltage parts inside danger of electrical shock Do not open the product cover B FQ2 User s Manual Precautions for Safe Use The following points are important to ensure safety so make sure that they are strictly observed 1 Installation Environment e Do not use the product in environments where it can be exposed to inflammable explosive gas e To secure the safety of operation and maintenance do not install the product close to high voltage devices and power devices Install the product in such a way that its ventilation holes are not blocked e Tighten mounting screws at the torque specified in this manual 2 Power Supply and Wiring e The power supply voltage must be within the rated range 24 VDC 10 and an AC voltage must not be used e Reverse connection of the power supply is not allowed Do not short the load of the open collector output e The load must be within the rated range e High voltage lines and power lines must be wired separately from this product
142. is o be judged as OK R average Set the difference in the average value of 0 0000 to 255 0000 Scene he R red component that is to be judged as OK G average Set the difference in the average value of 0 0000 to 255 0000 Scene he G green component that is to be judged as OK B average Set the difference in the average value of 0 0000 to 255 0000 Scene he B blue component that is to be judged as OK F Area Set the upper and lower limits for an OK Range 0 00000 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene p 142 E judgement Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 za Lower limit 0 0000 Gravity X Set the upper and lower limits of the Range 999 999 999 9999 to Scene range of gravity X that is to be judged as 999 999 999 9999 OK Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Gravity Y Set the upper and lower limits of the Range 999 999 999 9999 to Scene range of the gravity Y that is to be judged 999 999 999 9999 as OK Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 3 Number of _ Set the upper and lower limits of the 0 to 100 defaults upper limit 100 lower Scene p 147 z labels number of labels for an OK judgement limit 0 Kal S Total label Set the upper and lower limits of the total 0 to 999 999 999 9999 defaults upper Scene area label area for an OK judgement limit 999 999 999 999 lower limit 0 Area Sets the upper and lower limits of the 0 to 999 999 999 9999 defaults
143. item in the overall judgement 5 Q 5 FQ2 User s Manual z L seoipueddy 411 Menu Tables 412 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 S S Rotation Sets the angle range for the registered No default Yes Scene p 109 Sl alSie model 2 A F 6 Angle range 180 to 180 Scene p 109 a 2 Model mode You can change to a mode that makes it Fast default Stable Scene p 109 aS easier to search for images similar to a SIS O S model 6 Extraction Scene p 108 g condition S Candidate Sets the detection target to only objects O to 100 default 60 Scene 5 level with a correlation above the specified g candidate level Extraction Results are output only for objects with a 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene x measured X coordinate that is within this range Extraction Results are output only for objects with a 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene Le measured Y coordinate that is within this range Detection Sets the maximum number of detection 1 to 32 Scene count results to output Sorting Sets the sort condition to use when mul Corr ascending order Corr descending Scene p 107 method tiple measurement results meet the order default Pos X ascending order extraction conditions Pos X descending order Pos Y ascend ing order Pos Y descending o
144. me J Ba z7 8 23 24 e g 9 10 25 26 FQ WUO l j l 11 12 27 28 Sensor Data Unit Cable a 13 114 29 30 a 15 16 31 32 Fh i a O Screw size M3 POWT SUPPIY 24V 2a a Tightening torque Power supply 0 V i gf foe 0 54 N m E gt oe RS 232C connector Frame ground i 3 een Soe For the I O connector harness use an FQ VP2 Parallel Cable for the FQ SDU2 or a MIL standard harness such as the OMRON XZ2F The Cables are sold separately Signal Application Power supply 24 V These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V Power supply 0 V e Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influence of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load cur rent exceeds 50 mA Frame ground This is the frame ground terminal Connect it to the ground wire ba Wiring FQ2 User s Manual FQ SDU20 SDU25 Parallel Pin Signal Names Pin Signal IN Function Pin Signal IN Function OUT OUT 1 INO IN Command input 17 COMINO Input signal common RESET 2 IN1 IN Command input and INO to INS 3 IN2 IN Command input 18 COMIN1 Input signal common TRIG 4 IN3
145. method of the destination external device to perform no protocol communications p gt Sensor settings Data output No protocol data 1 Press No protocol TCP 2 Set Connection mode to either TCP server or TCP client When you are finished press Back 3 if you set Connection mode to TCP client set the following parameters Connection mode TCP server Item Description Setting range IP address Set the IP address of the external device at the a 1 to 253 b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 connection destination d 0 to 255 Set it in the form a b c d Default 10 5 5 1 Note If you connect an external OMRON CS CJseries PLC to Ethernet the following default IP address is assigned to the PLC e IP address 192 168 250 node_address Port No Set the I O port number of the external device at 0 to 65 535 the connection destination Default 9 600 Set the value to between 0 and 65 535 If the Connection mode parameter is set to TCP server for TCP no protocol communications the port number of the Sensor will always be 9876 for TCP no protocol communications FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 351 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can set the data to output automatically after measurements You can set up to 32 data items Data That Can Be Outp
146. number p 342 1000 0030 Select Scene Changes to the specified scene number p 342 yeusau y yBnosu Buyoauu0D 6 FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections Data Acquisition Setting Commands First word of com Command name Function Reference mand area hex 2 3 1010 0040 Get Image Adjustment Data Acquires data from a position compensation p 343 item or filter item 1010 0050 Set Image Adjustment Data Sets the specified data in a position compen p 343 sation item or filter item 1020 0040 Get Inspection Item Data Acquires the inspection item data p 344 1020 0050 Set Inspection Item Data Sets the inspection item data to the specified p 345 data 3000 0040 Get Software Version Informa Acquires the software version p 345 tion 5000 0020 Get Latest Error Information _ Acquires the latest error information p 346 Command Details Single Measurement Command Code 1010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command ACE 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 4 byte binary 3 0000 0000 0001 ooo0 0 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents K e S 8 to 11 4107 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 mo o aaa a aae or nich me 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 pars eames ie Note
147. of Output Data Upper Value Setting When more than one inspection result is output the size of the data that is output for the data output settings could exceed the limit that is set in the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting If that occurs increase the set value of the output data size setting or adjust the output data settings so that data output size is not exceeded If the size of data that is output does exceed the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting the remaining data will be discarded Example Output data size 328 bytes Output data size setting 256 bytes Data Output Settings Output data Setting Data 0 10 X 0 Inspection item 0 Position X for Search Data 1 10 Y 0 Inspection item 0 Position Y for Search Data 2 LPC Inspection item 1 Position X 1st point for Shape Search II 0 30 11 X 11 Y Inspection item 1 Position X 30th point for Shape Search II Inspection item 1 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II 328 bytes Inspection item 1 Position Y 30th point for Shape Search II Data 3 LPR Inspection item 2 Position X 1st point for Shape Search Il 0 10 12 X 12 Y Inspection item 2 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II Inspection item 2 Position X 10th point for Shape Search II Inspection item 2 Position Y 10th point for Shape Search II Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through Ether
148. present display Selected inspection item name Overall judgement Connected Sensor name Selected scene Measurement processing time number The time taken from when an image is input until all measurements have been Sub menu completed Used to select the detection information to Inspection results can be display when more displayed in six formats such than one detection as in a list or as a trend graph WALLA point is detected at the OJ p 182 same time for one item These buttons are Eafe Tool Button or displayed both in Setup j OK Button and Run Mode Mp 22 Moving to Run Mode You can move from Setup Mode to Run Mode by using the following procedure 1 Press Run 2 Press Switch to Run mode 3 Press Yes If you press No the setting will not be saved and you will move to Run Mode 180 Starting Operation FQ2 User s Manual Note e Returning to Setup Mode Press and press Sensor settings Signal Status When Moving to Run Mode When moving to Run Mode the signal will change as shown below and data can be input from and output to an external device Display Setup Mode XK Run Mode The BUSY signal that was ON always ON will turn OFF BUSY signal OFF FQ2 User s Manual Starting Operation 181 uonesado 9 182 6 2 Configuring the Run Mode Display There are six types of displays that can be used as shown below Select the di
149. progress default Timing Chart 1 Turn ON INO and IN3 and turn OFF IN1 IN2 and IN4 INO to IN4 sons XK 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the IN5 signal ON OF i Allow 5 ms min and then BUSY signal is OFF to execute turn ON INS external teaching ON for 1 ms min 3 The BUSY signal turns ON while z external teaching is being executed y ON BUSY signal OFF 254 Start external teaching 1 End external teaching Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to input IN5 to external teaching W0 00 When the external teaching bit W0 00 turns ON External teaching bit INO and IN3 are turned ON W0 00 External teaching bit If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after INO and IN3 turn ON the command input for external teaching IN5 is turned ON T0000 OUT1 IN5 The command input for external teaching IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that external teaching has been completed processing after external teaching is executed W0 01 is turned ON e I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 CIO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 CIO 1 15 Note
150. rectangle to the location to be mea sured and then press OK region 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Details Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 77 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the Y coordina
151. registration of the model and reference color ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time 276 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Input Signals Signal Function INO to IN2 Turn OFF IN3 Turn ON IN4 and IN5 Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for executing re registration of the model and reference color Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Teaching This command uses the image that is currently being input to execute teaching for all of the registered inspection items except for Edge Pitch Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN14 INO 1 1001001 11001001 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON sires RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 signals 0 gt lt 1001001 ion ON for 1 ms min ON wey IN7 signal OFF Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 f ON BUSY signal command execution OFF ON ACK signal a OFF 1 ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal is ON while teaching is being executed ACK When
152. required to use all of the filter items position compensation items and inspection items exceeds the memory capacity of the previous FQ D30 D31 Touch Finder so you will not be able to use all of the filter items position compensation items and inspection items that are provided in the FQ2 S Sensor Therefore it is necessary to select only the filter items position compensation items and inspection items that you need to use and register them in the Sensor If you connect the Touch Finder without doing this the Touch Finder may freeze as soon as it is connected or during operation Apart from the filter items position compensation items and inspection items you can use all of the functions of the Sensor Download the update file for the Touch Finder version 1 6 or higher and the FQ Item Selector from the member website and then use the following procedures to update the Touch Finder and register the filter items position compensation items and inspection items in the Sensor http Awww omron cxone com vision_sys e Updating the Touch Finder 1 Place the update file directly in the root folder of an SD card 2 Insert the SD card into the Touch Finder 3 gt Press E Setup Mode TF settings Update The Touch Finder will be updated automatically Do not turn OFF the power supply until updating the Touch Finder has been completed The Touch Finder may not start normally if power is turned OFF during the update Connecti
153. saved data items is exceeded 2 This limit is for one data item If more than one data item is logged at the same time logging can be performed as long as the total number of data items in all logged data is 32 000 or less Logging Procedure Use the following procedure to log data Setting Logging Conditions mM File logging p 209 Recent results logging p 214 Selecting the Measurement Data To Log LU p 210 o i Setting the File Name for Logged Data utput settings BE p 211 common settings for recent results logging and file logging Logging settings common settings for recent results logging and file logging Setting the Format for Saving Measurement Data BA p 212 Enabling file logging Enabling File Logging O p 212 Change to Run Mode Change to Run Mode 7 7 A Starting and Stopping Logging Executing file logging BE p 213 Execution of recent Execution of file logging results logging Saving Recent Results Logging Data BE p 216 Deleting Logged Data 01 p 216 208 FQ2 User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data Logging All Data File Logging Large amounts of measurement and image data can be saved in files in external memory SD cards or computer Touch Finder Image logging file Data logging file Saved for each measurement 4 j Hard disk drive 1 Image data and measurement data can be logged in the same way
154. settings 1 Set Auto sensor detection to ON Note If there are more than eight Sensors available for connection use Specify sensor to select the Sensors to connect QJ 3 1 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration p 58 Registering the Sensors to Connect You can set any of the Sensors for connection to the Touch Finder and register them p Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press lt Specify sensor on the right of the dis MEEZIT play sensor play pasition J 2 4 2 Press a blank line and then press Add 23 0 0 0 12 23 36 56 208 Connecting to More Than One Sensor FQ2 User s Manual 3 Enter the IP address 4 Press the IP address that you entered and then press Comm test to confirm that connection is possible Selecting the Sensors to Connect You can select the Sensors to connect to the Touch Finder from a list p Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press lt lt Specify sensor on the right of the dis play 2 Press the check boxes of the Sensors to connect to select them Note e The Sensors that can be set are indicated by an asterisk before the Sensor name e You cannot select the check box if a Sensor that was registered by the user cannot be detected e The names of Sensors that are on the same network as the Touch Finder are given in parentheses FQ2 User s Manual Connecti
155. signal is the trigger for clearing an error Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 275 Zo S o v2 25 3a O ge F 5308 Do 25 2 o 05 Sa O S O E a Q w D v D Re registering the Model and Reference Color This command is input from an external devices such as a PLC to re register the models and reference colors for registered inspection items based on the image that was just input Inspection items Re registered data Search Shape Search II Sensitive Search Search Position Compensation and Models Shape Search Position Compensation Color Data Reference color hue saturation and brightness Edge Position Edge Width Edge Pitch Area and Labeling None Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1001000 11001000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to ING signals 0 X 11001000 y ON for 1 ms min IN7 signal ON i OFF Allow 5 ms min i and then turn ON N7 ON BUSY signal Commandexecuton OFF ON ACK signal a OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal is ON during re
156. signals when the BUSY signal is ON Applicable Output Signals e RUN e SHTOUT e OR DSA e BUSY GATE e ERROR e DO to D15 e STGOUT ACK Setting the Output Time of the ACK Signal You can set the output time of the normal execution completion signal for parallel commands p gt In Out I O setting I O Output ACK signal ON period The ACK signal is not output for normal completion of continuous measurement commands Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal You can change the output settings of the STGOUT signal to adjust when and for how long the external lighting is lit Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual p gt Image Camera setup q Lighting control 1 Change the setting for lighting control Item Parameter Setting Description Lighting control Strobe output delay 0 to 65 535 us Enter the delay time from when the TRIG signal is default 0 us input until the external lighting is lit Strobe output time 0 to 65 535 us Set the pulse width of the output signal STGOUT default 1 000 us that tells the external lighting when to light When the strobe polarity is set to Negative a delay of about 200 to 300 us occurs from when the TRIG signal is input until the STGOUT signal goes low When a high speed shutter is used set the Output polarity parameter to Positive
157. sition 162 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 359 359 N 0 to 3 mum hue N sition 163 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui 0 to 359 0 N 0 to 3 mum hue N sition 164 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 N 0 to 3 mum saturation N sition 165 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui O to 255 0 N 0 to 3 mum saturation N sition 166 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 N 0 to 3 mum brightness N sition 167 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 N 0 to 3 mum brightness N sition FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters z L seolpueddy 466 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 area sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Area display Setting Acqui 0 Display area 1 Do not dis 0 settings sition play area 701 Gravity X display Setti
158. space on both sides of the Touch Finder The distance between the Touch Finder and other devices should be at least that shown in the following diagram _ 15 mm min 15 mm min e Make sure that the ae temperature is 50 C or lower If it exceeds 50 C install an cooling fan or an air condi tioner and maintain the temperature at 50 C or lower e To prevent interference by noise do not mount the Sensor on panels which contain high voltage devices e To keep the level of noise from the surrounding environment to a minimum install the Sensor and Touch Finder at least 10 m away from power lines Installation FQ2 User s Manual Mounting to DIN Track Installation Procedure 1 Press the slider on the Touch Finder to the top 2 Hook the clip at the top of the Touch Finder on to the DIN Track 3 Press the Touch Finder onto the DIN Track until the bottom clip clicks into place e Attach End Plates sold separately on the sides of the Touch Finder on the DIN Track e If other devices will be installed next to the Touch Finder on the same DIN Track make sure that sufficient space is kept between the devices as indicated on previous page e Always hook the clip at the top of the Touch Finder on the DIN Track first If the lower clip is hooked on first the Touch Finder will not be mounted very securely Removal Procedure 1 Pull down on the slider on the Touch Finder 2 Lift the Touch Finder at the botto
159. that requires field of view of 35 mm the camera installation distance must be 200 mm and a 2 mm macro ring is required Camera Macro ring tL mm Camera installation distance mm Measurement object k Field of view mm Camera lens Lens Models and Dimensions Maximum outside diameter 1 32 UNF Filter threads C mount threads M8 re HL Total length Installation FQ2 User s Manual 3Z4S LE SV IH series High resolution Low distortion Lenses c suoNoeUUOyD pue UOTe e Su Lens model Focal length Brightness Maximum Total length _ Filter size outside diam eter 3Z4S LE SV 0614H 6 1 mm F1 4 42 mm 57 5 mm M40 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 0814H 8 0 mm F1 4 39 mm 52 5 mm M35 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 1214H 12 3 mm F1 4 30 mm 51 0 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 1614H 16 2 mm F1 4 30 mm 47 5 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 2514H 25 0 mm F1 4 30 mm 36 0 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 3514H 35 01 mm F1 4 44 mm 45 5 mm M35 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 5014H 50 0 mm F1 4 44 mm 57 5 mm M40 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 7525H 75 mm F2 5 36 mm 49 5 mm M34 0 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 10028H 100 mm F2 8 39 mm 66 5 mm M37 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV series Lenses Lens model Focal length Brightness Maximum out Total length Filter size side diameter 3Z4S LE SV 0614V 6 2
160. the panel This is due to the structure of the LCD panel and is not a malfunction Influence of Temperature Changes on Optical Axis Due to the characteristics of the materials that are used in the Sensor changes in the ambient temperature may cause the center of the optical axis to change by several pixels e Imaging Elements Due to the specifications of the CMOS image sensors that are used in the Vision Sensor lines may appear in images for some measurement conditions or gain settings These do not indicate defects or faults in the Vision Sensor Also there may be some pixel defects but these do not indicate defects or faults in the Vision Sensor 3 Battery Do not use or charge the Battery with other than the specified products Do not charge the Battery with other than the specified AC adapter e When using the Touch Finder the battery cover screw must be tightened 4 AC Adapter e During maintenance and when not using the Touch Finder for an extended time remove the power plug from the outlet Do not bend the power cable past its natural bending radius Do not use the AC Adapter with other than the specified products e If a voltage higher than 380 V is applied there is a risk that the capacitor will be damaged the pressure valve will open and vaporized gas will be emitted If there is a possibility that a voltage higher than 380 V will be applied use a protective device 5 Maintenance and Inspection Do not us
161. the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications You can send commands from an external device to control the Sensor The commands and the command formats are the same as for no protocol communications for an Ethernet connection BA Controlling the Sensor from an External Device p 357 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 395 O ozez su wm Bunosuuog Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Troubleshooting 11 1 Error Histories 0 0 cee ee 398 11 2 Error MessageS occ ccc ee eee eens vanes vee sarani 400 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting 00 e eee 401 11 1 Error Histories Error histories are stored with the PC Tool and in the Sensor and in the Touch Finder Up to 100 errors will be stored in the error history in the Sensor or Touch Finder Errors Stored in the Error History Error in error history Cause Points to check Measures to perform TRIG Input Error eee Error code 01040302 A TRIG signal was input when the BUSY signal for Sensor measurement was ON Check the program in the PLC or other host to see if an inter lock or similar measure has been implemented If a relay or other device with contacts is being used as the input device see if chattering has occurred Program interlocks to control the
162. the calibration settings BA Selecting the Calibration Pattern to Use p 199 You can set the calibration setting for each scene You can use the same calibration setting for different scenes or use a different calibration setting for each scene Setting the Calibration Pattern Point Specification Set the pixel coordinates of positions to set the calibration pattern When you enter the actual coordinates of the specified positions the calibration parameters are automatically calculated You can register the coordinates of up to 10 positions e Different Magnifications in X and Y Directions Specify three positions X Y 5 3 Calibration Note If two positions are set a lefthand coordinate system will be set i e clockwise is the positive direction If you want to include the coordinate system in the calibration specify three positions p Setup Mode Calibration 1 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 fre Ota libration datat to Calibration data 31 2 Press Modify 3 Press lt Specify point on the right of the display Woe Calibration FQ2 User s Manual 4 Press No 1 and then press Modify 5 Press the Camera coordinates to register on the dis play to select them A cross mark will be displayed on the selected position Note e You can enlarge the display LU Image Zoom p 200 e You can fine tune the coordinate
163. the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 277 8 UONDEUUOD J lleIed e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado pulijonuog 278 Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn ON IN1 and IN2 Turn OFF IN3 Turn ON IN4 and IN5 Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for executing teaching Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Clearing the OR and D Signals This command clears the OR signal and D signals Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000010 11000010 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON _ RUN signal OFF ON TRIG signal Fa ON for 1 ms min OFF 3 TRIG is input ON Y BUSY signal OFF o Measurements executed ON OR signal OFF 7 D signals lt Data i 0 ON Ld GATE signal f ee OFF nn x v GATE ON delay Output time INO to ING K 1000010 signals Allow 5 ms min No and then turn ON IN7 1 ON for 1 ms min ON NG IN7 signal W OFF ON j ACK signal OFF ACK output time Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Output Signals
164. the data can be output from the Vision Sensor only when the condition to receive that data are met at the PLC PLC master Vision Sensor slave CPU Unit ss a After gt 1 O memory measurements Communications area Ne Output area lt te Data Up to 256 specified data items can be automatically output Ethernet PLC Link communications PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual You must specify in advance the data to output after measurements You must also specify in advance the Output Area in I O memory to store the data in the PLC After a single measurement or continuous measurements the data is automatically stored in the Output Area of the PLC via Ethernet For PLC Link communications the following three communications areas are set in the PLC to perform communications Command response communications 1 Command area This is the area to which you write control commands for the Vision Sensor to execute 2 Response area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes the results of control commands executed from the Command Area Data output after mea surements 3 Output area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes output data for measurements after an inspection is performed You can set the area and address settings in the communications specifications of the Vision Sensor to assign the above three communicati
165. the row number in the Y direction of the output region region number Y Sub region position X 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 This is the X coordinate of the sub region that was found Sub region position Y 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 This is the Y coordinate of the sub region that was found Correlation sub region 0 to 100 Correlation Deviation sub region 0 to 221 Density deviation x When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table OJ 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the contrast of the image within the model registration region is too low Select a region with a larger contrast between light and dark areas compared to the region that was registered as the model and re register it as the model FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item 119 suono dsuj dN Bues 174 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item Edge Position This inspection item is used to inspect positions For example it can be used to see if a label is attached at the correct position or if a product is set in the correct position Places where the color changes greatly are called edges The positions of these edges are measured Sample Settings Sample Measurement An edge is detected within the region according to se
166. to 99 999 9999 1 reference position position when it was registered X SY1 Edg1 ref pos Y edge This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 1 reference position position when it was registered Y STH Reference angle This is the angle when the edge was reg 180 to 180 istered FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 87 sobew uiye L MEMO e Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Setting Up Inspections 4 1 Inspection Item Selection Guide 200 2200 eee 90 4 2 Setup Procedure for Inspection Items 0 0055 92 4 3 Configuring Inspection Items 000 93 4 4 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item 95 4 5 Inspecting with the Shape Search Il Inspection Item 105 4 6 Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item 113 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item 120 4 8 Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item 127 4 9 Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item 131 4 10 Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item 136 4 11 Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item 140 4 12 Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item 146 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 155 suonoedsu dN Bulyjas Y 4 1 Inspection Item Sel
167. to CRN 99 Correlation sub region This is the correlation of the sub 0 to 100 region that was found DVN 0 to DVN 99 Deviation sub region This is the density deviation of the 0 to 221 region that was found 7 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Range of value Description Judgement 2 No judgement not measured This is the judgement result of the sensitive search 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation 0 to 100 Correlation D deviation 0 to 221 Density deviation Position X 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 This is the X coordinate of the position where the model was found Position Y 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 This is the Y coordinate of the position where the model was found Angle 180 to 180 This is the angle of the position where the model was found NG sub region 0 to 100 This is the number of NG sub regions Sub region number 0 to 99 This is the number of the regions with the lowest correlation Sub region pos X sub 0 to 9 This is the column number in the X direction of the output region region number X Sub region pos Y sub 0 to 9 This is
168. to the SYSMAC CS CJ CP NSJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual Cat No W342 Range for Receiving FINS Commands The FQ2 can receive FINS commands that are sent by an OMRON CPU Unit on the same Ethernet network The FQ2 can send responses to the received commands to the CPU Unit that sent the commands The FQ2 cannot receive FINS commands from any networks other than Ethernet or from devices on networks to which the FQ2 is not directly connected Ethernet Unit FINS command addressed to FQ2 Ethernet Response Sending FINS Commands A special instruction for sending commands the CMND instruction is used to send FINS commands from the CPU Unit If you specify the FINS command code to send in the CMND instruction the CPU Unit will attach the FINS header and send the FINS command frame When the CPU Unit receives the response from the Sensor it automatically removes the FINS header and stores only the response data in the memory location that is specified in the CMND instruction Refer to the SYSMAC CS CJ CP NSJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual Cat No W342 for more information on sending FINS commands with the CMND instruction Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Destination in the CMND Instruction To send a FINS command to the FQ2 the destination of the FINS command is specified in the control data of the CMND i
169. type of image to display on Measurement Image All Color Image Scene Setting the color specification display to check _ default Selected Color Image or on the image the color that was set for Binary Image the reference color Back Specifies the background color of the Black default white red green or blue Scene ground extracted image color Y Insp region Moves the measurement region or Scene p 139 m adjusts the size of the measurement B region O O 5 Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 amp Judgement Scene Sce sis 2i 3 F Detection If you enabled the output of multiple Scene p 96 2 o a No results you can specify the results to dis p 106 a play p 114 o Z Correlation Sets the correlation OK range 0 to 100 Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper Scene 2 limit 100 D Position X Sets the position OK range Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Scene S Upper limit 99 999 9999 2 Position Y Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Scene o Upper limit 99 999 9999 Q E Angle Sets the angle OK range 180 to 180 Defaults Lower limit 180 Scene 2 Upper limit 180 5 g Count Sets the count OK range 0 to 32 default 0 Scene g Position X Sets the position OK range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Scene p 121 Defaults L
170. z L seoipueddy External refer ence number 120 121 122 140 141 142 143 147 149 150 153 157 160 161 162 163 167 169 170 173 177 Category Mea sure ment condi tions Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data sition sion text Judgement string parameter Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 precision sition Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 image sition 1 Previous image Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification Edge color RO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color G0 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color BO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Density change 0 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT O sition Edge level 0 Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sition Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 o peal sition Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 0 sition 0 Pro
171. 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference angle ST 180 to 180 0 Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Search position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Edge position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position Y N 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string 2Edge position Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position X XO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge0 position Y YO 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Edge position X x1
172. 0 0 s default nected Number of delay Set the number of times to ignore the 1 to 15 default System p 263 TRIG signal turning ON between when the TRIG signal turns ON and the mea surement results are output Only when the FQ SDU1L is con nected ACK signal ON Sets the output time of the normal execu 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 270 period tion completion signal for parallel com 5 0 ms default mands Only when the FQ SDU is connected Output polarity Sets the ON OFF polarity for all of the Positive default Negative System p 270 output signals Only when the FQ SDU is connected Input mode Specifies whether to use functions other Standard mode default or Expanded System p 247 Menu Tables than scene switching for external parallel commands mode FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 3 Output data set Data 0 to data 31 p 352 2 2 Si p 353 nj N gt Data settings Sets data to output to selected data num Text strings for the filter items position p 355 Q fs t a ber compensation items inspection items BISE Multi data and expression that are set 3 8 setting 2 Rename Changes the name of the selected data The name can be changed to a name 3 number with up to 15 alphanumeric characters Copy Copies the contents registered in the selected data number to another
173. 0 SX 3 Reference SX 4th point 16 10 SY 3 Reference SY 4th point 1 The inspection results will be output according to the sorting method that is set for multi point output for the inspection item a8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Noprotocol data output 1 Press Output format 2 Set Output form to ASCII or Binary 3 Set the data format for the data form that you select ASCII ed Dulpul formal haat form 3 No No protocol TCP Connection mode TCP server Item Description Setting range For ASCII Digits of Sets the number of digits in the integer part 1 to 10 digits integer of the number Default 6 digits Digits of Set the number of digits in the integer part 0 to 4 digits decimal Default 4 digits Negative Sets the way to express negative numbers or 8 Default 0 Sup Sets whether to use zero suppression Yes or No pressed Default No Field sepa Sets the field separator OFF comma tab space CR LF rator or CR LF Default OFF Record Sets the record separator OFF comma tab space CR LF separator or CR LF Default OFF For Binary Decimal Set the decimal output form for numerical Floating point or fixed point output form data default Fixed point FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting
174. 0 mm F1 4 29 mm 30 0 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 0813V 8 05 mm F1 3 28 mm 34 0 mm M25 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 1214V 12 43 mm F1 4 29 mm 29 5 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 1614V 16 34 mm F1 4 29 mm 24 0 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 2514V 25 17 mm F1 4 29 mm 24 5 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 3518V 34 75 mm F1 8 29 mm 33 5 mm M27 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 5018V 47 97 mm F1 8 32 mm 37 0 mm M30 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 7527V 76 71 mm F2 7 32 mm 42 0 mm M30 5 P0 5 3Z4S LE SV 10035V 95 4 mm F3 5 32 mm 43 9 mm M30 5 P0 5 FQ2 User s Manual Installation 38 Macro Rings Macro rings are inserted between the Lens and the camera to adjust the focus You can use up to seven macro rings to achieve the required thickness Macro ring E e LE Model Maximum out Thickness side diameter 3Z4S LE SV EXR 31 mm 7 piece set Thickness 0 5 mm 1mm 2mm 5mm 10mm 20mm 40 mm e Do not stack 0 5 mm 1 0 mm and 2 0 mm macro rings These sizes fit between the Lens and the threaded portion of other macro rings If two or more are stacked together the screw cannot be tightened securely e The macro rings may need to be reinforced depending on the vibration conditions if over 30 mm is used Installing the Touch Finder Installation Precautions Install the Touch Finder in the following orientation to allow sufficient heat dissipation Do not mount it in the following orientations e To improve ventilation leave
175. 0 to 100 0 CR Logged data only 6 Deviation Acquisition Color Camera 0 000 to 0 DV Logged data only 219 9705 Monochrome Camera 0 000 to 127 000 7 Measurement position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x Logged data X search center posi only 99 999 9999 tion 8 Measurement position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y Logged data Y search center posi only 99 999 9999 tion 9 Angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 TH Logged data only 10 Detection X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 RX Logged data only 99 999 9999 11 Detection Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 RY Logged data only 99 999 9999 12 Reference position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX Logged data only 99 999 9999 13 Reference position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Reference angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ST Logged data only 15 NG sub region Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CT Logged data only 16 Sub region number Acquisition 0 to 99 0 AN Logged data only 17 Sub region number X Acquisition Oto9 0 ANX Logged data only 18 Sub region number Y Acquisition Oto9 0 ANY Logged data only 19 Measurement position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data X sub region only 99 999 9999 20 Measurement position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data Y sub region only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 454 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s
176. 010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Measurement 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes result 1 024 bytes 28 OF End code 00101010 Measurement result End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Measurement result e Returns the measurement result as the response when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set Q Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 379 e Each data item requires 4 bytes Up to 1 024 bytes of data can be received FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 379 jeusey y YyBnosy Buyosuuoy 6 Clearing Measurement Values 280F 00102010 This command clears the measurement values Command Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00102010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00102010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Clearing Errors 280F 00102040 This command clears the error output status error output and error indicator Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command co
177. 1 00103010 Save Data in Sensor Saves scene data and system data p 311 00104010 Re register Model Registers the model again for registered p 312 Search Position Compensation Shape Search Il Position Compensation Search Shape Search II or Sensitive Search inspec tion items 00104020 Teach Executes teaching for all inspection items p 312 0010F010 Reset Resets the Vision Sensor Pros 00205000 Get Latest Error Information _ Acquires the latest error information p 313 Scene Control Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00201000 Get Scene Number Acquires the current scene number p 314 00301000 Select Scene Changes to the specified scene number p 314 308 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Data Acquisition Setting Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00401010 Get Image Adjustment Data Acquires data from a position compensation p 315 item or filter item 00501010 Set Image Adjustment Data Sets the specified data in a position compen p 315 sation item or filter item 00401020 Get Inspection Item Data Acquires the inspection item data p 316 00501020 Set Inspection Item Data Sets the inspection item data to the specified p 317 data 00403000 Get Software Version Informa Acquires the software version p 317 After you execute the Reset command 0010F010 hex f
178. 10 Y Const Used to insert numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Item at Inspection Item 0 Inspection item 10 Search Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corre CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor 28 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Expression Setting Example This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item 0 Search Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY Multi point output setting Multi point output Check Box selected Count 4 LPR 0 10 C 10 X 10 Y 10 SX 10 SY Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number Output Resul
179. 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 y 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv READY BUSY FLG Control signals 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv GATE 32 bits 2 Command code Com mand 3 code 32 bits 4 Response code Response code 32 5 bits 6 Response data Response data 32 7 bits Signal Signal name Function Application FLG Control Command Com This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Command pleted completes execution of the control command response commu nications This signal automatically turns OFF when the ata Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal from the PLC turns OFF This signal turns ON after the control com mand code response code and response data have been stored BUSY Command Execution This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor is Active executing a control command It is OFF while the Vision Sensor is not execut ing a control command READY Ready This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Command can execute a command response commu nications This signal turns OFF when the Vision Sensor loan cannot execute a command ERR Error This signal turns ON when an error is detected Command in the Vision Sensor response commu EE nications This flag turns ON when an error occurs in PLC link communications This signal will remain OFF for any errors other than PLC Link co
180. 187 COMOUT1 45 all color images 143 149 i i configuration 93 All Region 183 fina t th s 204 All Sens r data 218 oe o more than one Sensor Angle 96 106 114 cl seni automatic 22 Angle range 99 109 116 connector cover 30 Area 142 148 area 140 console 101 Correlation 96 106 114 auto connect 22 Average pitch 133 Comeaton ae PAm 133 Count ae NO aT g CSV 212 B B average 138 B g D Area 142 Background Suppression 70 DO to D15 45 backing up data 218 dat backlight 202 wa F saving 218 basic troubleshooting 401 saving to file 218 Battery 51 PETAI DC power supply connector specifications 480 f Touch Finder 31 battery level 230 F decimal symbol 212 binary images 143 149 nse eer Definitions of Laser Classification 501 brightness 63 137 deleting log 216 brightness correction mode 61 Density average 138 BUSY 45 47 3 nai Density deviat density deviation 138 BUSY Indicator 231 wae detailed EtherNet IP communications BUSY signal 234 Sie BUSY signal output polarity 244 specifications ate deviation area 142 C DHCP 53 calibration 193 Dilate 69 calibration data DIN Track mounting section 32 saving 218 display elements 23 calibration group data display language 229 saving 218 display patterns 225 calibration pattern 194 199 All color image 143 149 camera image 224 Binary image 143 149 camera image file 201 Measurement image 143 149 Camera input 183 Selected color image 143 149 camer
181. 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents response area p 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 13 0000 0000 0100 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 1 000 times the 7 0000 0000 0000 oooo Yaue PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Set Inspection Item Data Command Code 1020 0050 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents po 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 palatine 430 hererence 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 _ Value to set 1 000 times the 9 0000 0000 0000 oooo Yaue Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents bee Ren eee toys 8 to 11 4107 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code s wo f wo o ara aaa orice 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 eee a Get Software Version Information Command Code 3000 0040 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command faa 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Comma
182. 2 S Sensors with Built in Lighting D or Sensors with C mounts Brown Power supply pen Blue GND Black OUTO OR eal Orange OUT1 BUSY Light blue OUT2 ERROR Pink TRIG Gray INO FQ WDO Green IN1 I O Cable Red IN2 White IN3 Purple IN4 Yellow IN5 mA Classifi Signal Application cation Power Power supply These terminals are for the external power supply 24 V supply 24 V GND Wire the power supply separately from other devices If the wiring for other devices is placed together or in the same duct as the wiring for the Vision Sensor the influences of electromagnetic induction may cause the Sensor to malfunction or may damage it Inputs TRIG This terminal is the trigger signal input INO to IN5 These are the command input terminals Outputs OUTO OR By default this is the OR output signal overall judgement The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgement from 0 to 31 OUT1 BUSY By default this is the BUSY output signal The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgement from 0 to 31 OUT2 ERROR By default this is the ERROR output signal The assignment can be changed to RUN READY an individual judgement signal from ORO to OR31 the STGOUT strobe trigger output or an expression judgemen
183. 2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 381 jeusay y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 382 Resetting the Sensor 280F 0010F010 This command resets the Sensor Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 0010F010 Response Format If process is completed normally the Sensor is reset There is therefore no response External Teaching 280F 00104020 This command performs teaching for all applicable inspection items Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00104020 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00104020 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Getting the Scene Number 280F 00201000 This command acquires the scene number that is currently being used Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00201000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Scene number 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00201000 Scene number that was acquired 2 digits max End Codes E
184. 255 mode is set to a TCP server c 0 to 255 d 1 to 254 Default 10 5 5 111 Port No Sets the output port number 0 to 65535 Default 9600 System p 351 Setting is not possible if the connection mode is set to a TCP server FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 423 z L seoipueddy 424 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 amp When the com i f 5 S munications type 2 S Slis RS 232C no 2 9 F is 5 protocol a o Baud rate Set the baud rate to use for RS 232C 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 System p 394 zZ communications or 115200 default 38400 Data Sets the data length 7bit or 8bit default 8bit System p 394 length Parity Sets the parity None Odd Even default None System p 394 Stop bit Sets the number of stop bits 1bit 2bit default 1bit System p 394 Flow con Sets the controls for the flow of commu None Xon Xoff default None System p 394 trol nications with the software Delimiter Set the delimiter to add to the end of CR LF or CR LF default CR System p 394 commands and responses Interval Timeout s Set the time in seconds to 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored System p 394 timeout generate a timeout error default 0 s text Interval Timeout s Set the time in seconds to 1 to 120 s 0 Not monitored System p 394 time generate a timeout error default 0 s out after
185. 28 OF 00401010 Position compensation item filter External reference item number 0 to 7 1 digit max number Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Acquired value 4 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes bytes 28 OF End code 00401010 Acquired value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Position compensation Specifies the number of the position compensation item or filter item for which to acquire the data item number External reference num Specifies the external reference number ber Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Acquired value Returns the image adjustment data or threshold value Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 385 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Set Image Adjustment Data 280F 00501010 This command sets parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Position compensation item filter External reference Set value 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes item number 4 bytes number 4 bytes 28 OF 00501010 Position compensation item filter External reference Setting item number 0 to 7 1 digit max number
186. 2C Controller External device to be connected Signal name Pin No Pin No Signal name RD 2 RD SD 3 7 SD GND 5 is GND RS CS control cannot be used Use a shielded cable Connection Method Align the connector with the socket and press it straight into place then fix it with the screws on both sides of the connector Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting a Cable Peripheral devices may be damaged if the cable is connected or disconnected with the power ON Wiring FQ2 User s Manual I O Signal Circuit Diagrams NPN Input Circuit Output Circuit a ala a ea a Se ea ae ee arene Input terminal i 3KQ i l 5 o d 1 M 2 I 1 Output terminal i Parmaa 2 i i el a 1 oS Internal Load T S oF i a i T l circuits eh D 1 I E T l 1 I g I i 3 mimmi i i i iCOM_ i i i i COM_O PNP Input Circuit Output Circuit FO re ee Ne Leg Penn PE E een iy A Tae PT renee ee a epee ee a 1 Input terminal i 3KQ i l Too l NW 2 COM_O i pinis a 2 ji i a G i pe i 5 l Internal i s F FSi E circuits i i i S i i o e e Trn i i l i i I Preventing Chattering e The Sensor is equipped with an anti chattering function but if the chattering is 100 us or longer a faulty input may occur Input signals of 99 us or shorter are ignored Signals of 100 us or longer are treated as input signals e Use n
187. 34 4 10 Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item 00 eee ee 136 Color Data Inspection Item 0 0 0 0c eens 136 Setup Procedure for Color Data Inspection Item 000005 136 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 0 00 ccc ene 138 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 138 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged Color Data 139 Increasing Processing Speed for Color Data 00000 ee eae 139 4 11 Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item 00 e eee eee 140 Area Inspection Item 0 0 0000 eee 140 Setup Procedure for Area 1 6 eee nee 140 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 0 0 cee 142 Unstable Area Results o c ecaycee ea parani bee e ee eee ee eee es 142 Changing the Area Detection Conditions 0 00 144 Increasing Processing Speed for Area 1 0 0 0 0 cee 144 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 145 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Area 0 000 145 EMOS stn aan eaaa a a fee Bia SHA A He Dee AS GS ee ESS 145 4 12 Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item 045 146 kabeln gi aan a a ARE D acca nese ETE EAE E A A EEEE E E R de INE amp 146 Setup Procedure for Labeling Inspection Item nna anaana anaana 146 Unstable Labeling Results noua sei tereraa dwnnel pA eee 148 Changing the Label Detection Conditions
188. 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data suonoedsu dN Buijes Y Parameter Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation 0 to 100 This is the measured correlation Position X 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position X Position Y 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position Y Angle 180 to 180 This is the measurement angle Count 0 to 32 This is the number of models found x When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table If more than one item is stored results are output for each model O 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 111 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the contrast of the image within the model registration region is too low Select a region with a larger contrast between light and dark areas compared to the region that was registered as the model and re register it as the model Te Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual 4 6 Inspecting with the Sensitive Search In
189. 4 FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Install Exe FQ2 User s Manual Extr hor edges Extr ver edges Enhance edges Backer Suppr Shape pos comp Search p comp Edge pos comp 2Edee pos comp 2ed midp comp Ed r p comp Search Create Memory Infomation Unit Byte Total Memory Size 4928056 Use Memory Size 0 Total Memory Size Use Memory Size Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor 493 z L seoipueddy Note Grayed out Inspection Items If selecting an inspection item would cause the total memory size to be exceeded that inspection item will be grayed out on the display Select the inspection items with the highest priority first The Touch Finder will be updated automatically FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Install Exe Create Install Data Install Exe Ejoo m m E EEEn 7 Click Install Exe I4 FQ Item Selector K Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor FQ2 User s Manual 8 Select the Browse Button and select the file that was saved in step 6 above FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data Install Exe I4 FQ Item Selector Greate Install Data ct
190. 5 2 I O Cable connector An FQ WD or FQ WU I O Cable is used to connect the Sensor to the power supply external I O and Data Unit 3 Ethernet Cable connector An FQ WN Ethernet Cable is used to connect the Sensor to external devices such as the Touch Finder or computers 4 Operation OR Lights orange when the overall judgement output OR signal turns ON indicators ETN Lights orange during Ethernet communications ERROR Lights red when an error occurs BA 11 1 Error Histories p 398 BUSY Lights green when the Sensor is executing a process You can change the BUSY indicator to a RUN indicator This indicator is set by default to a BUSY indicator but if you change it to a RUN indicator it will light green during operation O Changing the Sensor s BUSY Indicator p 231 5 Mounting holes These mounting holes for M3 screws are used to mount the Camera and to mount to the base There are mounting holes on the top bottom left and right surfaces OJ Dimensions p 477 6 Mounting base enclosed The mounting base has 1 4 20UNC threads and is used to mount the Sen sor The base can be attached to the bottom top left or right side of the Sensor We recommend mounting the Sensor with the mounting screw holes The mounting base does not necessarily need to be used 7 C mount cover This cover is attached to the C mount lens fitting when a lens is not
191. 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP yeusau y yBnosu Buyoauu0D 6 Re register Model Command Code 0010 4010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code s wo f owo oo F000 cea 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG External Teaching Command Code 0010 4020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0000 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Reset Vision Sensor Command Code 0010 F010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 1111 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC There is no response for a rese
192. 5 mm i i __ bd P rs I I Heo Ho l f L i Waterproof sheet 2 Power Supply Connection and Wiring e When using a commercially available switching regulator make sure that the FG terminal is grounded e If surge currents are present in the power lines connect surge absorbers that suit the operating environment e Before turning ON the power after the product is connected make sure that the power supply voltage is correct there are no incorrect connections e g load short circuit and the load current is appropriate Incorrect wiring may result in breakdown of the product e Do not subject the Cables to twisting stress Doing so may damage the Cables e Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting Cables The Sensor may fail if a Cable is connected or disconnected while power is being supplied e For cables use only the special products specified in this manual LI p 487 p 488 p 489 p 490 e Use only combinations of the Sensor and Touch Finder specified in this manual Using other combinations may cause malfunction or damage FQ2 User s Manual Do not turn the power OFF in the following instances Doing so will damage data that is in the process of being saved While data is being saved in internal memory While data is being saved on the SD card e The LCD panel has been made using precision technology and sometimes a few pixels are missing in
193. 50 Mea Multiple output Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 152 condi Extraction condition X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 tions upper limit sition 99 999 9999 153 Extraction condition X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 lower limit sition 99 999 9999 154 Extraction condition Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 upper limit sition 99 999 9999 155 Extraction condition Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 lower limit sition 99 999 9999 160 Detection count Setting Acqui 1 to 32 32 sition 300 Logging Number of data log Setting Acqui 1 to 32 32 condi records sition tions 310 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 position X sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 measurement angle sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acq
194. 54 398 53 486 29 357 31 61 67 236 69 69 69 212 212 209 69 378 376 60 60 222 488 44 46 200 138 63 45 182 182 148 148 142 142 229 handshaking HDR function hiding the menu high dynamic range histograms auto display class display range hue I O Cable connector I O Cables I O indicators 232C_COM BUSY OR NG OR OK POWER ERROR RUN SENSOR I O monitor image adjustment image data logging image input increasing speed partial input image input mode images displaying last NG image displaying saved images frozen live updating zooming in zooming out zooming to fit display INO to IN5 INO to IN7 individual judgements initializing Sensor and Touch Finder Input mode inputs INO to IN5 TRIG inspection items Area color palette teaching errors Color Data copying deleting Edge Pitch Edge Position color palette teaching errors Edge Width 266 64 202 64 185 185 185 185 137 42 29 30 486 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 203 68 209 173 173 174 201 201 200 200 201 200 200 200 47 45 241 229 229 416 42 42 90 140 143 149 145 136 94 94 131 120 124 126 127 Index 507 ZL x pul teaching errors 130 134 labeling 146 renaming 94 Search 95 105 113 teaching errors 104 112 searching 95 105 113 installation 33 IP address 53 55 L Labeling 146 language 229 LCD Backlight 202 lens models 36 Lens selection 35 Light
195. 55 255 sition 143 Edge color BO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 147 Density change 0 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT O sition 149 Edge level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 Monochrome 50 sition Cameras 150 Noise level 0 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 153 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 0 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 157 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 160 Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 1 sition tion 1 Edge color specification 161 Edge color R1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 162 Edge color G1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 163 Edge color B1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 167 Density change 1 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT O sition 169 Edge level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 sition 445 z L seoipueddy 446 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 170 Mea Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 _ sure sition ment 173 condi Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 tions change 1 sition 0 Li
196. 76 time Touch Finder 229 Total label area 148 Touch Finder 479 Index 509 ZL x pul 510 V W information model with AC DC battery power supply model with DC power supply time settings Touch Finder data saving trend monitor Auto display Display range Number of data TRIG TRIGO trigger delay two Touch Finders connected at the same time two edge midpoint compensation two edge position compensation updating software version versions Weak Smoothing white balance width amount wiring Sensor Sensor Data Units Touch Finder zooming Index 230 479 479 229 218 184 184 185 45 47 66 67 225 83 81 491 230 69 65 128 42 42 44 50 200 FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual Zp P A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number at the bottom of the front and back covers of this manual Cat No Z326 E1 01A Revision code 01 July 2012 Original production 01A October 2012 Minor corrections co FQ2 User s Manual
197. 80 180 limit sition 141 Rotation angle lower Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 149 Mea Candidate level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 sure sition ment condition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 150 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 tion point sition coordi 151 nate Detection point Y Setting Acqui O to 9 999 0 sition 156 Mea Model mode Setting Acqui 0 Stable 1 High speed 0 sure sition ment condition 160 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge ment for search coordinate X sition 999 ment condi 161 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9 ment 999 162 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 999 ment 163 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9 ment 999 164 Judgement upper limit Setting Ac
198. 9 0 Reference angle ST 180 to 180 0 Detection X RX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Detection Y RY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Count C 0 to 32 0 Shape Search II Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180 0 Reference X SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference Y SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference angle ST 180 to 180 0 Detection X RX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Detection Y RY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Count C 0 to 32 0 164 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Sensitive Search Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation CR 0 to 100 0 Density DV 0 to 221 0 Position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180 0 Detection X RX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Detection Y RY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Ref position X refer SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
199. 9 999 9999 to where the model was found 999 999 999 9999 TH Angle This is the angle of the position where 180 to 180 the model was found RX Detection X This is the X coordinate of the detec 999 999 999 9999 to tion point when the model was regis 999 999 999 9999 tered RY Detection Y This is the Y coordinate of the detec 999 999 999 9999 to tion point when the model was regis 999 999 999 9999 tered SX Reference position X This is the X coordinate of the position 999 999 999 9999 to where the model was registered 999 999 999 9999 This is the center of the model region SY Reference position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 999 999 999 9999 to where the model was registered 999 999 999 9999 This is the center of the model region ST Reference angle This is the angle when the model was 180 to 180 registered CT NG sub region This is the number of NG sub regions 0 to 100 AN Sub region number This is the number of the regions with 0 to 99 the lowest correlation ANX Sub region number X This is the column number in the X 0 direction of the output region ANY Sub region number Y This is the row number in the Y direc 0 tion of the output region DX Sub region pos X This is the X coordinate of the sub 999 999 999 9999 to region that was found 999 999 999 9999 DY Sub region pos Y This is the Y coordinate of the sub 999 999 999 9999 to region that was found 999 999 999 9999 CRN 0
200. 99 ence midpoint X point of the two edges when they were registered SMY Ref Midpoint Y refer This is the Y coordinate of the mid 9 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 ence midpoint Y point of the two edges when they were registered Edge Rotation Position Compensation This position compensation item detects an edge in two directions If the specified color is detected or the specified density is detected for a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera it is recognized as an edge Two edge positions are detected The image is adjusted so that the two edge positions match the positions when the edge positions were registered Two detected edge positions Edge search direction for edge 1 Edge search direction for edge 0 Measurement region for edge 0 i Measurement Aa region for edge 1 Color of edge Registered position of the edge The image is adjusted so that the two to be found detected edge positions appear at the positions they were in when the edge was registered p gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp 2 Press Edge Edge rot pos Comp 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Edge Rotation Position Compensation below FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Be sobew uiye L 86 4 Press OK 5 Press Back e Detailed Settings for Edge Rotation Po
201. 99 9999 This is the maximum width that was detected between edges Min width 0 to 99999 9999 This is the minimum width that was detected between edges When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table 7 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the edge pitch cannot be detected when teaching Perform the following e If the color of the measurement object has changed from the specified color set the color again and try teaching again 134 Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected adjust the Noise level on the Details Tab Page and try teaching again If an edge is not detected when teaching 0 will be registered as the reference width If the result is OKed when there is not edge set the judgement parameters for a reference position of 0 Edge Not Found The measured edge pitch will be 0 Perform the following e If a color was specified make sure the color of the measurement object has not changed from the specified color e Set the color again if necessary e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected make sure the Edge level parameter on the Details Tab Page is correct CI Edge level p 122 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item 135 suonoedsu dN Bues 174
202. 99 9999 11 Reference angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ST only 12 Detection coordinate X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 RX only 99 999 9999 13 Detection coordinate Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 RY only 99 999 9999 14 Count Acquisition 0 to 32 0 Cc Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Model Rotation Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 region sition 121 Rotation angle upper Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 122 Rotation angle lower Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 457 z L seoipueddy 458 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 127 Mea Previous conversion Setting Acqui 0 Previous conversion 0 sure mode sition mode OFF 1 Previous con ment version mode ON condi 133 tions Candidate level Setting Acqui O to 100 60 sition 134 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 0 _ tion point sition 99 999 9999 coordi 135 nate Detection point Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 0 sition 99 999 9999 136 Mea Sort condition Setting Acqui 0 Ascending order of corre 1 sure sition l
203. 99 9999 then 999 999 999 9999 is output The following values are output if JG Judge is set OK 0 NG 1 Note Data that is output after measurement is output until the last data even after the measurement is finished Data out put is not interrupted midway e When Output Format Is Binary Set the numerical expression Select either fixed decimal or floating point decimal e Output Format lt Measured value of data 0 x 1 000 gt lt Measured value of data 1 x 1 000 gt lt Measured value of data 7 x 1 000 gt CR YY gt 1 ED a 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes Delimiter The measurement data multiplied by 1 000 is output continuously at 4 bytes per data Negative numbers are output as two s complements 6 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Example When Data 0 Is 256 324 and Data 1 Is 1 000 00 03 E9 44 FF FF FC 18 0D eee eee Data 0 256324 Data 1 1000 A delimiter will 256 324 x 1000 1 000 x 1000 be attached to the end Note Binary output does not use data separators i e field separators or record separators These separators are used only for ASCII output The following range of values can be output 2 147 483 648 lt Measured value lt 2 147 483 647 If the measured value is lower than 2 147 483 648 then 2 147 483 648 is output If the measured value is higher than 2 147 483 647 th
204. 99 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position X Ref position Y refer SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position Y Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Labeling Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Number of labels L 0 to 100 0 Area AR 0 to AR 99 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Gravity X X 0 to X 99 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Gravity Y Y 0 to Y 99 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Reference area SA 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Ref position X refer SX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position X Ref position Y refer SY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 ence position Y Total label area TAR 0 to 999999999 9999 0 Master angle ATH 0 to ATH 99 180 to 180 0 The following values can be specified as calcul ation data to output them Data name Expression text string Description Judgement JG This is the judgement result It is the OR logic of the judgement results of all expressions Judgement 0 J00 This is the judgement results of expression 0 Judgement 1 J01 This is the judgement results of expression 1 Judgement 31 J31 This is the judgement results of e
205. 999 999 9999 999 999 ment ior area sition 999 999 9 136 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 or area sition 137 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 for gravity X sition 999 138 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 for gravity X sition 99 999 9 999 139 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 or gravity Y sition 999 140 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 or gravity Y sition 99 999 9 999 141 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 ior binary threshold sition 142 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 for binary threshold sition 143 Mea Binary image display Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 1 sure sition 0 No binary image display ment 1 Binary image display condi 144 tions Image type Setting Acqui 0 Measurement image 1 sition 1 Color extraction image 2 Selected color image 3 Binary image after extraction 145 Enable disable multiple Setting Acqui 0 Enabled 1 selection sition 1 Disabled 160 Nx10 Set color Registered color usage Setting Acqui 0 Not used 1 Used 1 N 0 N 0 to 3 flag N sition 0 N 1 to 3 161 Nx10 Set color Registered color OR Setting Acqui 0 OR 1 NOT 0 _ N 0 to 3 NOT flag N
206. 999 9999 where the model was registered ST Reference angle This is the angle when the model was 180 to 180 registered CR Correlation This is the correlation 0 to 100 Search Position Compensation With this position compensation item an image pattern is registered in advance When the registered image pattern is detected the image is adjusted so that the image pattern is in the same position as when it was registered This position compensation item performs the same type of processing as the Shape Search Position Compensation item but it performs processing to detect differences in colors and patterns in addition to processing for image pattern shapes Note To perform position compensation for a rotated image pattern use the Shape Search Position Compensation item p gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Press OK Press Back aw Q N Press Model Search position comp e Detailed Settings for Search Position Compensation The settings for the Search Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Search inspection item Only the Multi point output setting of the Search item is not included in the settings of the Search Position Compensation item Make the settings for teaching and the judgement conditions in the same Make any detailed settings as req
207. 9999 9 Standard position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX Logged data only 99 999 9999 10 Standard position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY Logged data only 99 999 9999 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 image sition 1 Previous image 140 Set color Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification 141 Edge color red Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 142 Edge color green Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 143 Edge color blue Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 147 Detection mode Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT 0 sition 149 Edge level Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sition 150 No
208. BUSY signal F OFF ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions A gt lt Turned ON when overall judgement is NG OR signal Polarity of all output signals Positive signals ON GALE signal ae GATE ON delay Output time Output period Ae A Peers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 oy T i 1 1 1 1 i The total output time is as follows Output period x Number of output data items The RUN signal turns ON when measurements are enabled and the Sensor is in Run Mode Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process WOOD When the measurement has been finished the measurement results are output using an OR sig nal and the DO to D15 signals and the BUSY signal is turned OFF You can also set the BUSY output parameter so that the BUSY signal is turned OFF after the completion of data logging image logging or displaying results 5 After the BUSY signal turns OFF the GATE signal is turned ON when the time that is set in the GATE ON delay parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 2 6 The GATE signal is turned ON and then the GATE signal is turned OFF when the time that is set in the Output time parameter in the communications settings has elapsed E Z Set the GATE ON delay and output time for the GATE signal so that the total ti
209. Bunosuuog 6 ITEMDATA or ID Acquire Inspection Item Data This command acquires the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item lt Command Format gt External reference Inspection item number data number Command 2 digits max 4 digits max F lt oa jiitfetmyolva rya f fer or Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 ode dT er _ L Delimiter Command Inspection item External reference number data number 2 digits max 4 digits max Space Space 0x20 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E R or Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number __ Specifies the inspection item number 0 to 31 External reference data Specifies the external reference data number 0 to 9999 number O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Acquired value Returns the data for the specified inspection item BA 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 370 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Set Inspection Item Data This command sets the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item lt Command Format gt Inspection External reference item number data number Command 2 digits max 4 digits max Set value oT oo
210. Cameras ment region When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table 7 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Increasing Processing Speed for Color Data Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time 7 Changing the measurement region p 102 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item 139 suonoedsu dN Bues Y 4 11 Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item Area Inspection Item This inspection item is used to measure sizes It measures the amount of a color within the measurement region The size is calculated as a number of pixels and it is called the area Sample Settings Sample Measurement Judges according to the i number of pixels area of the Measurement region specified color Specified color OK NG Setup Procedure for Area Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Area so LT Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow bal at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items Ea Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and the color area in the region as reference data for the measurement gt Inspect Inspection Add item Area Settings T
211. Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle LT p 100 Model registration region Measurement region region that is searched for the model Important If the model region is changed perform teaching again 11 r 28 Changing the Measurement Region The region within which the model is searched can be changed In the default settings the whole display is set as the measurement region You can edit the measurement region in the same way as for a search region Changing the Measurement Region O p 102 117 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item suono dsuj dN Bues 174 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result of the 2 No judgement not measured sensitive search 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error CR Correlation Correlation 0 to 100 DV Deviation Density deviation 0 to 221 X Position X This is the X coordinate of the position 999 999 999 9999 to where the model was found 999 999 999 9999 Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 999 99
212. Data with TCP No protocol Communications 355 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 e When Output Format Is ASCII Set the parameters for integer digits decimal digits negative numbers 0 suppression the field separator and the record separator e Output Format Measured value of Measured value of Measured value of data 0 data 1 data 7 OR Note The data output method digits and data separators can be changed as needed Example Integer digits 5 decimal digits 3 negative number expression zero suppressed none field separator comma record separator CR rfl delle bleik I Helteet tles faye lefte Ss Measured value of data 0 Measured value Measured Field separator Measured Delimiter of data 1 _ value of data 2 value of data 7 Field separator Field separator Field separator Record separator 4 Because the record separator is set to CR only one record is output for each measurement A blank line CR delimiter will therefore be entered after the record separator If you do not want a blank line set the record sepa rator to None Note The field separator is not output unless the data continues The following range of values can be output 999 999 999 9999 lt Measured value lt 999 999 999 9999 If the measured value is lower than 999 999 999 9999 then 999 999 999 9999 is output If the measured value is higher than 999 999 9
213. Display Sets the image to update in Run Mode Latest image Last NG image p 201 update mode LCD back Bright Sets the brightness Oto5 System p 202 light ness ECO Enables ON or disables OFF ECO ON OFF System p 202 mode Mode 426 Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence amp Ethernet System p 53 Q Specify sensor You can set any of the Sensors for con 0 0 0 0 to 223 255 255 254 default p 204 j nection to the Touch Finder and register 0 0 0 0 p 205 them IP address setting Sets the method to use to set IP Auto default Fixed DHCP p 53 addresses IP address Inputs the IP address of the Touch a b c d p 53 Finder a 1 to 223 Valid only when the IP address setting b 0 to 255 is set to Fixed c 0 to 255 d 0 to 255 Default 10 5 5 100 Subnet mask Inputs the subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p 53 Valid only when the IP address setting Default 255 255 255 0 is set to Fixed Gateway Sets the default gateway address When 1 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 the IP address setting is set to Fixed Default 10 5 5 7 Search unreachable Displays the IP address if the same IP sensors address is used for more than one Sen sor or if there is Sensor that is not in the subnet You can change this IP address and subnet mask This setting is va
214. ERROR signal will not be output and the error will not be recorded in the error history Follow the instructions that are given in the error message If the following messages appear the hardware may be faulty Contact your OMRON representative e System error e Application system error Please reboot e Failed to startup K Error Messages FQ2 User s Manual 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting Problem The Sensor or Touch Finder will not start Measures to perform Check the power supply capacity to see if it is sufficient Reference The Sensor cannot be detected Check the Ethernet cable to see if it is connected correctly Check the Ethernet settings to see if they are correct between the devices Check if there are any Sensors that were not detected by the Sensor connection check Check the communications cable to see if it is disconnected Check the switching hubs to see if any of them are faulty If switching hubs are used The PC Tool and Touch Finder cannot be connected at the same time If the PC Tool or Touch Finder is already connected to the Sensor dis connect it The results display is not updated Check to see if the TRIG signal is being correctly input to the Sensor p 203 Check to see if the most recent NG result is being displayed p 201 Updating the results display is slow If other devices are connected to the same network as the Sensor dis con
215. Filtering the Images Filter Items These items filter the image by eliminating image noise with filters to make them suitable for measurement Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items These items compensate for offset in the position or orientation of the image You can combine several filter items and position compensation items to adjust the image that was taken You can use a total of up to eight filter and position compensation items combined Flow of Image Adjustment The image that is taken by the Camera called the Camera image is adjusted in the order that the filter and position compensation items are registered Note You can specify the order of image adjustment by registering the items in the desired order but you cannot change the order of the items after you register them Image is taken on TRIG signal The image that is taken by the Camera Camera image Processed 0 Median filter item image Source image Camera image Camera process 0 iinag Processed image 1 Dilate filter item adjustment processes 0 and Source image Previous image Prev 1 Processed image 2 Search Position Compensation position compensation item processes 0 1 Source image Previous image Prev and 2 Measurements are performed with inspection items Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual 68 Note Specify the Camera
216. G Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Edge pitch Acquisition 0 to 999 0 N Logged data only 6 Average pitch Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 R Logged data only 7 Maximum pitch Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 PH Logged data only 8 Minimum pitch Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 PL Logged data only 9 Average width Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 Ww Logged data only 10 Maximum pitch Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 WH Logged data only 11 Minimum pitch Acquisition 0 to 99 999 9999 0 WL Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 462 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 120 Mea Edge color red Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 _ sure sition ment 121 condi Edge color green Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 tions sition 122 Edge color blue Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 127 Edge level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 50 sition 128 Noise level Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 130 Judge Edge pitch up
217. Histories p 398 ss Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Communications Example An example of the communications log when a computer is connected and communications is performed with a no protocol command from a terminal application is shown below Example 1 Changing Scenes Scene number 1 is specified S1 OK Single byte space Example 2 Acquiring inspection item data Acquires the judgement result for a search registered to inspection item 10 ITEMDATA 100 Single byte space 0 OK Example 3 Measurement when Data Output Is Not Set M OK Example 4 Measurement when Data Output Is Set M OK 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 306 0000 M OK 2 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 375 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 376 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outoutting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands Introduction to FINS Commands FINS is a communications command system for a message service that is commonly used on OMRON networks Data can be sent and received and various controls such as changing the operating mode setting resetting bits and file operations can be performed when necessary For details on FINS command specifications the commands that are sent from a CPU Unit and other information refer
218. KES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR SUITABILITY FOR USE THE PRODUCTS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE NOT SAFETY RATED THEY ARE NOT DESIGNED OR RATED FOR ENSURING SAFETY OF PERSONS AND SHOULD NOT BE RELIED UPON AS A SAFETY COMPO NENT OR PROTECTIVE DEVICE FOR SUCH PURPOSES Please refer to separate catalogs for OMRON s safety rated products OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to
219. Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 121 Model Rotation Setting Acqui 0 No rotation 1 Rotation O region sition 122 Rotation angle upper Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 123 Rotation angle lower Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 134 Mea Sub pixel Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 135 condi Candidate level Setting Acqui O to 100 70 tions sition 136 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 137 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment 138 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 139 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 140 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 141 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle siti
220. Net IP FQ2 User s Manual The output data that is assigned is output to the output area as shown below Output data that exceeds the size 256 bytes that is set for the output data size parameter is separated over more than one cycle Offset from first Output data Assigned output data address in output area 0 Output data O Inspection item 0 Position X for Search 1 4 bytes 2 Output data 1 Inspection item 0 Position Y for Search 3 4 bytes 4 Output data 2 Inspection item 1 Position X 1st point for Shape Search II 5 4 bytes 62 Output data 31 Inspection item 1 Position X 30th point for Shape Search II 256 bytes 63 4 bytes Data that is 64 Output data 32 Inspection item 1 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II output the 65 4 bytes first cycle 122 Output data 61 Inspection item 1 Position Y 30th point for Shape Search II 123 4 bytes 124 Output data 62 Inspection item 2 Position X 1st point for Shape Search II 125 4 bytes 126 Output data 63 Inspection item 2 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II 127 4 bytes 0 Output data O Inspection item 2 Position X 2nd point for Shape Search II 1 4 bytes 72 bytes Data that is output 12 Output data 6 Inspection item 2 Position X 10th point for Shape Search II the second 13 4 bytes cycle 1 14 Output data 7 Inspection item 2 Position Y 10th point for Shape S
221. OMRON Smart Camera FQ2 User s Manual OMRON f x 4 FO 0 O Shape Search a gt gt vj Cat No Z326 E1 01A Introduction Thank you for purchasing the FQ2 This manual provides information regarding functions performance and operating methods that are required for using the FQ2 When using the FQ2 be sure to observe the following e The FQ2 must be operated by personnel knowledgeable in electrical engineering e To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly to deepen your understanding of the product e Please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to whenever necessary APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS Please Read Introduction J Installation and Connections a Taking Images 3 Setting Up Inspections 4 Testing and Saving Settings l Operation 6 Convenient Functions Ea Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection 8 Connecting through Ethernet 9 Connecting with RS 232C 0 Troubleshooting a Appendices i Smart Camera FQ2 User s Manual READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS DOCUMENT Please read and understand this document before using the products Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MA
222. ON BUSY signal OFF Start scene change 1 End scene change 1 In Expanded Mode specify scene numbers 0 to 15 using the INO to IN3 signals Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode The scene numbers that can be used depend on the input mode Standard mode default Scene 0 to 31 Expanded mode Scene 0 to 15 Note Specify the scene number with the INO to IN4 signals Standard Mode Turn ON the IN5 signal while the BUSY signal is ON to change the scene to the specified scene The BUSY signal turns ON while the scene is being switched Even in Expanded Mode you can use menu commands or Ethernet no protocol commands to change to scenes 0 to 31 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 247 8 UOND UUOD lleIed e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uogesado BHuljjojuoD 248 Sample Ladder Program This sample program is used to change the scene when the input mode is set to Expanded Mode The scene changes to scene 1 when W0 00 turns ON W0 00 t Scene change bit When the scene change bit W0 00 turns ON the scene number is input to INO to IN3 and IN4 is turned ON W0 00 If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after the scene number is input the trigger to change the scene IN5 is turned ON Scene change bit T0000 IN5 The trigger to change the scene
223. Output Data secere oven eet eee Saeed eee ee ee eee eed 257 Aligning the Data Output Timing with the External Device 262 Changing the Settings of the I O Signals 0 0 00 c eee eae 270 Controlling Operation from an External Device 002000 271 9 Connecting through Ethernet 9 1 INtFOGUCTION eneee nenien wari a ewer a alae tie eee dee 282 FQ2 User s Manual 9 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 283 Introduction to EtherNet IP_ 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 283 FQ2 Communications for EtherNet IP Connections 285 Setting Up EtherNet IP Communications 0 00 cece eee 289 Tag Data Link Setting Methods 0 0 0 ccc ees 292 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 295 Memory Assignments and Commands 000 cece eee eae 300 Timing Chart for EtherNet IP Communications 0 00005 318 Sample Ladder Programming 0 000 e eee eee 323 9 3 PLC Link Connections 2002 eee eee 324 Setting Up PLC Link Communications 0 0 0 0 0c cee eee 327 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 329 Memory Assignments for PLC Link Communications 334 Timing Chart For PLC Link Communications 000000005 347 Sample Ladder Programming 0 000 ccc cece eee ee eee eee 349 9 4 Controlling Operation and
224. Output Global variable Output S_ElPOutput For data links to the command area ElPInput Global variable Input S_EIPInput For data links to the response and output areas 3 Exporting the Variables That Were Defined on Sysmac Studio Export the variables that you defined so that you can use them on the Network Configurator An exported CSV file is created 4 Network Configurator Settings 1 Import to the Network Configurator the CSV file that you exported from the Sysmac Studio The variables that are imported will automatically be registered as tags 2 Set the connections as shown in the following table Originator device PLC settings Target device Sensor settings Input tag set ElPOutput Output tag set Input101 Output tag set EIPInput Input tag set Output100 5 Accessing the Communications Areas from the User Program The defined variables are used to access the communications areas for the Sensor using the following notation e Command Area Signalname o o Vaiabename SoS EXE E1PQutput ControFlag FIO TRIG ElPOutput ControlFlag F 1 ERCLR ElPOutput ControlFlag F 15 DSA ElPOutput ControlFlag F 16 Command code ElPOutput CommandCode Command parameter 1 ElPOutput CommandParam1 Command parameter 2 ElPOutput CommandParam2 Command parameter 3 ElPOutput CommandParam3 306 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual e Response Area
225. Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 0000ee eee 350 Setting Up No protocol Communications 0 0000 eee eee 351 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 352 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications 357 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 2 0005 376 Introduction to FINS Commands 0 000 c eee eee eee 376 Setting Up Communications FINS TCP 0 0 2008 377 List of FINS Commands 000 c cece teens 378 FINS Command Details 0 0 00 0000 c ete ee 379 10 Connecting with RS 232C 10 1 Introduction to RS 232C Connections 200 020000s 392 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 232C No protocol Communications 000005 393 Setting Up No protocol Communications 000 e eee eae 394 Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements 395 Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications 395 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Error HistorieS 000c00cn eevee eevee ee et ee vee eee ee ee 398 11 2 Error Messages 1 0 cece eee eee eee eens 400 11 3 Basic Troubleshooting 200 eee eee eee 401 FQ2 User s Manual 12 Appendices FQ2 User s Manual
226. R2 LT 2 4 wiring p 42 Orange OUT1 ORS5 Outputs the judgement for ORS Light OUT2 OR14 Outputs the judgement for blue OR14 As described above if terminals OUTO to OUT2 are all assigned to individual judgement output signals the BUSY signal and ERROR signal assigned as the default settings will no longer be output FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 241 8 UON UUOD a eseg e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado BuljjosjuoD Timing Chart Output ORO to OR31 signals are held until the next judgement output ON TRIG signal iE ON for 1 ms min OFF l ON BUSY signal ON while measurements are OFF being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Example ORO signal X Turned ON when individual i judgement is NG OR output ON for NG judgement is NG OR output ON for NG Individual judgement t 1 The timing for updating the OR signal is when the measurement results are finalized regardless of the output settings of the BUSY signal BUSY output conditions Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output 1 Press OUTO 2 Press OR2 Item 2 judgement OR2 output signal was assigned to OUTO 3 Assign the others in the following manner OUT1 OR5 OUT2 OR14 Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing The output timing of the OR signal or ORO to OR31 signals can be selected fr
227. SMAC CJ1 CJ1H or CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 CJ1M CJ1W EIP21 SYSMAC CS CS1H CS1D or CS1G CS1W EIP21 a Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Setting Up EtherNet IP Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 53 To use EtherNet IP communications do not automatically assign an IP address to the Vision Sensor Set a specific IP address and do not change it Initial Settings for EtherNet IP Communications gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Data output Link data output 1 Press Communication type 2 Press EtherNet IP 3 Set the EtherNet IP communications parameters as Handshake setting Set to Yes described in the following table C at Ethe Communication cycle 10 D t perind 4ll amp i d FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 289 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 290 Parameter Handshake setting Description Set whether to synchronize with the PLC when data is output No Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the PLC LT Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Disabled p 321 Yes Measurement results are output while syn chronizing with the PLC OJ
228. Select Scene Command Code 0030 1000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents pa 12 to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0011 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Scene number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents nnn eure Sao tors 8 to 11 4107 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 5 m o a a a e or nich ne 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 P e ae a4 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Get Image Adjustment Data Command Code 0040 1010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents Sea 12 to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 5 0000 0000 0000 ogg Om number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents E E 8to11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 5 mo f oo f oroo 0000 ay ceamara coe or win te 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 pap aaa aatet ai 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 000 times the value Set Image Adjustment Data Com
229. Set the connections as shown in the following table Originator device PLC settings Target device Sensor settings Input tag set DO Output tag set Input101 Output tag set D100 Input tag set Output100 FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP oF Example Setting Example for Variables to Access the Command Area Command Area PLC Output Tag DO Variables Used to Access the Command Area in the PLC from the User Program 1 O memory Settings address ig iss wie 4 0 Variable name AT DO ERCLR rere TRIG EXE specification Data type D o o DSA a Assigned to the EXE signal D0 0 BOOL b Assigned to the TRIG signal DO 1 BOOL c Assigned to the ERCLR signal DO 15 BOOL d Assigned to the DSA signal D1 0 BOOL Commands EtherNet IP This section describes the EtherNet IP commands Measurement Control Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00101020 Start Continuous Measure Executes continuous measurements p 309 ments 00101030 End Continuous Measure Ends continuous measurements p 310 ments Utility Commands Command code in Command name Function Reference command area hex 00102010 Clear Measurement Values Clears all measurement result values p 310 00102020 Clear Data Output Buffer Clears all data in the data output buffer p 31
230. Sets the angle range for the registered No default Yes Scene p 99 Slalale model ee g Angle range 180 to 180 Scene p 99 a AE 3 no S Sub pixel You can increase the accuracy of mea No default Yes Scene p 97 2 surement positioning S a o o Extraction Scene g condition amp Candidate Sets the detection target to only objects 0 to 100 default 60 Scene p 98 F level with a correlation above the specified 9 candidate level Extraction Results are output only for objects with a 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene X measured X coordinate that is within this range Extraction Results are output only for objects with a 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 Scene Ve measured Y coordinate that is within this range Detection Sets the maximum number of detection 1 to 32 Scene count results to output Multi point Sets whether to output only the result OFF default or ON Scene p 98 output with the highest correlation or to output all results that meet the specified extrac tion conditions Sorting Sets the sort condition to use when mul Corr ascending order Corr descending Scene p 97 method tiple measurement results meet the order default Pos X ascending order extraction conditions Pos X descending order Pos Y ascend ing order Pos Y descending order S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the None Yes default Scene p 98 2 ment results of an inspection
231. Settings L Section 8 Controlling Operation and In Out Tab Page Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection Testing Test Tab Page Section 9 Connecting through Ethernet Section 10 Connecting with RS 232C Test Measurement and Results Verification Ajotiaivkera Ail es Section 5 Testing and Saving Parameters Settings Saving the Settings Operation Starting Operation Run Mode Section 6 Operation 1 In Setup Mode the Sensor can be set up and adjusted but it does not output signals on the I O lines 2 In Run Mode the Sensor performs measurements and outputs signals on the I O lines Basic Operational Flow FQ2 User s Manual Installation and Connections 2 1 System Configuration 0 0 c ee ee eee 26 2 2 Part Names and Functions 00 e eee eee eee eee eee 29 2 3 Installation 2 0 cee eee eee 33 2 4 WING ove seo ecee okie es Oe Oo eke Bee ea tae Eee 42 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet 0 c eee eee eee 53 26 2 1 System Configuration Ethernet EtherNet IP No protocol or PLC Link Connection Setup Tool Control PLC Touch Finder or PC Tool industrial EtherNet IP or Ethernet Switching Hub Standard Ethernet cable FQ2 S000000 000 Standard a Ethernet cable 24 V power supply Special Ethernet Cable RJ45 M12 1 0 cable Parallel Interface Connection Connection throu
232. Specify the gravity Y position to judge as Range 999 999 999 9999 to Scene a label 999 999 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Sorting Set the condition to use for label number Area ascending order Area descending Scene p 151 method reassignment order default Pos X ascending order Pos X descending order Pos Y ascend ing order Pos Y descending order Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 152 Output parameter judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 413 z L seoipueddy Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence amp S 2 Expression 0 Sets the number of the expression for Scene p 157 w E to expression which to set a calculation EESE LIN o x Oo wi Expression Sets the expressions Scene settings Data Uses the measurement result of other Inspection item calculation symbols Scene p 162 items TJG Const Inputs constants or mathematical opera 0 to 9 calculation symbol Scene p 157 tors TJG Math Uses functions in expressions SIN COS ATAN AND OR NOT ABS Scene p 159 MAX MIN MOD SQRT ANGL angle of straight line joining two points center of gravity and model center DIST
233. TED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this document is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the product may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user
234. The measurement results are written to the output area if data output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 329 S PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Start Continuous Measurements Command Code 1020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 area 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents Fe ees ators 8 to 11 4to7 Oto3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Note The measurement results are written to the output area if data output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 329 End Continuous Measurements Command Code 1030 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents commana 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 area 2 0001 0000 0011 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents eee eo tans 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0011 0000
235. Use Observe the following precautions to prevent failure to operate malfunctions or undesirable effects on product performance 1 Installation Site Do not install this product in locations subjected to the following conditions e Ambient temperature outside the rating e Rapid temperature fluctuations causing condensation e Relative humidity outside the range of 35 to 85 e Direct vibration or shock e Strong ambient light such as other laser beams light from arc welding machines or ultraviolet light e Direct sunlight or near heaters e Strong magnetic or electric field Also do not install this product in locations subjected to the following conditions to ensure its protective performance as described in the specifications e Presence of corrosive or flammable gases e Presence of dust salt or iron particles e Water oil or chemical fumes or spray or mist atmospheres Installing and Using a Sensor with Built in Lighting e The front panel plate may occasionally become fogged from the inside if the Sensor is used in location with high humidity and the temperature changes drastically e Do not install any objects except for the special mounting brackets within the dotted lines in the following figure The front panel plate may become fogged from the inside poses r E E Water proof Sheet l 25mm l i 25mm 1 1 1 1 i l D 125 mm f om 2
236. Use the following procedure to set the conditions for the measurement data image data and statistical data that will be logged Some of these operations and settings are the same as for file logging LT Setting Logging Conditions p 209 Item Statistical data Description Statistical data such as the number of measurements the number of NG overall judgements and the NG rate since the power supply was turned ON will be logged e ON Statistical data will be displayed default OFF Statistical data will not be displayed Logging image image data Logging data measurement data These are the same as for file logging The logging parameters for image data and measurement data are the same as those for file logging Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 User s Manual Selecting the Measurement Data To Log With recent results logging you can select what measurement data to log These settings also apply to file logging OJ Selecting the Measurement Data To Log p 210 Starting Logging Logging will be started as soon as the conditions for logging have been set If the settings are saved logging will start automatically the next time the power supply is turned ON Checking the Results of Logging The results of logging can be checked using the trend monitors histograms or statistical data LT p 182 Use the following menu command to check the image data p R Setup Mod
237. a measurement results Only NG Only measurement data Measured values and calculation results for which the overall judgement was NG will be logged None No measurement data Measured values and calculation results will be logged default Note The logging parameter settings are the same for recent results logging Selecting the Measurement Data To Log Use the following procedure to select the measurement data to log p gt In Out Log setting Measurement data Select data 1 Press the inspection item or expression that has the parameter for which to log data ch 11 Edge Position 12 Edge Width 13 Color Data 2 Press the parameter for which to log data to select it Logging uppe nt values to Note The procedure to select the measurement data to log is the same for recent results logging 210 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 User s Manual Storage Locations and File Names for Logged File Data Data Image logging image data Storage location sensor_name ee LOGIMAGE number t 2 File name img_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS IFz Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 img_2012_05_10 22_10_21 IFZ Data logging mea surement data sensor_name LOGDATA 2 File name_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS CSV 4 Example The following name would be used for measurements perfo
238. a Connection Properties General Advanced Connect using E Intel R 82566DM 2 Gigabit Network This connection uses the following items M 8 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M JE QoS Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol TCP IP lt i E Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 5 Select the Use the following IP address Option and en ter the following IP address and subnet mask i IP address 10 5 5 101 You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 thia copa Cth Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General 6 Click the OK Button This completes the settings ee IP address 10 5 5 101 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Cancel Connections on Existing Networks Set the Ethernet settings of the Sensors and the computer PC Tool to the same settings as the existing network Refer to Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder on page 53 for the IP address settings in the Sensors Note
239. a logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion XO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion YO 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion X1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion Y1 318 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge mid sition 1 Data logging ON point position X 319 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge mid sition 1 Data logging ON point position Y 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y display sition 702 Detected edge mid Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 point position X display sition 703 Detected edge mid Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 point position Y display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 XO display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0
240. a range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for edge pitch sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for average pitch sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for maximum pitch sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for minimum pitch sition 1 Data logging ON 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for average width sition 1 Data logging ON 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for maximum width sition 1 Data logging ON 318 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for minimum width sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Edge pitch display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 701 Average pitch display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 702 Pitch display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Average width display
241. a setup 60 display settings 143 149 capturing image 224 display types 182 changing from BUSY indicator 231 displaying image data 228 changing line process using scenes 190 DSA 45 checking the error histories 399 clearing the error histories 399 E C mount cover 30 ECO mode ae gt edge level 122 C mount lens mounting surface 30 Edge pitch 133 color dge pitch 131 setting 124 142 148 i a pi i 456 color data 136 eager eeren 506 Index FQ2 User s Manual Edge position comp edge position compensation edge position compensation edge rotation position compensation edge width Edge width edge in width Enhance edges Erosion ERROR error histories error history deleting errors in error history viewing error messages ERROR signal errors clearing errors in teaching labeling errors stored in the error history Ethernet Ethernet cable connector Ethernet no protocol commands Ethernet port Touch Finder external lighting external trigger Extract Edges Extract Horiz Edges Extract vertical edges field separator file format files logging filter items FINS commands FINS TCP no protocol commands focus adjustment screw formatting an SD Card FQ Ethernet Cable frame ground frozen images G average Gain GATE Graphics Graphics Details Gravity center X Gravity center Y Gravity X Gravity Y GUI language FQ2 User s Manual 74 80 85 127 128 69 69 45 47 398 399 398 399 400 251 246 1
242. ab Page 1 Press Teach Drag the rectangle Drag a corner to 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure vet size the rectangle ment reference in front of the camera Move the rectangle to the location to be measured A Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed Areas with the extracted color will be automatically detected Information on the color that has the largest area in the measure ment region is extracted and registered The color information is extracted only the first time The extracted color information will not change from the second time on To specify a desired color refer to Extraction Is Automatically Performed for an Undesired Color When Teaching p 142 6 Press Back to end teaching LT Changing the measurement region p 102 The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Extract color This is the color for which to measure the area The color occupying the larg est area will be automatically registered BA Setting Colors Manually p 142 Reference area The area to use as a reference is set automatically Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters P Inspect Inspection Add item Area Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Press the parameters and set the
243. acteristic pattern An image pattern is recognized to detect and correct the position LT Shape Search Position Compensation p 77 There is a characteristic pattern The measure ment object is at an angle The positions of two edges are detected and the angle of the line that connects those positions is used to correct the position BA Edge Rotation Position Compensation p 85 There is no characteristic pattern Applying the Results of Position Compensation You can apply the results of position compensation either to the Camera image or to the previous image from before position compensation was applied If you apply the results of position compensation to the Camera image only the position information from position compensation is applied to the image to be measured LT using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items p 76 FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken is 76 e Setting the Image for Position Compensation You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing You can set the image for position compensation for each position compensation item p gt Image Image adjustment Position compensation item name Modify 1 Press Details Scroll parameter 2 Set the source image to Camera or Prev Parameter Setting Description Source image Camera camera The results of processing the position co
244. after the specified output time has elapsed Data Output Timing Output Sequence If both parallel judgement output and parallel data output are performed at the same time parallel judgement output will be performed first followed by parallel data output Example Parallel Judgement Output of DO to D15 and Parallel Data Output of Data 0 DO Parallel judgement Parallel data output output DO data 0 D1 Parallel judgement Parallel data output output D1 data 0 D15 Parallel judgement Parallel data output output D15 data 0 Timing Chart The following timing chart shows the data output timing for parallel judgement outputs GATE signal ON delay Output time opp Mw Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min OFF The FQ2 starts measurements when it detects the rising edge ON OFF to ON transition of the TRIG signal BUSY signal Measurements executed OFF a OR signal XK Overall judgement gt Parallel D signals XK n E DO to D15 i ON GATE Output period FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 26 8 UOND UUOD a eseg e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado BuljjojuoD 262 Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is ready to take measurement and it is in Run Mode The RUN signal is OFF in Setup Mode Change to Run Mode for o
245. ag set I O memory addresses or variable names I O memory addresses or variable names names Data size 20 bytes 48 to 272 bytes total size of response area and output area 1 Specify the I O memory address of the first word in the response area The output area is assigned immediately after the response area If you specify a variable name the variable is assigned for both the response area and output area Refer to Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ series Controllers on p 304 for information on how to access the sig nals in the communications areas from the user program when variables are assigned Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Settings in the FQ2 Device Parameter Settings 1 Right click the FQ2 in the network on the Network Configurator and select Parameter Edit 2 The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Make the required settings Edit Device Parameters o Parameters Parameter Name All parameters 0001 Input Size 0002 Output Size 0003 RPI Reset Default Setup Expand All Collapse All Parameter name Value Setting range 001 Input Size The total size of response area and output 48 to 272 area 002 Output Size The data size of command area 20 003 RPI The requested packet interval 10000 Although the data size can be set as high as 502 bytes with the curren
246. als that are displayed in red are 2 Press the OK Button to return to the Communica CUrrently being input from the tion check Display external devices to the Sensor 1 0 monitor Output Signals OUTO OUT1 and OUT2 Signals that are displayed in red are currently being output from the Sensor to the external devices You can turn the signals ON and OFF by pressing them to test the outputs Note When the Sensor Data Unit is connected the I O status of the following signals are displayed FQ SDU1L TRIG DSA RST INO to IN7 RUN OR BUSY ERR STG SHT ACK GATE and DO to D15 FQ SDU2 TRIG RST INO to IN5 RUN OR BUSY ERR STG SHT and ACK FQ2 User s Manual Monitoring the Signal I O Status 203 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor You can connect up to eight Sensors to one Touch Finder or computer This sections describes how to connect more than one Sensor to a Touch Finder or computer Setting the Sensors to Connect Use the following setting to connect more than one Sensor to a Touch Finder Automatically Connecting Sensors The Touch Finder can detect Sensors and automatically connect to them in the order that it detects them The Touch Finder can detect up to 32 Sensors and it can connect to up to eight Sensors at the same time Set this parameter to OFF to connect to only a specific Sensor p gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF
247. alue default The measured coordinates are output as absolute values Relative value The difference from the reference value is output 121 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item 122 Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Position Details Tab Page Output parameter Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only You can change the following measurement conditions for Sensors with Monochrome Cameras p gt Inspect Inspection Edge Position Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter Item Parameter Description Density change Light to Dark Detects as an edge any position within the specified region that changes from white to black Dark to Light Detects as an edge any position within the specified region that changes from black to white Measurement methods Projection A projection is formed based on the gray level and any position of intersection between the gray level value and the threshold edge level is detected as an edge This detection method is used when you must process an image with exces sive noise or when the edges are blurry Differentiation A differentiated waveform is created that represents the amount of change in gray level
248. anas iba 126 4 8 Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item 127 Edge Width Inspection Item 00 00 127 Setup Procedure for Edge Width Inspection Item 005 127 Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only 0000 e eee eee 129 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 0 0 ec eee 129 Unstable Edge Width Results Sensors with Color Cameras 129 Increasing Edge Width Processing Speed 00000 e eee eee 129 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 129 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Width 130 EMOS ei sine and KEE A ee MAR Ae ee ae ek ed 130 11 4 9 Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item 131 Edge Pitch Inspection Item 0 20 20 0000 cece eee 131 Setup Procedure for Edge Width Inspection Item 005 131 Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only 0000 e eee eee 133 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 00 eee 133 Unstable Edge Pitch Results Sensors with Color Cameras Only 133 Increasing Edge Pitch Processing Speed 0000 cee eee eee 133 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 134 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Pitch 134 EMOS sssccc eee etda eee end ch Ea wah ene Reeds aes erates 1
249. and code 32 3 bits 4 Parameter 1 Parameter integer 5 6 Parameter 2 Spare inte ger 7 8 Parameter 3 Spare inte ger 9 Signal Signal name Function Application EXE Control Command Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a control Command Execution Bit command for the Vision Sensor to execute response commu icati Turn OFF the EXE signal from the PLC when the 0 S Control Command Completed FLG signal from the Vision Sensor turns ON Set the control command code and parameters before you turn ON this sig nal DSA Data Output Request Turn ON this signal from the PLC to request data Data output after Bit output When this signal turns ON the Vision Sen measurements sor outputs data Turn OFF the DSA signal from the PLC when the Data Output Completed GATE signal from the Vision Sensor turns ON ERRCLR Clear Error Turn ON this signal to turn OFF the error ERR sig Command nal from the Vision Sensor Response Commu Turn OFF this signal from PLC when the error ERR tons signal goes OFF Command code Command code This I O port stores the command code Command Response Commu Parameters 1 to Command parameters These I O ports store the command parameters ein i 3 oe PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Response Area Vision Sensor Slave to PLC Master First Bits Contents word 15
250. ange Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation Ambient atmosphere No corrosive gas Vibration resistance destruction 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions 8 min each 10 times Shock resistance destruction 150 m s 3 times each in 6 direction up down right left forward and backward Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20 Weight Approx 270 g without Battery and hand strap Dimensions 95 x 85 x 32 5 mm Materials Case ABS Accessories Touch Pen FQ XT Instruction Manual i This is a guideline for the time required for the brightness to diminish to half the initial brightness at room temperature and humidity No guarantee is implied The life of the backlight is greatly affected by the ambient temperature and humidity It will be shorter at lower or higher temperatures 2 This value is only a guideline No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by operating conditions 3 This value is only a guideline No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions e Battery Specifications Item FQ BAT1 Battery type Secondary lithium ion battery Nominal capacity 1 800 mAh Rated voltage 3 7V Dimensions 35 3 x 53 1 x 11 4 mm Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 40 C Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensat
251. anual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Select Sets a registered calibration pattern Calibration data 0 to 31 Scene E 2 Modify Used to edit calibration data Calibration data 0 to 31 Scene 2 Specify point Sets the type of calibration data to set p 194 g Reference p 196 Parameter p 198 Modify Sets the parameters for the calibration g data zZ g Sets the Camera coordinates Calibra p 194 a g g tion data 2 Oo a 2 u 2 oO D Q N Sets the Camera coordinates and the Point coordinate 0 to 9999 Calibra 8 actual coordinates Actual coordinate 0 to 99999 9999 tion data Oo 5 xt E Used to edit the model regions Calibra p 197 gt The procedure is the same as for setting tion data gt the model region for a Search inspection D 3 item 8 Z Changes the size and position of the Calibra T measurement region tion data x 2 a N amp Sets the Camera coordinates and the Point coordinate 0 to 9999 Calibra 8 actual coordinates Actual coordinate 0 to 99999 9999 tion data Oo 2 xt Coordi Sets the positive direction when specify Righthand Lefthand default Calibra p 198 a nate ing coordinates tion data Origin Select the location of the origin of the Lowerleft Upperleft default or Center Calibra 3 coordi
252. anual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Add filter These commands are used to add mod Color Gray Filter Weak Smoothing Scene p 70 E ify delete copy or change the name of Strong Smoothing Dilate Erosion 2 filter items and position compensation Median Extract Edges Extract T items Horiz Edges Extract vertical edges o Enhance edges Background Sup ie pression Add pos comp Model Shape Sear pos comp Search Scene p 74 position comp Edge Edge position comp 2Edge position Scene p 74 comp 2ed midp comp Edge rot pos Comp Modify p 70 Delete p 70 Copy p 70 Rename 15 alphanumeric characters p 70 A A Filter type You can specify the ranges of colors to RGB default HSV Scene p 71 f which the Color Gray Filter item is E gt applied 2 Filter settings Select the type of color filter to use Custom filter HSV Scene p 71 R Source image You must set the image to which the filter Camera Prev default Scene p 70 2 is to be applied Filter region You can specify the region to which to Scene p 71 apply the filter Source image You must set the image to which the filter Camera Prev default Scene p 70 is to be applied Suppression level The range in which to enhance the con Scene p 72 for Background Suppression Item Only Items other than Color Gr
253. as for the Touch Finder by installing the PC Tool for FQ Computer 1 OJ System Configuration p 26 Note Only the data for the Sensor that is currently being displayed will be logged even if more than one Sensor is con nected If multiple sensors are displayed or if the most recent NG sensor is displayed only the results of the sensor that was displayed before changing to the other sensor monitor screen will continue to be logged Simultaneous logging of the results of multiple sensors is not possible Setting Logging Conditions Use the following procedures to set the conditions to log data p gt In Out Log setting e Image Data 1 Press Image logging 2 Change the logging conditions and then press Back Imge lugging t the kind OF image max 20 k i FQ2 User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 209 suoyouny ju ju auoo J e Measurement Data 1 Press Data logging Condition 2 Change the logging conditions and then press ee Back c kind OF dato max 1000 liniy NB Item Description Image logging image data All All images will be logged regardless of the measurement results Only NG Only images for which the overall judgement was NG will be logged e None No images will be logged default Data logging measurement All All measurement data Measured values and calculation results will be logged regardless of the dat
254. ason if the object is at an angle the correlation is reduced and the image may be judged as NG To achieve an OK judgement for the same image pattern even when the object is at an angle the rotation range must be widened p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter 1 Set Rotation to Yes 2 Press Angle range and set the following range Parameter Setting Description Angle range Range 180 to 180 A search is performed within the set angle range Default Lower limit 180 The larger the angle range the longer the processing time Upper limit 180 If you change the angle range perform teaching again LT p 96 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Low Contrast Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast of the mark OJ Adjust the brightness p 61 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Variations in the Measurement Object Inconsistent portions can be masked so that they are omitted from matching OJ Model masking p 101 Increasing Processing Speed The following two methods can be used to reduce processing time e Reduce the range in which a search is performed for the model O Changing the measurement region p 102 e Reduce the angle range setting Adjust the Angle range parameter to reduce the range in which a search for the model is performed 01 Setting the angle range p 99 99 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the S
255. asurement object has changed from the specified color set the color again and try teaching again e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected adjust the Noise level on the Details Tab Page and try teaching again If an edge is not detected when teaching 0 will be registered as the reference width If the result is OKed when there is not edge set the judgement parameters for a reference position of 0 Edge Not Found The measured edge width will be 0 Perform the following e If a color was specified make sure the color of the measurement object has not changed from the specified color e Set the color again if necessary e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected make sure the Edge level parameter on the Details Tab Page is correct LI Edge level p 122 Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual 4 9 Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item Edge Pitch Inspection Item This inspection item is used to detect edges through changes in brightness within a region Edges of the specified color in one measurement area are found and the number objects object width and pitch are output Sample Settings Sample Measurement i Target color Dark Number distance between center points of objects Setup Procedure for Edge Width Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item suonoadsu dN Bues 174 p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item numb
256. asurement position Y for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Angle Range 180 to 180 Adjust the upper and lower limits of angle for an OK judgement Defaults Lower limit 180 Upper limit 180 Count Range 0 to 32 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the detection count for an OK Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 32 judgement Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Note You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result type on the right of the display Absolute value default The measured coordinates are output Relative value The difference from the reference position is output as coordinates Obtaining Multiple Results Simultaneously You can detect all items that satisfy the extraction conditions Judgement is performed for all detected results p gt Inspect Inspection Shape Search II Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Sorting method and select the conditions by which to sort the detected results You can output the results in the sort order that you se lected Note You can specify the actual output conditions and count for output ting multiple results inal ae tance LT Selecting the results to output p 98 Selection item Setting Description Sor
257. ation value ment 1 Descending order of cor condition relation value 2 Ascending order of posi tion X 3 Descending order of position X 4 Ascending order of posi tion Y 5 Descending order of position Y 138 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 100 Adjust judge ment for correlation sition ment condi 139 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 140 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 32 32 Adjust judge for detection count sition ment 141 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui O to 32 0 Adjust judge for detection count sition ment 142 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment 143 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment 144 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 145 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 146 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 _ Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 147 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 152 Mea Extraction
258. ations signal is OFF You can also perform measurements with the measurement trigger input TRIG signal in parallel I O and use PLC Link communications to output data Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled Execution Data Output condition Completed GATE H Data Output Completed GATE Data Output Request Bit DSA RSET Data Output Request Bit DSA FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 349 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 9 4 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications You can use no protocol communications between an external device such as a PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control from the external device via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications methods simultaneously Command Response Communications With no protocol communications the external device sends a control command to the Vision Sensor and receives a response back from the Vision Sensor This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single measurements or change the scene External device Vision Sensor g Command gt Changing the scene number Executing one measurement etc q w e Response OK etc The external device sends a c
259. ault or TCP client System p 328 mode Refreshing task Set the communications cycle for cyclic 4 to 10 000 ms default 10 ms System p 290 period tag data link communications for the Vision Sensor Timeout Sets the timeout time when handshaking 0 1 to 120 0 s default 10 s System p 291 is enabled Data output Set the period for outputting measure 2 to 5 000 ms default 40 ms System p 291 period ment results This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No GATE signal ON Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms default 20 0 ms System p 291 period This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No Initialize Initializes the Sensor settings and saved p 229 data Restart Restarts the Sensor Update Updates the Sensor system to the most p 491 recent data FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 425 z L seoipueddy Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence amp Information Used to check the Touch Finder informa System p 230 tion 2 L u Model Used to check the Touch Finder model Version Used to check the software version of p 230 the Touch Finder MAC address Used to check the MAC address of the Touch Finder Memory state Used to che
260. ave the data in Setup Mode by using Display Arrangement Log Image Button 227 FQ2 User s Manual Convenient Functions for Setup suoyouny jua ju auoo J Displaying Image Data e Images Saved in Internal Sensor Memory p gt O Setup Mode EEJ Log e Image Files in a SD Card p gt R Setup Mode Logging image file or Camera image file 0 Arranging the Display Displaying a Saved Image p 201 22 A E Convenient Functions for Setup FQ2 User s Manual 7 11Functions Related to the System This section describes system settings Turning OFF the Integrated Sensor Lighting Only Sensors with Built in Lighting The internal light can be turned OFF to use external illumination p gt Image Camera setup lt lt Lighting control Press OFF Switching the Display Language Any of the following languages can be selected for display on the Touch Panel or PC Tool Japanese English German French Italian Spanish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese or Korean p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Language Press the language to be displayed Setting the Time on the Touch Finder You can set the date and time p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Time settings Initializing the Sensor and Touch Finder e Initializing the Sensor p gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Initialize e Initializing the Touch Finder p gt Setup Mode or Run M
261. ay Filter FQ2 User s Manual trast and the brightness range to extract are set for the Background Suppression item Menu Tables 405 z L seoipueddy 406 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence B lt 5 25 Model region Used to specify the region of the image Scene DlA 3 to register as the model with a combina ne Add tion of figures Rectangle Ellipse Wide circle or Scene 2 zg Polygon w Zis N c o 5 2 Delete Scene 5 5 Copy Scene 5 EE Z one Con Scene O O s sole O co a Qo me OR OR default or NOT Scene fa ie NOT lt 3 S One All One or All Scene o g T Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene g oe surement region g Detection You can specify which part of the model Scene point to detect as coordinates during inspec tions 5 Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene 5 surement region changes the measure S ment direction etc a Color ON Sets whether to specify an edge color ON or OFF default Scene o OFF 5 Set color Specifies the color of the image for edge R 0 to 255 Scene amp detection i e the border between the B 0 to 255 g measurement object and background G 0 to 255 ne E Color Displays a palette for color specification palette
262. ayer linked object Re 503 FQ2 User s Manual Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 5 Get Interface Configuration STRUCT of TCP IP network interface set tings IP Address UDINT IP address of the device Network Mask UDINT Network mask of the device Gateway Address UDINT Default gateway address Name Server UDINT Primary name server Name Server 2 UDINT Secondary name server Domain Name STRING Default domain name 6 Get Host Name STRING Host name Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All No Yes 02 hex Set_Attribute_All No Yes OE hex Get_Attribute_Single No Yes 10 hex Set_Attribute_Single No Yes 1 5 F6h Ethernet Link Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Revision UINT Revision of the object 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Num Instance UINT Number of ports for which 1 instances are created Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT Interface baud rate 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD Interface Status Flag 3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 MAC layer address USINTs Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All No Yes OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes 504 De
263. be considered as noise eras Only If the difference between the maximum and minimum color changes in the Range 0 to 422 region is below the noise level it will be assumed that there is no edge Default 5 Increase this value if noise is incorrectly detected as an edge Sensors with Mono Important chrome Cameras only 7 i Range 0 to 255 If you change the noise level perform teaching again Default 128 Note Noise threshold The maximum and minimum color deviations and densities within the edge detection region are determined If the difference is less than the noise threshold it is assumed that there are no edges Normally there is no problem with the default value of 10 but if noise is mistakenly detected as an edge make this value higher e Sensors with Color Camera Within the Region Max color change Min color change lt Noise threshold No edge found gt Measurement result NG Max color change Min color change Noise threshold gt Edge found Perform measurement e Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Max density change Min density change lt Noise threshold gt No edge found Measurement result NG Max density change Min density change Noise threshold Edge found Perform measurement 72s Max color deviations Max color deviations 7 7 ea 1 iti ind f ith L Measurement and densities 60 and densities 25 i P E reqion AJ or
264. beassuesterasccusataneeas 193 7 3 Display FUNCtONS eaii Giese cite deed ind deaths 200 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O Status cc cecsseseesseeeeeseneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeees 203 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensot cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 204 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data ccccssessseeseeeees 208 7 7 Saving Sensor Settings cccscececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeaes 218 7 8 SD Card Operations i seeria rnanera anana enbas anaia 220 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation cceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 223 7 10 Convenient Functions for Setup ccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 227 7 11 Functions Related to the System cccceseessenreeeeeeseeeesseenentenees 229 Suoyouny ju ju auoo J 190 7 4 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process What Are Scenes With an FQ2 Vision Sensor the inspection items that can be processed at the same time are registered as scenes A command input from an external device or a touch panel operation can be used to select a certain scene If a scene is registered for each type of measurement object or inspection the line process can be changed simply by changing the scene when the measurement object or inspection changes Example Cap color Inspection item 0 Color Data Label detection These can be registered as ff Inspection item 1 Search one scene TEA N Text alignm
265. below Press OK Press Back aA UNa e Detailed Settings for Edge Position Compensation The settings for the Edge Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item Make the settings for teaching and the judgement conditions in the same way as for the Edge Position inspection item 0 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item p 120 However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Edge position comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 77 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not meas
266. bels sition 603 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 1 to 100 0 for number of labels sition 612 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 999 999 999 9999 999 999 for label area sition 999 999 9 613 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 for label area sition 622 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 999 999 999 9999 999 999 for area sition 999 999 9 623 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 999 999 999 9999 0 for area sition 632 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 for gravity X sition 999 633 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 for gravity X sition 99 999 9 999 642 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 _ for gravity Y sition 999 643 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 for gravity Y sition 99 999 9 999 652 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 for master angle sition 653 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 for master angle sition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data reference sition sion text Judgement number string parameter 700 Display Numbe
267. bytes 160 161 Output data 80 4 bytes Inspection item 2 Position X 10th point for Shape Search II 162 163 Output data 81 4 bytes Inspection item 2 Position Y 10th point for Shape Search II Setting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Seteithera floating point decimal or a fixed decimal for the output form 256 bytes This data is output 72 bytes The data that exceeds the set upper limit is discarded Item Output form FQ2 User s Manual Description Set the output form for numerical data Setting range Floating point or fixed point default fixed point PLC Link Connections 333 jeusey y yBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Memory Assignments for PLC Link Communications This section describes the assignments for the Command Response and Data Output Areas Command Area PLC Master to Vision Sensor Slave First Bits Contents word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 y 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERRCLR Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv EXE Control sig nals 32 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv DSA bits 2 Command code Comm
268. can omit data 2 to data 5 jeusey y yBnosy Bunosuuog 6 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor 353 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications Expression Setting Example This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item 0 Search Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY Multi point output setting Multi point output Check Box selected Count 4 LPR O 10 C 10 X 10 Y 10 SX 10 SY Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number Output Results The data for 16 items 64 bytes is output in the following order for the expression that is registered for data 0 Output order Assigned data 1 10 X 0 Position X 1st point 10 Y 0 Position Y 1st point 10 SX 0 Reference SX 1st point 10 SY 0 Reference SY 1st point 10 X 1 Position X 2nd point 10 Y 1 Position Y 2nd point 10 SX 1 Reference SX 2nd point 10 SY 1 Reference SY 2nd point Oo CO NI OD oO BB WwW NY 10 X 2 Position X 3rd point 10 10 Y 2 Position Y 3rd point 11 10 SX 2 Reference SX 3rd point 12 10 SY 2 Reference SY 3rd point 183 10 X 3 Position X 4th point 14 10 Y 3 Position Y 4th point 15 1
269. ccording to the trigger O z 9 5 The image is measured to see if it matches the configured settings e You can also perform calculations based on the measurement results from inspection items The overall judgement of all inspection items are output using OR logic You can output detailed measurement result from the inspection items e Measurement data and image data can be logged in memory in the Sensor or in an SD card FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Process 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements Startup Display 1 The Sensor is automatically detected by the Touch Finder when power supply to the Sensor and Touch Finder is turned ON The Auto Connect Display will appear if the Sensor can not be detected Check that cables are connected cor rectly to the Sensor and Touch Finder and then press Auto connect Note If the Sensor is still not detected after pressing Auto Connect refer to the following information LT The Sensor cannot be detected p 401 2 When the Sensor is detected the following display will appear e The Setup Mode will appear if a Sensor that has not been set up is connected e The Run Mode will appear if a Sensor that has been set up is connected fi Seareh Note When the Touch Finder is started IP addresses are automatically set for each Sensor To allocate specific IP addresses set the IP address of each Sensor and the Touch F
270. ce string parameter number 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 190 Edge angle upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sition ment 191 Edge angle lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sition ment 192 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 360 to 360 360 Adjust judge sation upper limit sition ment 193 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 360 to 360 360 Adjust judge sation lower limit sition ment 310 L
271. ch BA Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow bul at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item 2 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 96 Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and partial image as reference data for the measurement p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Search Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag a corner to Drag the rectangle size the rectangle 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure Move it ment reference in front of the camera Node l region Move the rectangle to the location to be measured A Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Model image This is the partial image that is stored as the reference Reference position X These are coordinates of the model image that are stored as reference Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Search Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement If more than one result was detected you can switch to a display for each result 2 Press each
272. change as given below in respect to the standard parallel communications of the Sensor Output Signals You can use the ACK signal in the parallel outputs Refer to the following section for the specifications of the ACK signal O 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit p 256 Introduction to RS 232C Connections FQ2 User s Manual 10 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with RS 2320 No protocol Communications If you connect an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to the Vision Sensor you can use no protocol communications between an external device such as a PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control from the external device via command response communications or to output data after measurements You can use these communications methods simultaneously Command Response Communications With no protocol communications the external device sends a control command to the Vision Sensor and receives a response back from the Vision Sensor This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single measurements or change the scene External device Sensor Data Unit Vision Sensor Command gt Changing the scene number Executing one measurement etc lt _ Response OK etc The external device sends a command as an ASCII string
273. ck the Touch Finder memory p 230 g state Error history View his Displays a history of errors that have System p 399 tory occurred in the Touch Finder Delete Deletes the error history history Battery level Used to check the battery level p 230 w 2 File name prefix You can set a character string to add to p 211 E the beginning of the fil for logged alg e beginning of the file name for logge bis data 2 E D D D fe j 2 File name prefix i Output format Used to set the output format for output p 212 D log data to a file 5 Field sep None Comma default Tab Space ep arator Colon Semicolon CR or CR LF Decimal None Point default or Comma symbol Record None Comma Tab Space Colon separator Semicolon CR or CR LF default SD card SD card Displays the capacity and remaining p 222 informa memory in the SD card tion Format Formats an SD card p 222 Startup dis Startup You can select the display to appear on Multi Sensor NG sensor Single sensor p 206 play screen the Touch Finder when more than one Auto default type Sensor is connected Specify You can specify one Sensor to connect ON OFF default p 225 sensor to the Touch Finder Display Sets the display to use in Run Mode Graphic Graphics Details All results System p 183 pattern Region Statistical data Trend monitor p 225 Histogram
274. clouse Class 1 Class 1M Class 2 Class2M Class 3R Class 3B Class 4 Description of Safe under As for Class Low power As for Class Direct intra Direct intra High power hazard class reasonably 1 except may eye protec 2 except may beam view beam view diffuse reflec foreseeable behazardous tion normally be more haz ing may be ing normally tions may be conditions if user afforded by ardous if user hazardous hazardous hazardous employs aversion employs optics responses optics Protective housing Required for each laser product limits access products necessary for performance of functions of the Safety interlock in pro tective housing Designed to prevent removal of the panel until accessible emission values are below that for Class 3R Designed to prevent removal of the panel until accessible emission values are below that for Class 3B Remote control Not required Permits easy addition of external interlock in laser installation Key control Not required Laser inoperative when key is removed Emission warning device Not required Give audible or visible warning when laser is switched on or if capacitor bank of pulsed laser is being charged For Class 3R only applies invisible radiation is emitted Attenuator Not required Give means beside the On Off switch to temporarily block beam Location controls Not required Controls so loca
275. code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG External Teaching Command Code 4020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0100 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FEFFFFFF NG Reset Vision Sensor Command Code F010 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 1111 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC There is no response for a reset operation FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections EJ yeusau y yBnosu Buyoauu0D 6 Get Scene Number Command Code 1000 0020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command area TOMS 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents pe Pere 2 Moons 8to
276. ct on the right of the display in step 2 to automatically reconnect 3 Press Sensor settings to return to Setup Mode 4 Press Yes Note There are different methods that you can use to connect the Sensors For example you can automatically connect to the Sensors that are recognized by the Touch Finder or you can manually register the Sensors to connect OJ 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor p 204 58 Selecting a Sensor for Configuration FQ2 User s Manual 3 2 Setting Conditions for Taking Images You can set the conditions for taking images to use in inspections To enable accurate judgements the following adjustments are made for the conditions for taking images and the images themselves Taking Clear Images Camera Setup Adjusting the Focus LT p 60 Adjust the focus of the Lens Taking Bright Images of Dark Objects and Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects BE p 63 Adjust the shutter speed and gain Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and Other Shiny Surfaces HDR I p 64 Make adjustments for shiny objects or metallic surfaces For a Sensor with built in lighting attach a polarizing filter to cut specular reflections Adjusting the Colors of the Image White Balance BA p 65 Adjust the white balance so that the colors match those of the actual measurement object M Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images Trigger Setting Trigger Delay I P 66 Ad
277. d FQ2 User s Manual SD Card Operations 224 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 222 Checking the Available Space on the SD Card Before saving data to the SD card use the following display to make sure that there is sufficient space available on the SD card gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings SD card SD card information The following information in the SD card inserted in the Touch Finder can be checked nformat ion Formatting an SD Card p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings SD card Format Press Yes to start formatting SD Card Operations FQ2 User s Manual 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation This section describes the functions that can be used during Sensor operation Setting a Password to Prevent Unwanted Changes A password can be set to prevent unwanted changes to settings If a password is set you cannot change from Run Mode to Setup Mode without entering the password Setting a Password p Setup Mode Sensor settings Password settings 1 Press Password on off and press ON 2 Press Enter password 3 Entera password containing up to 15 characters and press OK Clearing the Password gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Password settings Press Password on off and press OFF Entering the password when switching from Run Mode to Setup Mode 1 Ifa password is set and you try to change from Run Mode to Setup Mod
278. d hh mm ss 100 oj of 152 573 58 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item Format Description 1 Date YYYY MM DD This is the date that the measurement data was obtained from the Sensor 2 Time hh mm ss This is the time that the measurement data was obtained from the Sensor 3 Measurement ID This is the measurement ID information 4 Scene No Scene number 5 Judge Overall judgement 0 OK 1 NG 2 NC not measured 6 Inspection item inspection_item_number measure The data selected for logging in the Measurement data under region ment_item detection_point Log setting is output If multiple results are detected only the Example The correlation of the sec maximum number of data items that is set in the Measurement ond detection point in a search for data are output inspection item number 0 would be given as follows 10 CR2 7 Expression region Z0 D This is the expression results for each expression Example The fourth registered expression would be given as fol lows Z0 D04 1 The data and time are not recorded with the measurement data Therefore this is not the date that the measurement was executed This is the date that the PC Tool or the Touch Finder obtained the data from the Sensor Changing the Format for Saving Measurement Data The output CSV file format can be changed according to the external device gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF set
279. d edge 0 position Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Expression text string Data name Description Data range YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position MX Midpoint X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 999 sured edge midpoint position MY Midpoint Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 999 sured edge midpoint position SX0 Edge0 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position X SY0 Edge0 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position Y SX1 Edge1 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position X SY1 Edge1 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position Y SMX Ref Midpoint X refer This is the X coordinate of the mid 9 999 9999 to 99 999 99
280. d position X1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard position Y1 Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY1 Logged data only 99 999 9999 15 Standard edge angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 STH Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 parame sition ter 120 Mea Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 None 1 Bilinear 0 _ sure precision sition ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Cancel position compen 1 tions sition sation 1 Position compensation based on internal edge position measurement 122 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 0 image sition 1 Previous image External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External refer ence number Category 140 Mea sure ment condi 141 tions 142 143 147 149 150 153 157 160 161 162 163 167 169 170 173 177 FQ2 User s Manual Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data sition sion text Judgement string parameter Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 0 sition tion 1 Edge color specification Edge color RO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color G0 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color BO Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255
281. d the judgment conditions 1 Setting the Items to Judge You can assign the parameters from the inspection items to the data output signals DO to D15 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of 0 Search to DO p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Settings 2 Press I0 D0 3 Press IO Search 4 Press Position X X 5 if the inspection item allows multi point output press the number 0 to 30 of the inspection result for which to output the data from the list of inspec To register something to D1 or higher repeat this pro cess Ref 2 Setting the Judgement Conditions p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Basic Tab Page 1 Press Judgement condition 2 Set the correlation range that is to be judged as OK Judgement Par Jda Output 298 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Reflecting Judgement Results to the Overall Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement result of a parallel judgement output in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt In Out I O setting Output data set Par Jdg Output Details Tab Page Output parameter Reflect Stopping Data Output You can also prevent the judgement results that are set from actually
282. de 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00102040 Response Format MRC SRC MRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00102040 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error ge0 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Saving Data in the Sensor 280F 00103010 This command saves the current setting data system data scene groups and calibration data in the Sensor Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00103010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00103010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Re registering Models 280F 00104010 This command re registers the models for registered Search and Color Data inspection items Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00104010 Response Format MRC SRC MRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00104010 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error FQ
283. dgement This is the judgement result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error DO to D31 Data 0 to 31 These are the values of the parameters that are 999 999 999 9999 to set for output data 0 to 31 999 999 999 9999 Output Specifications e Only the integer portions of numbers are output All digits before the decimal point are rounded off e The following range of values can be output Binary data 32768 to 32768 BCD data 999 to 999 If the measurement value is out of range the actual measurement value is not output and the minimum or maximum value of the range is output instead Data format Measurement value that is below the possi Measurement value that is above the possi ble output range ble output range Binary data A value of 32 767 is output A value of 32 768 is output BCD A value of 999 is output A value of 999 is output Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Note The data that is output to the OR and D signals after a measurement is held until the next measurement is per formed The values will continue to be output even after all measurements have been completed However if you set the output timing of the OR signal to One shot output in the Output mode parameter the OR signal will turn OFF
284. dinate Positive direction System 0 X Origin Upperleft Lowerleft or Select the location of the origin of the coordinate system Center Default Lowerleft Upper left Center Lower left Magnification 0 0001 to 9 9999 Set the actual dimension that corresponds to one pixel Default 1 0000 1 Calibration FQ2 User s Manual p Setup Mode Calibration 1 2 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 to Calibration data 31 Press Modify Press lt q Parameter on the right of the display Mudify O Calibratiun datat Cuefficient A Enett ic ient Coefficle Set the following parameters Coordinate Origin and Magnification Press OK coord inate lettnand WW merer Parameter O Calibraliun datadi Cancel f The calibration parameters will be displayed yodity O Calibration datad The items in the calibration parameters are the same as es o r 1 001 those for point specification Eino Selecting the Calibration Pattern to Use In the Camera setup select the calibration pattern to use Note You can select the calibration pattern for each scene p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press lt q Select calib data on the right of the dis EIT play 0 0ff 2 Select the calibration pattern from Calibration data 0 to Calibration data 31 2 Callbratlon datal S ieee Baek E dv Note If the selected calibration da
285. display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition Two edge Midpoint Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X0 Logged data XO only 99 999 9999 8 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 YO Logged data YO only 99 999 9999 9 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 x1 Logged data X1 only 99 999 9999 10 Detected edge position Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y1 Logged data Yi only 99 999 9999 11 Detected edge mid Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 MX Logged data point position X only 99 999 9999 12 Detected edge mid Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 MY Logged data point position Y only 99 999 9999 13 Standard position XO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX0 Logged data only 99 999 9999 14 Standard position YO Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SYO Logged data only 99 999 9999
286. display size Display But Changes the image display method Setup Mode Camera Live Freeze Log ton Logging image file or Camera image file Run Mode Latest image or Last NG image Log Image You can save the Camera image that is p 201 Button displayed on the Touch Finder or com puter el Capture Button Used to capture the current display and p 224 save it in external memory e g an SD card FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 429 z L seoipueddy 430 12 2 External Color Gray Filter Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 tions sition 122 Filter type Setting Acqui Filter type 0 sition 0 RGB 1 HSV 123 Color filter type Setting Acqui Color Filter Type 0 sition 0 Red filter 1 Green filter 2 Blue filter 3 Cyan filter 4 Magenta filter 5 Yel
287. ds simultaneously Command Response Communications For PLC Link communications command response control signals are handled by storing control commands from the PLC to the Vision Sensor and responses from the Vision Sensor to the PLC in the I O memory of the PLC This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform single inspections or change the scene without using communications instructions PLC master Vision Sensor slave CPU Unit I O memory Communications areas Command Command area e Switching the scene number Single measurement etc Response OK etc Response area Ethernet PLC Link communications After you write a control command to the specified Command Area in the I O memory of the PLC you can turn ON the Command Execution EXE Bit to send the control command to the Vision Sensor via Ethernet The Vision Sensor executes the control command and sends a response back to the PLC via Ethernet The PLC stores the response in the specified Response Area in I O memory Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single measurement or continuous measurements the Vision Sensor will automatically output to the specified I O memory in the PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the PLC When handshaking is enabled
288. e Log FQ2 User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 215 suoyouny ju ju auoo J Deleting Logged Data The logged data will be deleted when the power supply to the Sensor is turned OFF or the scene is changed The logged data can also be deleted without turning OFF the power supply e Setup Mode gt In Out Log setting 1 Press Delete Log Saving Logged Recent Results Data in a File Although the logged recent results data will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF it can be saved in a file in external memory The most recent 1 000 measurement values and the most recent 20 images will be saved p Setup Mode Save to file Logging Tab Page 1 Press the data to save 2 The following display will appear if Logging image is Select whether to save the most recently logged image or to save all of the image data that is logged in the Sensor The file storage locations and file format are given in the following table Item Storage location File name Statistical data sensor_name LOGDATA File name_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS CSV2 Example The following name would be used for Logging data measurement measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May data 10 2012 2012_05_10 22_10_21 CSV Logging image image data sensor_name LOGIMAGE img_YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_NNN IFZ S Example The following name would be used for measurements performed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10
289. e O Changing the File Format p 212 FQ2 User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 217 Suoyouny ju ju auoo J 218 7 7 Saving Sensor Settings The Sensor settings are saved in flash memory inside the Sensor This section describes how to back up the settings in and restore them from an SD card or other external memory Backing Up Settings in External Memory p Setup Mode Save to file Setting Tab Page 1 Press the data to N Applicable Data Data save Enter the file name in 15 characters or less After entering the file name press OK The data will be saved and the display will return to Save to file Storage location allbration data ealibration aroup data ibration group data sensar sy Sensor system data data ne group dala T All sensor data Description Scene data The file name extension is SCN sensor_name SCN The following data is backed up for each scene Settings for all inspection items Order of inspection items Scene group data The file name extension is SGP sensor_name SGP All scene data is backed up Sensor system data The file name extension is SYD sensor_name SYD system data in the Sensor is backed up All Sensor data The file name extension is BKD sensor_name BKD A The system data is the same for all scenes A settings in the Sensor all scene data Sensor system data a
290. e IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 101000 1101000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON za RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 b 4 signals 0 i 101000 1 ON for 1 ms min ON _ IN7 signal Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 ON BUSY signal Command execution OFF ON ACK signal OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal will be ON while data is being saved in the Sensor ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function IN1 to IN3 Turn OFF IN4 Turn ON IN5 Turn OFF IN6 Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for saving data in the Sensor Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Connecting through Ethernet Da INTPOAUCHION sic cies isin dere aaa a leon tare ace hs kta ea ie 282 9 2 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 283 9 3 PLC Link Connections 000 cece eee eee eee 324 9 4 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 000 cece ee 350 9 5 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands eicae red Sanaa eae EE ard Keene ed
291. e The difference from the reference value is output Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt Inspect Inspection Add item Sensitive Search Details Tab Page Output parameter Increasing Measurement Position Accuracy You can increase the accuracy of measurement positioning You can calculate down to four decimal places p gt Inspect Inspection Sensitive Search Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Sub pixel and select Yes Sensitive Search Select the Results to Output You can use multiple conditions to determine which results to output from all the objects detected with a correlation at the candidate level or higher Only the results that meet all the specified conditions are output p gt Inspect Inspection Sensitive Search Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Candidate level and adjust the candidate lev el so that only objects higher than a certain correla tion are detected Candidale level Sensitive Search Extraction condition Range Description Candidate level 0 to 100 Only objects with a correlation that is higher than the specified candidate level are output Note The processing time changes if you change the candidate level
292. e the following password entry display will appear gt Setup Mode Sensor settings 2 Press the text box A keyboard display will appear Enter the password and press OK If the password is correct the Setup Mode will be displayed e This password restricts only the operation to switch from Run Mode to Setup Mode It does not restrict other operations e If you forget the password contact your OMRON representative for the procedure to clear the password The password is deleted when the Sensor is initialized FQ2 User s Manual Convenient Functions for Operation 223 suoyouny ju ju auoo J Capturing the Displayed Image The current display on the Touch Finder or PC Tool can be captured and used in text files and other files on the computer The captured images are saved in external memory as bit maps 1 Images captured on the Touch Finder are saved in the SD card Images captured with the PC Tool are saved in the computer s hard disk drive gt L Setup Mode or Run Mode The image that is being displayed when the button is pressed is saved in external memory e Storage Location and File Names Storage location File name CAPTURE YYYY_MM_DD HH_MM_SS_MS BMP Example The following name would be used for an image that was captured at 10 10 21 350 pm on March 10 2010 2010_03_10 22_10_21_350 BMP Make sure an SD card is inserted in the Touch Finder before capturing display images
293. e Changing the Display Range of the Vertical Axis 1 Press lt lt Display range on the right of the trend monitor 2 Set the minimum and maximum values of the measurement values Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs FQ2 User s Manual e Changing the Number of Values That Are Displayed 1 Press lt Number of data on the right of the trend monitor 2 Select the number of values from 200 400 and 1 000 Trend monitor data is held until the power supply is turned OFF e You can select whether to display all data on the trend monitor or only data for which the overall judgement is NG Logging settings are applied to the trend monitor as well However they are not applied to trend monitor when it is displayed in Setup Mode LT Icheck recent measurement trends recent results logging p 214 Histograms The distribution of each measurement value can be checked on a histogram The most recent 1 000 measurement values are displayed on a graph Switches the display to Switches the display to the previous inspection the next inspection item number 0 SceneQ item number Specifies the NR og parameter to display on the histogram Number of measure pA ment values Used to select the detection information to display when more than one detection point is detected at the same time for one item Measurement values O ne D g The distribution of the measurement val
294. e Control Command Completed FLG signal and the Command Execution Active BUSY signal and turns ON the READY signal FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 319 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Execution of Control Commands for Continuous Measurements with the Control Command Execution Bit EXE Signal ON i tt i i I I Command code i n i ia OFF i ii i rtd I Ii I I I I rt i I i wt i I Command ON parameters Ha ran OFF t 4 7 i Command i pu Area Control H j Command ON Execution Bit i l H EXE signal OFF 7 an i bo i Di i rit I NE I I I I ON 1 Tt 1 Eoi i rid Command code 1 tt 1 tod OFF i ii i rid I wt I i I I 1 mt i I k i i 1 1 1 Li Command ON 1 1 n ono Execution Active Continuous measure gt i BUSY signal OFE ments executed ie at iit i wt i i i I A Ly i rid E Pod READY signal 1 Response sn ee i TE Area i ii i rid i wt i i i I ON joo R I IiI I I I Response code rt pry OFF I II I I I i wt I i i I I II I I I i mt i i I I ji ro L 1 1 Li ON i mt i i 1 I ot i i i I Response data il kiyahi OFF i Li rit I II i i I I II I 1 I I i mt i Control ON i tt i Command i it i i Completed i Lt i i FLG signal i i H i H i mt i i tt I I mt i i wt I i i Overall judgemen
295. e E eee 376 u1 4 4 YBnoiu Bunosuuog 6 282 9 1 Introduction With the FQ2 you can use any of the following protocols to transfer data through Ethernet Protocol Transfer method Reference TCP no protocol commands Commands are sent from the PLC to control the Sensor p 350 Received data is stored in the buffer memory of the specified port FINS TCP no protocol commands p 376 PLC Link You can control the Sensor and obtain measurement results simply by p 324 7 manipulating bits and words in the memory of the PLC EtherNet IP tag data links When you turn ON the Command Execution Bit at a specific memory p 283 4 A PLC Link uses three link areas to pe address in the PLC a command in a specified memory area e g the DM Area or CIO Area in the PLC is read and sent to the Sensor The results of executing the command are written to specified words in the memory of the PLC These words are specified in advance You can use this method when the external device is a PLC rform communications the Command Area Response Area and Data Output Area A PLC Link is not the same as the Serial PLC Link protocol used to connect PLCs together with serial communications 2 The signal timing is equivalent to paral Note el I O i e command execution and data output are performed independently You can also use the parallel interface for other controls such as controlling measuremen
296. e Output data size setting as follows 32 bytes Output data 0 to 7 64 bytes Output data 0 to 15 128 bytes Output data 0 to 31 256 bytes Output data 0 to 63 nications FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 303 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Accessing Communications Areas Using Variables with NJ series Controllers With an NJ series Controller only variables can be used to access from the user program the I O memory addresses that are assigned to the communications areas Use the following settings Using Network Variables for Access Create user defined variables that match the structures of the communications areas of the Sensor Use the Sysmac Studio to define the variables Refer to the Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual Cat No W504 for Sysmac Studio operating procedures 1 Defining the Data Types of the Variables Define data types for variables that match the structures of the communications areas 1 Defining a Data Type for Signal Access First define a BOOL array data type to access the control signals and status signals Here a data type called U_EIPFlag is defined Name of data type U_EIPFlag Type of derivative data type Union Name of data type Data type U_EIPFlag UNION F ARRAY 0 31JOF BOOL es Specifies an array of BOOL data from 0 to 31 W DWORD ets 32 bit bit string data 2 Defining Data Types for Commu
297. e PLC that is specified for the output tag and then turn ON the Command Execution EXE Bit As a result the control command is sent through the input connection from the PLC to the Vision Sensor A control command does not need to be sent to execute measurements for the TRIG bit The measurement is executed simply by turning ON the TRIG bit The Vision Sensor executes the control command and sends a response back to the PLC through the output connection from the Vision Sensor to the PLC The PLC stores the response in the response area i e I O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 285 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 286 Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single measurement or continuous measurements the Vision Sensor will automatically output the data for the measurements that are specified for output in advance to the I O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the PLC When handshaking is enabled the data is output from the Vision Sensor only when the condition to receive that data are met at the PLC PLC Built in EtherNet IP port in CPU Unit Vision Sensor 1 0 memory or variables communications areas Output connection to PLC Output area See ee D a
298. e Parameters z L seoipueddy 456 External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 314 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi position X sition 1 Data logging ON tions 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 316 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 measurement angle sition 1 Data logging ON 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for reference position X sition 1 Data logging ON 318 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for reference position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 319 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for reference angle sition 1 Data logging ON 320 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for NG sub region sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for sub region correla sition 1 Data logging ON tion 322 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for sub region density sition 1 Data logging ON deviation 323 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1
299. e TRIG signal Keep the TRIG signal ON for at least 1 ms Aligning the Data Output Timing with the External Device You can use one of the following data output methods to align the timing of data output with an external device e Aligning with the GATE Signal Status No Handshaking LT p 263 e Outputting Measurement Results for Data Send Requests from the External Device Handshaking BA p 266 e Offsetting the Timing of Outputting Measurement Results BA p 268 Setting Data Communications Specifications p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output 1 put Press Output control and select the output control m None Lipat LIES aas Opes nae cee p e Synchronized Output Set the communications specifications for data out Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Item Output control Parameter None default Hand shaking or Sync Out Description None Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the external device Handshaking Measurement results are output while synchronizing with the PLC put Sync output Measurement results are output without synchronizing with the external device 2 0 to 5 000 0 ms 10 0 ms default This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to None Set the period for outputting measurement results Set a value that is longer that t
300. e Touch Finder w Installation FQ2 User s Manual 2 Connect the Neck Strap or Hand Strap to the Mini strap _ Mini strap Neck Strap or Hand Strap Mounting Sensor Data Units Mounting to DIN Track Installation Procedure 1 Lock the sliders at the top and bottom of the Sensor Data Unit Press the slider on the Sensor Data Unit to the top 3 Hook the clip at the top of the Sensor Data Unit on to the DIN Track Press the Sensor Data Unit onto the DIN Track until the bot tom clip clicks into place e Attach End Plates sold separately on the sides of the Sensor Data Unit on the DIN Track e Always hook the clip at the top of the Sensor Data Unit on the DIN Track first If the lower clip is hooked on first the Touch Finder will not be mounted very securely Removal Procedure 1 Pull down on the slider on the Sensor Data Unit 2 Lift the Sensor Data Unit at the bottom and remove it from the DIN Track FQ2 User s Manual Installation 41 c SUONOeUUOD pue UOTE e Su 42 2 4 Wiring Wiring the Sensor Connect the I O Cable to the I O Cable connector located at the bottom of the Sensor e Cut off lines that are not required so that they do not come into contact the other signal lines e Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 N FQ
301. e after the GATE signal turns OFF a timeout error will oc cur This is timeout time 3 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Zo S o v2 25 3a O ge 98 52 5 o 25 2 o 05 Sa O S O E Ey l Q w D v D 267 Offsetting the Timing of Outputting Measurement Results The measurement result is output when the TRIG signal turns ON the number of times set for the Number of delay parameter This allows you to delay the output timing of the measurement result from the Sensor according to the actual processing timing of the line Example Sequential Feed Line That Uses a Star Wheel In a line like this you can synchronize the output timing of the measurement results and the discharge timing of NG products that are detected OK lt es output NG Discharge device OR If you set the Number of delay parameter to 4 the measurement result output is delayed by four TRIG signals Note e With synchronized output the number of times that the TRIG signal turns ON is counted Therefore use synchro nized output only when only one measurement result is output for each measurement Output either the parallel judgement or data Use a measurement trigger only for single measurements If you perform continuous measurements by inputting a command the output timing will not be correct and the Sensor may malfunction
302. e brightness O p 61 e Mounting the Filter 1 Hook the filter in the hole at the top of the Sensor 2 Using the top section as a pivot point pull down the filter so that it attaches to the Sensor Adjusting the Colors of the Image White Balance Only for Sensors with Color Cameras If external lighting is used the image may appear as having different colors than the actual object If this is the case adjust the white balance If the lighting built in to the Sensor is used the white balance is already adjusted No setting is required in this case p gt Image Camera setup 1 Input a picture of white paper or cloth 2 Press lt 4 White balance on the right side of the display 3 Press the Auto Button The Sensor will automatical memgmpr ly adjust the colors 4 Move the bar to the left light or right dark to fine tune the colors 5 Press OK FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality sobew uiye L 66 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images Delaying the Image Capture Timing from the Trigger Input If the measurement object is moving the position in the image of the feature that is to be measured will depend on the timing of the trigger signal A delay can be applied from when the trigger i e the TRIG signal is input until when the image is taken to synchronize the timing of image capture with the speed of moving objects I
303. e eee 94 4 4 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item 95 Searchi Inspection Items 6 2 24 see hace dead eee ie dede ede ad 95 Setup Procedure for the Search Inspection Item 000 000s 95 Increasing Measurement Position Accuracy 000000 0 eee 97 Obtaining Multiple Results Simultaneously 0 0000 e eee 97 Select the Results to Output 0 2 0 0s 98 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 000 98 Unstable S arch RESUS 2 00 3 d c6 Seer eobnaw ed a a eehea aaa 99 Increasing Processing Speed 0 0 00 cee 99 Editing the Model and Measurement Regions 0005 100 EMOS ae a apices ay E se cet E EA EE A e etve Sauter A EE a saat EENEG 104 FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual 4 5 Inspecting with the Shape Search Il Inspection Item 105 Shape Search II Inspection Item 0 0 0 0 cee 105 Setup Procedure for the Shape Search II Inspection Item 105 Obtaining Multiple Results Simultaneously 0 0000 e eee ee 107 Select the Results to Output 0 0 0 0 eee 108 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 20 0 0c eee 108 Unstable Shape Search Il Results 0 0000 c eee eens 109 Increasing Processing Speed 000 ccc cece eee eee 110 Editing the Model Regions and Measurement Region 110 ENON dinnar camagag Pay bide Meas Seed Finke Ga Ra SEO Hee SS A 112 4 6 Inspecting wi
304. e group data ge 8 Calibration data Loads calibration data m Calibration group data Loads calibration group data Sensor system data Loads system data All Sensor data Loads all Sensor data Touch Finder data Loads Touch Finder data amp Information Used to check the Sensor information p 230 p Model Used to check the model and software System 5 version of the connected Sensor D Version 9 Name Displays the name of the connected Sensor MAC address Used to check the MAC address of the connected Sensor Rename Used to change the name of a con 15 alphanumeric characters max p 230 g nected Sensor Memory Used to check the status of Sensor p 230 state memory Error history View his Displays a history of errors that have System p 398 tory occurred in the Sensor Delete Deletes the error history p 399 history 422 Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence S Startup set Startup Sets whether the startup scene number ON or OFF Scene number when set System p 192 tings mode is set manually tings were saved is startup scene num 2 ber 5 2 Startup Set the scene number to use at startup Standard models 0 to 31 Single func D scene tion models 0 to 7 Default 0 Password Password Enables ON or disables OFF the OFF default or ON System p 223 se
305. e program is used to input a IN5 signal to perform continuous measurements Continuous measurements will be started when W0 00 turns ON and stopped when W0 01 turns ON W0 00 t Continuous measurement command bit W0 00 Continuous measurement command bit T0000 BUSY signal Wwo 01 t Continuous measurement stop bit e I O Signal Allocations When the continuous measurement command bit W0 00 turns ON the command parameter for continuous measurements 00000 is output to Q 1 INO to IN4 If the BUSY signal is OFF 5 ms after the command parameter is output the command input for continuous measurements IN5 is turned ON and continuous measurements start When the continuous measurement stop bit W0 01 turns ON the command input for continuous measurements IN5 is turned OFF and continuous measurements stop Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 ClO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 CIO 1 15 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 239 Zo S o v2 25 3a O ge F 5308 DO 25 2 o 05 Sa O S O E a Q w D v D Setting the Outputs Using the Overall Judgement Result When the results of the inspection items are judged if even one individual judgement result is NG the OR output signal
306. e searched from two directions and the Measurement region distance is calculated Color of edge to be found Setup Procedure for Edge Width Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item suono dsuj dN Buijes Y p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Edge Width LT Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow bul at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item 12 Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and the edge width in the region as reference data for the measurement gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Width Settings Tab Page 1 2 KR Q Press Teach The middle arrow is the direction for detecting an edge Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera Move the rectangle to the location to be measured Press OK Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed Press Back to end teaching Moves the starting point of the measurement Moves the end point of the measurement region region g 9 Drag to move Changes the width BA Changing the measurement region p 102 the region of the measurement region The
307. e that was defined above 1 32 bit bit string data gr 32 bit integer data abi 32 bit integer data Name of data type Data type S_EIPInput STRUCT StatusFlag U_EIPFlag CommandCodeEcho DWORD ResponseCode UDINT ResponseData DINT OutputData ARRAY 0 7 OF DINT gente Specifies an array of DINT data from 0 to 7 e Assignment Example for Variable Data Type That Matches the Response and Output Areas Response Area Bits AS 12 1S 2 wal de amp amp v Bi S 4 s 2 il 0 Status 0 ERR RUN OR JREADY BUSY FLG Flag 1 GATE Command 2 Command code CodeEcho 3 Response 4 Response code Code 5 Response 6 Response data Data 7 S_EIP Output Area Input Bits aly e aes 2 E ake amp amp 7 i A 0 9 DATAO 10 Output Data 25 DATA8 26 FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 305 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 2 Defining the Variables Define variables for the data links for the communications area data that is used in EtherNet IP commu nications These variables use the data types that were defined above in procedure 1 Variable Variable type Network Publish Data type Application attribute ElP
308. e thinner benzene acetone or kerosene to clean the Sensor and Touch Finder If large dust particles adhere to the Camera use a blower brush used to clean camera lenses to blow them off Do not use breath from your mouth to blow the dust off To remove dust particles from the Camera wipe gently with a soft cloth for cleaning lenses moistened with a small amount of alcohol Do not use excessive force to wipe off dust particles Scratches to the Camera might cause error Editor s Note E Meaning of Symbols Menu items that are displayed on the Touch Finder LCD screen and windows dialog boxes and other GUI elements displayed on the PC are indicated enclosed by brackets E Visual Aids Important Indicates points that are important to achieve the full product performance such as operational precautions Note Indicates application procedures BA Indicates pages where related information can be found FQ2 User s Manual 1 Introduction 1 1 FQ2 series Vision Sensors 00 cece eee ee eee ees 1 2 Measurement Process 000cc cece cent eee e een eeneeeas 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements 20 00055 Startup Display tcc cicued syn ctehe pees eet eed eee ae eb oaeed dees Display Elements sei 0sad escaped saad aw he beta evade EENET 1 4 Basic Operational Flow 0 0 e cece eee ee 2 Installation and Connections 2 1 System Configuration 000 c eee
309. ea N Y Gravity center N X Gravity center N Y Master angle N ATH Number of Label Count 1 X Number of Label Count 1 Y Number of Label Count 1 TH O 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the reference area registered during teaching is 0 Perform the following e If the color of the measurement object has changed from the specified color set the color again and try teaching again Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual 4 143 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data You can set inspection item judgement results and measurement data with the Calculation menu command to use them in basic arithmetic operations and functions The judgement results of the calculations are reflected in the overall judgement Calculation Use the Calculation menu command to set the calculation expressions and the judgement parameters for the calculation results Expression You can get up to 32 expressions You can also combine expressions You can use the following values in calculations e Filter item and position compensation item data measurement data reference values and judgement results e Inspection item data measurement data reference values and judgement results e Constants e Other calculation results Judgement Upper and lower limit values are used for the judgement of calculation re
310. earch II 15 4 bytes a If the size of the specified output data exceeds the set value of the output data size setting the data is output separately as shown below Output data size setting 256 bytes First Data Output Output data 0 Output data 63 FQ2 User s Manual 256 bytes Second Data Output Output data 0 Output data 7 Zeros are written to unused bytes 72 bytes The previous data will be overwritten Adjust the timing with handshaking to get the data Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 299 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Setting the Output Format p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output 1 Press Output format 2 Press Output form 3 Seteithera floating point decimal or a fixed decimal for the output form Item Description Setting range Output form Set the output form for numerical data Floating point or fixed point default Floating point Memory Assignments and Commands Memory Assignments This section describes the assignments of the command area for the input connection to the Sensor and the response and output areas for the output connection to the PLC Input Connection to Sensor PLC Originator to Vision Sensor Target e Command Area Bits Contents 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 ERCLR Resv Resv R
311. earch Inspection Item suono dsuj dN Bues Y Editing the Model and Measurement Regions This section describes how to edit the following regions Model registration region Measurement region region that is searched for the model If the model region is changed perform teaching again LT p 96 Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle One rectangular region is registered as the default model registration region Other than rectangles circles and polygons can be set as the model registration regions p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Press lt q Model region ode reson 2 Press lt q Delete in the model registration editing display The rectangle will be deleted 2012 08 EEC 3 Press Yes 4 Press Add in 4q 5 Press the shape of the region that you want to use 6 Drawthe region 7 Press OK Note Up to 8 shapes can be combined to create a region for one model 100 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Masking Parts of the Model The model registration region can be formed freely by combining enabled and disabled regions Example Figure 1 Enabled range tas EJ 5 Figure 2 Disabled range The gray section CUS is the model i d N region in 1 Ye Pi eae Figure 3 Enabled range p gt I
312. easured automatically This is called a test measurement A test measurement is used to verify that the settings that have been made will produce stable results and if necessary to fine tune the settings An overall judgement of all inspection items can be performed Test measurements can be performed for through images default or saved images Performing Test Measurements with Samples p gt Test Continuous test 1 Press Graphics Details 2 Input an image of a previously prepared object Check the judgement results 3 When you finish checking the results press Back Judgement OF Korre lat ing ESTN f Position X Positio Note The same five types of displays are available for the Continuous test on the Test Tab Page i e Graphics Graphics Details All results region Trend monitor and Histogram Press the Back Button to access the menu to change the display BA Changing the Run Mode display p 182 Performing Test Measurements with Saved Images Re measuring This Sensor can save measured images in the Sensor s built in memory or on an SD card Test measurements can be performed using these saved images This function is useful for adjusting the judgement parameters when objects are not available p gt Test Continuous test Any display 1 Press Q EJ FQ Series 17 A 0 Performing Test Measurements FQ2 User s Manual 2 Select one of the following e Log
313. ecified lower to upper limits is converted to 0 to 255 Brightness range for Range 0 to 255 The specified range is converted to 0 to 255 Sensors with Mono Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 255 chrome Cameras Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Measurement data can be specified for each filter item Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement 2 No judgement not measured result 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items Use position compensation items if the position or orientation of the measurement object is not consistent When you use a position compensation item the offset between the reference position and the position of the object is calculated and the position of the measurement region is corrected before measurements are performed Applicable Position Compensation Items There are the following two types of position compensation items that vary in the method that is used to detect the object Type Description Model model position compensa A search is made for a characteristic pattern to detect and correct the position tion e Shape Sear pos comp Shape Search Position Compensation e Search position comp
314. ection Guide The FQ2 Vision Sensor uses inspection items to judge measurement objects There are eight different measurement objects Select the best inspection items for the characteristics of the measurement object that are being judged Inspection Example Inspection Refer items used ence Judging according to shapes Judging if there is a mark Search or p 95 Shape p 105 Search II lt gt Detecting positions with patterns Measurement objects of the same color and pattern can be Search p 95 detected Dividing the measurement area and judging Judging minute differences in Sensitive p 113 according to shapes for each division printed labels OK Search ss SS 5S A WARNIG Se LED RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM aaa O A WARNIG LED RADIATION DO NOT STARE mn Judging according to positions Measuring the position offset of Edge Posi p 120 a seal tion OK NG Ta E Judging according to widths Measuring the width between Edge p 127 lead wires Width 4 gt gt OK NG E o M T FQ2 User s Manual Inspection Item Selection Guide suonoedsu dN Bues 174 Inspection Example Inspection Refer items used ence Judging according to the features of parts of a Judging the number of pins Edge Pitch p 105 shape COGE Judging according to colors Color Data p 136 lt gt Judging according to sizes Area p 140 0
315. ection describes the basic connections and signal flow with external devices With the default settings the Sensor operates in the following manner FQ2 Vision Sensor External device Ly cel rir J l ee all 1 Measurement 3 Judgement trigger input results output Trigger Sensor 2 Measurements performed 1 Measurement on F trigger input 4 The trigger to perform measurements once is turned ON OFF TRIG signal ae A You can confirm if measurements are in progress 2 Executing ON y This signal stays ON until the next measurement ON while measure measurement trigger can be input i OFF f EU sonal ments areN progress Turned ON when overall judgement is NG 3 Judgement results Retained until the next output overall judgement results are judgement OR output signal You can also use the READY signal which will turn ON when a measurement trigger can be input You can assign the READY signal to any output from OUTO to OUT2 QI Getting Individual Judgements and Expression Judgements p 241 Measurement ON trigger input TRIG signal OFF When the measurement ON BUSY signal trigger is received the BUSY OFF signal turns ON and the READY signal turns OFF ON 2 READY signal OFF while measurements are in progress OFF Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual e Create the ladder
316. ed color from extraction Labeling Making the Extract Color Easier to Check The display for the extracted color can be switched by using lt q Display setting The following display patterns can be selected for the extracted color Measurement image All color image default Selected color image or Binary image Press lt q Background color to change the display for colors other than the extraction color The color can be chosen from Black default White Red Green or Blue e Sensors with Monochrome Cameras or for a Color Gray Filter 1 Press lt q Binary level on the right of the display 2 Specify the range of brightness to detect and then press OK Specify the range of brightness to convert to a binary im age Measurement is performed after the image taken by the camera in 256 color grayscale is converted to a bina ry image Then white pixels are measured 3 Press OK 4 Press TEACH 5 Press Back to end teaching Note Making the Extraction Results Easier to Check e You can invert the black white extraction results Press lt q Reverse and select Yes e You can select whether to display a binary image Press lt q Binary image display and select OFF or ON FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item 149 suonoedsu dN Buas y 150 Changing the Label Detection Conditions You can f
317. ed for the communications areas the information in the communications areas will be cleared when the operating mode of the PLC changes unless addresses in the CIO Area which are main tained are specified e The following assembly object is required to specify instances when the EDS file is not used Assembly Object Settings Parameter name Setting Remarks Instance ID 100 Output connection 101 Input connection Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements You can specify the measurement data to output automatically to the PLC after measurements Data That Can Be Output You can output up to 64 data items 256 bytes with the output data data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of 0 Search to data O for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data set
318. ed in an error Parameter Descriptions Inspection item number Specifies the number of the inspection item for which to acquire the data External reference num ber Specifies the external reference number Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Acquired value FQ2 User s Manual Returns the data for the specified inspection item Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 387 jeusey y YyBnoiy Bunosuuog 6 388 Setting the Inspection Item Data 280F 00501020 This command sets the parameters and measurement values of the specified inspection item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Inspection item number 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes number 4 bytes External reference Set value 4 bytes 28 OF 00501020 Inspection item number from 00 to 1F 2 digits max number External reference Set value 1 000 times the actual value Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00501020 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Inspection item number Specifies the number of the inspection item to set External reference num Specifies the exte
319. egistering the mode again IN5 is turned ON T0000 OUT1 IN5 The command input for registering the mode again IN5 is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0001 BUSY When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that model has been re registered processing after re registration is performed W0 01 turned ON e I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals INO CIO 1 08 IN1 CIO 1 09 IN2 CIO 1 10 IN3 ClO 1 11 IN4 CIO 1 12 IN5 ClO 1 15 Note The BUSY signal will be ON while the model is being re registered If the cycle time is too long the PLC may not be able to detect when the BUSY signal is ON If necessary turn OFF W0 00 after a suitable time elapses 250 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Turning the ERROR Signal OFF The ERROR signal turns ON when an error occurs After removing the cause of the error turn the ERROR signal OFF using one of the following methods Method 1 Input an error clear command from an external device such as a PLC Method 2 Input a measurement trigger again For example turn the TRIG signal ON during a one shot measurement The ERROR signal will turn OFF when measurement is executed correctly Note This function can be used in Run Mode only Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O se
320. ement Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Note You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result type on the right of the display Absolute value default The measured coordinates are output Relative value The difference from the reference position is output as coordinates Increasing Measurement Position Accuracy You can increase the accuracy of measurement positioning You can calculate down to four decimal places p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Sub pixel and select Yes Obtaining Multiple Results Simultaneously You can detect all items that satisfy the extraction conditions Judgement is performed for all detected results p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter Na Press Multi point output and select Yes Press Sorting method and select the conditions by which to sort the detected results You can output the results in the sort order that you se lected Note You can specify the actual output conditions and count for output ting multiple results LT Selecting the results to output p 98 lor descending order Kc i Oer fos x descending agder Pais a cancel Selection item Setting Descri
321. en 2 147 483 647 is output The following values are output if JG Judge is set OK 0 0 x 1000 NG 1000 1 x 1000 Note Data that is output after measurement is output until the last data even after the measurement is finished Data out put is not interrupted midway Controlling the Sensor from an External Device Procedure for No protocol Command Response Communications Command Format This section describes the command format for no protocol communications Commands defined in the command list can be used Set commands and parameters in ASCII If the command has an argument parameter set the parameter after inserting a space 0x20 If it has multiple parameters insert a space before each parameter Place a delimiter at the end of the command No space is required before the delimiter The delimiter is always CR lt Command Format gt Command Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 ooo eee es iitfetmiofatr al ilo filo f fofo cr Space Space Space Delimiter 0x20 0x20 0x20 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 357 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 lt Response Format gt If a parameter is attached the parameter and delimiter are output when the command is processed normally and the command execution result is OK A delimiter is inserted at the end of the response The delimiter is always CR Command E
322. ence Reference position X These are coordinates of the model image that are stored as reference Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Shape Search Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement If more than one result was detected you can switch to a display for each result 2 Press each parameter and set the range that is to be Multi point output must be enabled judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are taken Note Judgement cond You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 7 tient ower limi Upper limit 3 Press OK to accept the value Blue for OK Red for NG 4 Press Back to end making the setting Parameter Setting Description Correlation Range 0 to 100 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the correlation for an OK judge Defaults Lower limit 60 Upper limit 100 ment Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position X for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of me
323. ence Parameters p 430 Acquired value Returns the image adjustment data or threshold value O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Set Image Adjustment Data This command sets parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item lt Command Format gt External reference data Command 4 digits max Set value FP I1I IoHue s lels ilr lieja ejaj ttt tt ier Space Item Space pie or 0x20 number 0x20 Delimiter Space Space 0x20 0x20 UH l Delimiter Command Space Space External Set value 0x20 0x20 reference data Space Item 4 digits max Space 0x20 number 0x20 lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r erl Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Inspection item number Specifies the item number of the position compensation item or of the filter item External reference data Specifies the external reference data number number O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Set value Specifies the set value O 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 369 u1 4 4 YyBnosy
324. ent Inspection item 2 Edge Position Line Process Changes Inspection for Inspection for Inspection for Inspection for product A product B product C product Z Item Number of scenes 32 8 e Settings Included with Scenes The following settings are changed when the scene is changed Camera image Image Tab Page and Inspection Items Inspect Tab Page The settings related to external I O specifications that are included in the output settings and the system settings for the overall Sensor are used for all of the scenes Refer to the following information for the data that is included in the scene data LI 12 1 Menu Tables p 404 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process FQ2 User s Manual Creating New Scenes The default scene number is 0 To create another scene use the following procedure to switch the scene and then make the settings p Setup Mode Select scene 1 Press the number of the scene to change to and then press Select 2 The scene will change Make the settings for the scene Changing Scene Names Copying Scenes and Deleting Scenes p Setup Mode Select scene 1 Press the number of the scene and then press Re name Copy or Clear 2 To change the name enter a new scene name in 15 al phanumeric characters or less To copy a scene press the number of the scene to copy Switching Scenes from an External Device e Changing Scenes with a
325. ent is performed If data output is set the measurement is performed and the result is returned as response data lt Command Format gt mjeja sjujr e er o m er Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally OR Measurement Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Measurement result The measurement result is output as the response when data output is set The measurement result is not output when data output is not set BA Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 352 360 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Start Continuous Measurements This command starts continuous measurements If data output is not set only continuous measurement is performed If data output is set continuous measurement is performed and the results corresponding to the number of measurements made are returned as response data lt Command Format gt Miejaltsjujrfe fele mu efer Delimiter Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o k Jor Measure Data returned for the number of ment result continuous measurements made Measure Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally Delimiter lt Parameter Descriptions gt Measurement result The measurement results
326. er Lower 4 bytes of MAC address 7 Get Product Name SHORT Product name FQ Series STRING Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 01 hex Get_Attribute_All Yes Yes 05 hex Reset No Yes Parameter 0 1 OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes 502 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications FQ2 User s Manual 1 2 02h Message Router Object Class Attributes None Instance Attributes None Services None 1 3 06h Connection Manager Class Attributes None Instance Attributes None Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks 54 hex Forward Open No Yes 4E hex Forward Close No Yes 1 4 F5h TCP IP Interface Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Revision UINT Revision of the object al 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Num Instance UINT Number of object instances 1 Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Status DWORD Interface status 0x0002 Depends on the device 2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD Interface Function Flag 0x0002 Depends on the device 3 Get Set Configuration Control DWORD Interface Control Flag 0x0000 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT of Path to the link object in the a physical layer rom Path size UINT Path size 2 G n Path Padded Segment to identify physical 20 F6 24 01 EPATH l
327. er and press Add item 2 Press Edge Pitch Edge Posit 7 h se Colo ata a EZ BA Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow boul at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item EA 132 Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region as reference data for the measurement gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Pitch Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure The middle arrow is the direction ment reference in front of the camera for detecting an edge Move the rectangle to the location to be measured 4 Press OK T Changing the Measurement Region p 102 Moves the starting Moves the end point of point of the the measurement region measurement region Drag to move Changes the width the region of the measure ment region Step 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Pitch Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Press the parameters and set the range that is to be judged as OK Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are displayed The measured value is dis played beside the parameter name Note You can change the parameters for judgement condit
328. es X Y Camera coordinates of measurement position Unit pixels X Y Converted coordinates actual coordinates X AxX BxYt C Y HDxX ExYtF With this method the calibration settings are based on measurement results When you enter the actual coordinates of the position that results from searching for a registered model the calibration parameters are calculated automatically The position resulting from the search is found at the subpixel level O Same Te in X and Y Directions Measure two positions and enter the actual coordinates of them Different Magnifications in X and Y Directions Calibration g OO Measure three positions and enter the actual coordinates of them FQ2 User s Manual p Setup Mode Calibration 1 Select the data region to set from Calibration data 0 mep to Calibration data 31 aa Cuefficient A 2 Press Modify cet E CIty point Enett ic iente O Calibraelion datali 3 Press lt q Reference on the right of the display Cueff ic ient 4 Press No 1 and then press Modify sampling O Calibration datali ee 0S Hu 2 No 4 Unconf iaured 5 Move the rectangular frame to specify the model region Mudel region Note 1016 344 1246 FQ Serie e You can edit the model region The procedure is the same as that for the search function LT editing the Model and Measurement Regions p 100 6 Press OK m i 0 7 Press a reference sa
329. es to display e Log Logging Image file Images that are logged in the Sensor s internal memory Camera image file e Logging image file Images that are logged in the SD card e Camera image file Images that were logged with Logging Button LT saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image p 224 3 Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play Note Refer to the following information for the procedures to save images LT Logging Measurement Data p 208 Updating the Display and Measurement Results Only for NG Measurement Results In Run Mode you can specify updating the display of the image and measurement results only when the measurement result is NG P A Run Mode 1 Press E 2 Press Last NG image 3 Press Back FQ2 User s Manual Display Functions Zo suoyouny ju ju auoo J 202 Change the following setting to display the last NG image after restarting gt E Setup Mode or Run Mode TF Settings Startup display Display update mode 1 Press Last NG image Cance If an operation to change the display is performed e g if the display pattern is changed or the inspection item is changed when displaying images for NG results is set the display will change to refreshing the most recent mea surement results and the most recent NG display will disappear To ensure that you can check the NG results log the NG results BE Check
330. esv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv TRIG EXE Control sig nals 32 1 Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv Resv DSA bits 2 Command code Command code 32 3 bits 4 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 32 bits 5 6 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 32 bits 7 8 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 32 bits 9 Signal Signal name Function Application method EXE Control Command Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a control com Command Execution Bit mand for the Vision Sensor to execute response com Set the control command code and parameters before munications you turn ON this signal Turn OFF the EXE signal from the PLC when the Control Command Completed FLG signal from the Vision Sen sor turns ON 200 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Signal Signal name Function Application method TRIG Execute Measure Turn ON this signal from the PLC to send a command to Command ment execute a measurement response com This signal returns to OFF when the Command Execution munications Active BUSY signal goes ON DSA Data Output Turn ON this signal from the PLC to request data output Data output Request Bit When this signal turns ON the Vision Sensor outputs after measure
331. ettings Do not exceed 255 characters in the expression Item Description Const Press this to input constants or a mathematical operator The following operators can be used addition subtraction x multiplication and division Data Press this to use measurement data reference values and judgement results of other items Math Press this to use functions Expression Notation Expressions must have the following notation Is x E Text string corresponding to the item position correction data inspection item or calculation settings Filter item or position compensation item Enter P and the item number Inspection item inspection item number calculation settings data ZO Example Finding the distance between the centers of gravity of inspection item 1 and inspection item 2 using a function DIST I1 X I1 Y 12 X 12 Y L l Inspection item data Function Example Subtracting 120 from the calculation result of expression 0 DOO 120 00 Constant Mathematical operator Result of expression 0 ies Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Example Adding the judgement result of inspection items 0 and 1 lOJG JG L Eo Judgement result for inspection item 1 Mathematical operator Judgement result for inspection item 0 Function List The following functions can be used in calculations Function Description
332. f the object position varies in the image this delay cannot be used to make the object position more stable When you use a trigger delay with external lighting you will also need to adjust the timing to turn ON external lighting Delay time Delay from when the trigger is input until when Sensor input is started Trigger input Sensor p gt Image Trigger setup Trigger delay 1 A TRIG signal is input Images are input continuously 2 Select the image with the measurement object in the center using a and gG Press the image 4 Press OK Note The delay time can be set using the adjustment bar or by directly entering a value Trigger delay Input the TRIG signal Move the bar to the left or right Or Directly input the delay time Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting External Lighting Timing When you use a trigger delay you must adjust the timing to turn ON external lighting so that it matches the trigger delay timing Using a Strobe Trigger Signal to Control External Lighting If a Sensor Data Unit is connected you can change the output time of the strobe trigger signal STGOUT to adjust the timing of the external lighting LT Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 270 p gt Image Camera setup lt q Lightning control Preventing Mutual Interference of Multiple Sensors When the same tri
333. f the K Touch Finder slide the cover in the direction of the arrow and open the battery cover 2 Face the rounded side of the battery toward the back of the Touch Finder and insert the battery Do not insert the battery in the wrong orientation 3 Close the battery cover slide the battery cover in the direc lt lt tion of the arrow and tighten the screw on the battery cov er 4 Attach the AC adapter to the Touch Finder to start changing CHARGE indicator the battery The CHARGE indicator will be lit while the battery is being charged It will go out when charging the battery has been com pleted The Touch Finder will operate even if the AC adapter is connected when no battery is mounted in the Touch Finder FQ2 User s Manual Wiring c suo osuuo pue uonejjesu 52 e If the Touch Finder FQ D31 will be installed permanently or semi permanently remove the Battery FQ BAT 1 If the rated temperature is exceeded with the Battery inserted the protective circuit may activate and stop the Touch Finder e The battery complies with the following recycling regulation Japan EU Taiwan S H 5 e California regulations concerning perchlorate This product is a lithium battery that contains perchlorate which is regulated by the State of California Please com ply with these regulations For details see the following URL www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Wiring FQ2 User s Manual 2 5 Setti
334. fficient_a_of_line coefficient_b_of_line coefficient_c_of_line Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Setting Judgement Parameters for Expressions 1 Press Judgement on the Settings Tab Page imepeatcalen agian Judgement 2 Press an expression between 0 to 31 and set the cor responding judgement parameters using the slider 3 Press the OK Button Reflecting the Judgement Results for Expressions to the Overall Judgement Results You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of a calculation in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt Inspect Calculation Details Tab Page Output parameter Reflect FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 161 suonoedsu dN Buijes Y 162 Inspection Item Data That Can Be Used in Expressions Inspection item Data name Expression text Data range Default string Filter Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Shape Sear pos Judgement JG 2 No judgement not measured 2 comp 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG Scroll X DX 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll Y DY 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Scroll 6 DT 180 to 180 0 Position X x 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Position Y Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 0 Angle TH 180 to 180
335. fi cations Connection Special connector cables Special connector cables method Power supply and I O 1 cable Power supply I O and Sensor data units 1 cable FQ WD and FQ WwWDODI FQa wuo00 Touch Finder and computer 1 Touch Finder and computer 1 cable FQ WNLILIL cable FQ WN Indications BUSY indicator BUSY green Judgement result indicator OR orange error indicator ERROR red Ethernet communications indicator ETN orange Note The assignment of the BUSY indicator can be changed to a RUN indicator display color green Ratings Power supply 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple voltage Insulation resis Between all lead wires and case 0 5 MQ at 250 V tance Current con 2 4 A max 0 3 A max sumption Environ Ambient temper Operating 0 to 50 C Operating 0 to 40 C Storage 25 to 65 C mental ature range Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation immunity with no icing or condensation Ambient humid Operating and storage 35 to 85 with no condensation ity range Ambient atmo No corrosive gas sphere Vibration resis 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions gt h Ee tance destruc 8 min each 10 times ge tion Q Shock resis 150 m s 3 times each in 6 direction up down right left forward and backward G tance destruc N tion Degree of pro IEC 60529 IP67 Except when Polarizing Filter Attachment is mounted IEC 60529 IP40 NO tection or connector cap is
336. following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Reference width The reference edge width is set automatically Step 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Width Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Set the D Width range for an OK judgement Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are displayed The measured value is dis played beside the parameter name You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display iD neo Blue for OK Red for NG 3 gt Press OK to enter the value Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement parameters Edge width edge in When the result type is set to relative Set the upper and lower limits of the width values reference width for an OK judgement Range 99 999 9999 or 99 999 999 Default Upper limit 99 999 9999 Lower limit 99 999 9999 When the result type is set to ratios Range 0 000 to 999 9999 Default Upper limit 999 9999 Lower limit 0 000 128 Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Note e You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result t
337. g Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 137 Edge level Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sition 139 Noise level Setting Acqui 5 to 442 5 sition 461 z L seolpueddy External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 190 Judge Edge width upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9 Adjust judge ment sition 99 999 9999 999 ment _ condi 191 tions Edge width lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 0 sition 99 999 9999 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON _ tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for edge width sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Edge width display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 800 Wedge width display Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Relative 0 pattern sition value 2 Percentage Edge Pitch External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 J
338. g Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 269 8 UONDEUUOD J lleIed e UM e eq Buiynd no pue uogesado BuljjosjuoD 270 Changing the Settings of the I O Signals Changing the Settings of the Output Signals Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing You can change the timing of outputting the measurement result with the OR signal after finalizing the measurement result according to the needs of the external device LT Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 242 Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions You change the ON condition for the OR signal to turn ON the signal when the judgement result is OK or when itis NG O Changing the Judgement Output ON Condition p 244 Adjusting the End Timing of the BUSY Signal You can change the end timing of the BUSY signal O Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 244 Changing the Output Polarity of the Output Signals You can change the ON OFF output polarity of the output signals p gt In Out I O setting I O Output 1 Press Output polarity and select the ON OFF polarity for all output signals Item Parameter Description Output polarity Positive default You can reverse the ON OFF conditions of the output signals Negative For example when the BUSY signal uses positive polarity the signal is ON while the Sensor is processing something If you change the setting to negative polarity the Sensor will be ready to receive data or
339. ge Image Following Fill Outline Increasing Processing Speed for Area Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time 7 Changing the measurement region p 102 Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error AR Area This is the area in the measurement region 0 to 999999999 9999 with the specified color X Gravity X This is the X coordinate of the center of the 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 measurement area with the specified color Y Gravity Y This is the Y coordinate of the center of the 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 measurement area with the specified color SA Reference area This is the area with the specific color to be 0 to 999999999 measured when a range is set SX Ref point X reference This is the X coordinate of the center of 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 point X gravity when a range is set SY Ref point Y reference This is the Y coordinate of the center of 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 point Y grav
340. gger signal is input to multiple Sensors the lighting from one Sensor may affect the measurements of the other Sensors This is called mutual interference This kind of interference can be prevented offsetting the image input timing of each Sensor from when the trigger signal is received Example A trigger i e the TRIG signal is input to Sensor 0 and Sensor 1 at the same time TRIG signal Sensor 0 Bz J Timing of taking the image Trigger Sensor a Sensor 0 if A No trigger delaY iming of taking the image i I Sensor J LE n a I Sensor 1 trigger delay Sensor 0 immediately begins image input when the trigger is input Sensor 1 begins image input after the specified time has passed 1 Change to the setup for to Sensor 1 DIr se 2 Press Image Trigger setup Trigger delay 3 Set the trigger input delay time for Sensor 1 iarta Input the TRIG signal Cr se The delay time for preventing mutual interference must be longer than the shutter time When the lighting built into the Sensor is used the shutter time is 4 ms max Therefore make the delay at least 4 ms FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images s bewj uiye L 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Image Adjustment You can adjust the image that is taken by the Sensor to make it easy to measure There are mainly the following two types of items that you can use to adjust the image e
341. gh a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Setup Tool FQ2 S300000 Touch Finder FQ2 S30 or PC Tool Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Special Ethernet Cable RJ45 M12 Parallel cable for FQ SDU1 Sensor Data Unit cable 24 V power supply Connection with Standard Parallel Interface of the Vision Sensor Setup Tool Touch Finder or PC Tool jooo0 o00 I O cable Special Ethernet Cable RJ45 M12 24 V power supply RS 232C Serial Connection Setup Tool FQ2 S3 000 Touch Finder FQ2 30 000 or PC Tool RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit RS 232C cable Sensor Data Unit cable Special Ethernet Cable RJ45 M12 Parallel cable for FQ SDU2 24 V power supply Connecting More Than One Sensors FQ2 Vision Sensors 8 max Setup Tool gt Touch Finder wid an ay or PC Tool UP QP Special Ethernet Cable Switching Hub RJ45 M12 The Setup Tool can detect up to 32 Sensors and it can connect to up to eight Sensors at the same time System Configuration amp i Trigger sensor 1 O control PLC FL STC amenan FL series Lighting Controller External Li
342. ght to Dark 1 Dark to Light 177 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 1 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 190 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 191 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 192 Edge midpoint posit
343. ghting 24 V power supply ri Trigger sensor Sensor control PLC 1 0 control PLC FL STC Lighting Controller FL series External Lighting E 24 V power supp iL Trigger sensor Sensor control PLC 1 0 control PLC FL STC Lighting Controller ny FL series External Lighting 24 V power supply mil Sensor control PLC gt p Trigger sensor Sensor control PLC 1 0 control PLC FL STC Lighting Controller ny FL series External Lighting FQ2 User s Manual Product Model number Remarks FQ Vision Sensor FQ2 S l This is the Vision Sensor FQ2 S3Ll Touch Finder FQ2 D This is a setup console PC Tool The PC Tool can be used instead of the Touch Finder If you register as a member you can download the free PC Tool as a special service to purchasers Refer to the Member Registration Sheet that is enclosed with the Sensor for the member registration procedure and the download procedure for special member soft ware Parallel Interface FQ SDU1 You can connect a Sensor Data Unit
344. ging from Setup Mode to Run Mode the current settings for Dis play position are saved in the Touch Finder Therefore the next time the same Sensors are connected they will be displayed in the same positions If a previously connected Sensor is not detected either the display position will be blank or if Auto sensor detection is set to ON the Touch Finder will display another Sensor that it has detected If a previously connected Sensor is then detected by the Touch Finder it will display the image from it in the previous display position FQ2 User s Manual Connecting to More Than One Sensor 207 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data There are two ways to log data Recent results logging Data is temporarily saved in memory inside the Sensor File logging Large amounts of data are saved in SD cards or other external media The amounts and types of data that can be logged depend on the logging method that is used as shown in the following table Logged data Logged quantity Recent results logging File logging Statistical data One value The average value of the mea Not possible surement results in the collected measure ment data is continuously updated Measurement data 1 000 measurement values max 2 Up to the capacity of the external memory Image data 20 images max A For recent results logging the oldest data is overwritten when the maximum number of
345. h II inspection item judges whether an image is OK or NG according to the correlation with a previously registered image pattern For this reason if the object is at an angle the correlation is reduced and the image may be judged as NG To achieve an OK judgement for the same image pattern even when the object is at an angle the rotation range must be widened p gt Inspect Inspection Shape Search II Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter 1 Set Rotation to Yes 2 Press Angle range and set the following range Parameter Setting Description Angle range Range 180 to 180 A shape search II is performed within the set angle range Default Lower limit 180 The larger the angle range the longer the processing time Upper limit 180 If you change the angle range perform teaching again CO p s6 Searching for Other Locations If the model image consists of detailed graphic images similar models may be detected In that case set the model mode to Stable p gt Inspect Inspection Shape Search II Modify Details Tab Page Model parameter Model mode Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Low Contrast Adjust the brightness to improve the contrast of the mark 7 Adjust the brightness p 61 Correlation Is Inconsistent Due to Variations in the Measurement Object Inconsistent portions can be masked so that they are omitted from matching B Model masking p
346. hanging the Measurement Region p 102 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text Data name Description Data range string JG Judgement This is the Labeling judgement results 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error x Number of labels This is the number of labels found 0 to 100 TAR Total label area This is the total area of all labels found 0 to 999 999 999 9999 AR 0 to AR 99 Area These are the areas of each individual label 0 to 999 999 999 9999 X 0 to X 99 Gravity X These are the X coordinates of the center of 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 each label Y 0 to Y 99 Gravity Y These are the Y coordinates of the center of 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 each label ATH O to ATH 99 Master angle These are the master angle of the center of each label 180 to 180 SA Reference area This is the reference area 0 to 999 999 999 9999 SX Ref position X refer This is the X coordinate of the reference posi 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 ence position X tion SY Ref position Y refer This is the Y coordinate of the reference posi 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 ence position
347. hat is set for multi point output for the inspec tion item FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 331 jeusay y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 332 Output Data Size and Number of Output Data Upper Value Setting When more than one inspection result is output the size of the data that is output for the data output settings could exceed the limit that is set in the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting If that occurs increase the set value of the number of output data upper value setting or adjust the output data settings so that data output size is not exceeded If the size of data that is output does exceed the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting the remaining data will be discarded Example Output data size 328 bytes Number of output data upper value setting 256 bytes Data Output Settings Output data Setting Data 0 10 X 0 Inspection item 0 Position X for Search Data 1 10 Y 0 Inspection item 0 Position Y for Search Data 2 LPC Inspection item 1 Position X 1st point for Shape Search Il 0 30 11 X 11 Y Inspection item 1 Position X 30th point for Shape Search II Inspection item 1 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II 328 bytes Inspection item 1 Position Y 30th point for Shape Search II Data 3 LPR Inspection item 2 Position X 1st point for Shape Search Il 0 10 12 X 12 Y Inspection item 2 Position Y 1st po
348. he GATE ON delay plus the output time and shorter than the measurement interval If you set a value that is longer than the measurement interval the output timing will become delayed as measurements are repeated Output period 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms 1 0 ms default Set the time from when the result is output to the parallel interface until the GATE signal turns ON This is the time to wait until the data output stabilizes Set a value that is longer than the delay time of the external device GATE ON delay Output time 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to None or Sync 5 0 ms default output Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal Set the time that is required for the external device to read the measurement results Timeout 0 5 to 120 0 s This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to Handshaking 10 0 s default A timeout error will occur at the following times if there is no response from the external device within the time that is set When the DSA signal turns ON after measurements are completed When the DSA signal turns OFF after the GATE signal turns ON When the DSA signal turns ON after the GATE signal turns OFF This setting is enabled only when the Output control parameter is set to Sync output Set the number of times to ignore the STEP signal turning ON between when the STEP signal turns ON and the measurement result
349. he Y coordinate X Position X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered CR Correlation This is the correlation 0 to 100 FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 79 sobew uiye L 80 Edge Position Compensation This position compensation item detects an edge in the set direction If the specified color is detected or the specified density is detected for a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera it is recognized as an edge When an edge is recognized the image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Measurement region Edge search direction Registered position of the edge The image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it Color of edge to be found was registered p gt Image Image adjustment Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp Press Edge Edge position comp Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Edge Position Compensation
350. he first Sensor that is detected will be displayed BA Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously p 225 Auto default Automatically adjusts the display according to the number of Sensors that are detected If more than one Sensor is detected the images from up to eight Sensors are displayed at the same time If eight Sensors are connected the display is the same as that for Multi sensor Specifying Sensor Display Positions for Multiple Sensors Multi Sensor or Auto Only If Startup screen type is set to Multi sensor or Auto 1 you can specify the position of the image on a split display for each Sensor that is displayed i This can be done only when the maximum number of Sensors eight are connected p gt Run Mode Sensor monitor Multi sensor 1 Press lt Display position on the right of the dis play 2 Press the display of the Sensor for which to specify the display position A list of numbers for the display positions will be displayed 3 Selecta number from the list of display positions The display for the Sensor will be displayed in the posi tion that corresponds to the specified number 206 E Cance Connecting to More Than One Sensor FQ2 User s Manual Note The display positions that are set with Display position are cleared when the power supply to the Touch Finder is turned OFF However if the Sensor status is changed by chan
351. he image will be bright If Range 0 to 10 the gain is low the image will be dark Default 0 For FQ2 S1 or FQ2 S2 Range 16 to 64 Default 16 e To ensure stable operation when the FQ2 S1 or FQ2 S2 is connected we recommend that you set the gain to 16 e If the recommended value is exceeded the brightness will not be stable and measurement values may be inconsistent We recommend that you turn ON the Brightness Connection Mode e If a slow shutter speed 1 1 to 1 10 and a high gain are set fixed pattern noise fleck and striped noise will sometimes occur Be sure to thoroughly check the images and the measurement results when you set the shutter speed and gain When HDR Is ON Set the brightness adjustment value The higher the brightness adjustment value the brighter the image Dark Bright _ l Brightness of image Jt e 0 100 p gt Image Camera setup sobew uiye L 1 Press lt q Brightness on the right side of the display 2 gt Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the bright ness Moving it to the right will make the image brighter while moving it to the left will reduce the brightness of the im age 3 Press OK Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects For quick moving objects the effect of blurring can be reduced by decreasing the shutter speed In HDR Mode set the brightness value to a low setting e Relationship between Shutter Speed and the Brightness Adjustment Value
352. he two detected edge positions matches the position when the edges were registered Registered position of the edge Measurement region for edge 0 Edge search direction for edge 0 Midpoint position center of a line that connects positions 1 and 2 Measurement region for edge 1 Edge search direction for edge 1 Color of edge to be found gt Image Image adjustment 1 Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Detected edge positions positions 1 and 2 The image is adjusted so that the midpoint appears at the position it was in when it was registered 83 s bewj uiye L 84 2 Press Edge 2Edge midpoint comp 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Two edge Midpoint Compensation below 4 Press OK 5 Press Back e Detailed Settings for Two edge Midpoint Compensation The settings for the Two edge Midpoint Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position inspection item LO 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item p 120 However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching Set the measurement regions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt
353. hich the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Clear Measurement Values Command Code 0010 2010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0010 0000 0001 0000 Command code a 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG o Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Clear Data Output Buffer Command Code 2020 0010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0010 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0010 0000 0010 0000 Command code s wo f owo oo f ooo aea mma eaa 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Command execution result 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Save Data in Sensor Command Code 0010 3010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0011 0000 0001 0000 Command code s wo f owo f oor f ooo aaae aa eaaa me 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code
354. i 0 Data logging OFF 0 position Y sition 1 Data logging ON 321 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 Y display sition 702 Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 704 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 437 z L seolpueddy 438 Edge Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Scroll X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DX Logged data only 99 999 9999 6 Scroll Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 DY Logged data only 99 999 9999 7 Edge position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X Logged data only 99 999 9999 8 Edge position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y Logged data only 99 999
355. ified time after the GATE eee nee are completed a signal turns OFF a timeout error will occur timeout error will occur Timeout Time 2 If the DSA signal does not turn OFF within the specified time after the GATE signal turns ON a timeout error will occur 1 Turn ON the TRIG signal while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 Measurement begins and the BUSY signal is turned ON during the measurement process 3 When the measurement has been finished the measurement result is output using an OR signal and the BUSY signal is turned OFF You can also set the BUSY output parameter so that the BUSY signal is turned OFF after the completion of data logging image logging or displaying results 4 Turn ON the DSA signal from the external device to request data transmission after you have confirmed that the BUSY signal is OFF 2 If you do not turn ON the DSA signal within the specified timeout time after measurements are completed a timeout error will occur This is timeout time 1 5 When the DSA signal turns ON the DO to D31 signals are output and the GATE signal is turned ON a 6 When the DSA signal is turned OFF the GATE signal turns OFF 3 3 If you do not turn OFF the DSA signal within the specified timeout time after the GATE signal turns ON a timeout error will occur This is timeout time 2 7 If more than one data item is being output for one measurement and you do not turn ON the DSA signal within the specified timeout tim
356. ightness correction When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the brightness will be consistent but the timing when images are taken will be delayed by 25 ms Make sure that appropriate images of the measured objects are taken when the Brightness Correction Mode is ON Timing Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is ON Taking images begins 25 ms after the TRIG signal is input TRIG signal ON Brightness OFF Correction ON t NON for 1 ms min Yy ON o Koe BUSY signal OFF ON while the measurement process is being executed OJ Reference Timing Chart When the Brightness Correction Mode Is OFF p 236 If the gain is increased the brightness will not be stable and measurement values may be inconsistent We recommend that you turn ON the Brightness Connection Mode FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality 61 sobew uiye L When HDR Is OFF The brightness of the image is adjusted by adjusting the shutter speed If the brightness cannot be improved by adjusting the shutter speed the gain is adjusted Relationship between the Shutter Speed Gain and the Image Brightness Dark Bright Brightness of image 1 60000 V 1 1 lt i 0 10 gt Gain lt q Note e Adjust the shutter speed not only to adjust the brightness of the image but also to adjust for the travel speed of the measurement object LT Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects p 63 Increasing the gain will make
357. ignal eI OD e turned OFF sent lt 3 Measurement results output The overall judgement OR is output even if the DSA signal is not output by the external device DSA Signal The DSA signal is used by the external device to request the next data transmission The Sensor will not output data until the DSA signal is turned ON Turn ON the DSA signal at the following time e When the external device is ready to receive data e When the Sensor has completed measurements The BUSY signal will be ON while measurements are being executed Therefore you can monitor the status of the BUSY signal to detect when measurements have been completed Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Timing Chart Example Three Data Items Set for Parallel Data Output Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF ON OFF i ON while measurements are being processed ON 4 depends on BUSY output conditions BUSY signal OFF OR signal Overall judgement Output when measurements have been completed regardless of the DSA signal DO to signals nN Ha LN ON CO ao GATE signal ft os f ir i OFF L n h GATE Doa I ONdelay ON a mi j i DSA signal 1 i i OFF r N Timeout Time 3 Timeout Time 1 If more than one data item is being output for one measurement and the DSA signal does not turn n RES na oee no E ON ON within the spec
358. ignal will remain ON while continuous measure ments are being performed 3 When measurement results are output the GATE signal is turned ON when the time that is set in the GATE ON delay parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 4 TheGATE signal is turned ON and then the GATE signal is turned OFF when the time that is set in the Output time parameter in the communications settings has elapsed 1 Set the GATE ON delay and output time for the GATE signal so that the total time does not exceed the output period 5 Continuous measurements end when the IN7 signal is turned OFF Note The ERROR signal will turn ON if the input command is not executed normally Set at least one data output for parallel judgement output and then read the OR signal when the GATE signal turns ON FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 265 8 UONDEUUOD a eseg e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado Buljjojuog 266 Outputting Measurement Results for Data Send Requests from the External Device Handshaking With handshaking measurement results are output after there is a data send request DSA signal from the external device Handshaking is effective for sequentially outputting many measurement results and it is a reliable way to transfer data 1 Measurement i processing External device 4 completed T BUSY signal E alll 2 DSA s
359. ill in the labels detected through color extraction or binary conversion to perform a stable extraction of the labels and their characteristics or to mark only labels inside the measurement region for inspection p gt Inspect Inspection Labeling Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 To enable filling up holes press Filling up holes and select Yes Filling up holes 2 Toextractan image press Extract image and select maa Extraction condit lon Yes Sorting method Area descending order Parameter Setting Description Filling up holes Yes Sets how to process areas surrounded by the specified color If Yes No default is set those areas are processed as the specified color Input Image Filled Image Extract image Yes No default Select this option if there are areas of the specified color inside the measurement region that you do not want to measure If Yes is set all areas outside the measurement region are cut out as the specified color Measurement region Yes You need toknowthe You can find the position position and area of and area of the center label this label if you set the sort condition to sort by descending order of area Areas outside the measurement region are set to the color for measure ment Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Changing the Label Extraction Conditions Set the label ex
360. image for the first filter item for image processing If you execute more than one filter item for the image set the source image for the other filter items to the previous image Also you can perform image processing with filter items only to enable processing with position compensation items In that case only the position information from position compensation is applied to the image to be measured For details refer to Using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items on page 76 Filtering the Images Filter Items You can filter the images that are taken by the Camera to make them easier to measure This is used in the following cases e To cut unnecessary backgrounds so that they are not measured e To remove noise e To stably find the edges of marks when other edges have been clearly extracted Applicable Filters Selected filter item Description Color Gray Filter only for Sen sors with Color Cameras Converts an image that was input from a Color Camera to a monochrome image Example You can extract an image that contains only a specific color Extracting an Image That Contains Only Red Note e This inspection item cannot be used for monochrome images An NG image error will result if you use it for a monochrome image All inspection items after the Color Gray Filter item will be performed in the same way as when a Monochrome Camera is connected
361. in HDR Mode Fast Moving speed Slow 0 V Brightness 100 4 Shutter speed gt 1 60 000 1 250 Refer to the following page for the setting methods for the shutter speed and brightness O Adjusting the Brightness p 61 FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting Image Quality 63 64 The lower the shutter speed gain and brightness settings are the darker the image becomes If the Sensor is used in a dark environment make sure that the darkness of the image does not cause the measurements to be unstable Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and other Shiny Surfaces When objects with shiny surfaces are being measured the lighting may be reflected off the surface and affect the image To remove reflections one of the following two functions can be used Function Description HDR High Dynamic Range If objects have contrasting light and dark areas the dynamic range can be made wider to improve the quality of the images Polarizing filter for Sensors Specular reflections can be eliminated from an image by attaching a polarizing filter to the with Built in Lighting Sensor If the measurement object must be moving use a polarizing filter Also if reflections can not be sufficiently removed by using the HDR function use a polarizing filter as well HDR Function The HDR function is used for objects that have a large difference between light and dark areas For this kind of object clear i
362. in is low the image will be Range 0 to 10 default 0 dark For FQ2 S1 FQ2 S2 Range 16 to 64 default 16 Brightness Sets the brightness level of the image for 1 to 100 Scene p 63 HDR mode HDR Mode HDR Suppresses reflections and differences OFF default Level 1 to Level4 Scene p 64 in brightness Brightness correc Use to stabilize the brightness ON or OFF default Scene p 65 tion White balance Corrects differences in coloring between AUTO Scene p 65 the image and the actual object R 0 001 to 7 999 G 0 001 to 7 999 B 0 001 to 7 999 Partial input Used to make the image input range FQ SHIL 752x8 to 752x480 Scene p 173 smaller FQ S 08L 928x8 to 928x828 FQS3L1 1280x8 to 1280x1024 Rotate 180 You can rotate the Camera image by ON or OFF default Scene p 230 180 Calibration setting Sets a registered calibration pattern Unregistered default New Calibra Scene p 199 tion or Calibration Data 0 to 31 Strobe output delay Sets the delay time for the strobe output 0 to 65 535 us default 0 us Scene p 270 5 signal STGOUT in response to the trig ger signal 2 S Strobe output time Sets the output time of the strobe output 0 to 65 535 us default 1 000 ps Scene p 270 D signal STGOUT 5 Trigger delay Adjusts the time until the Camera shutter 0 to 163 ms default 0 System p 66 z opens after the trigger signal is received o D 2 oes Menu Tables FQ2 User s M
363. inate of the partial input end point FQ S Range 7 to 479 Default 0 FQ SHOOO 08 Range 7 to 827 Default 0 e FQ2 S3L1 Range 7 to 1 023 Default 0 FQ2 User s Manual Shortening the Measurement Takt Time 173 sbum s Bulaes pue Bus G 174 Note The minimum input widths are 16 for the X axis and 8 for the Y axis e The values of the monitor display positions are displayed for the coordinates in the measurement results The coordinate values will not change as a result of the partial input settings If you use partial input perform teaching again Partial input on the X axis is supported only by the FQ2 S3L1 Changing the Image Input Mode Pixel sampling can be applied to the input image to reduce image input time p gt Image Camera setup Image input mode Parameter Setting Description Image Input High speed or Standard Pixel sampling can be applied to the input image to Mode Default for FQ2 S1 or FQ2 S2 High speed Default for reduce image input time FQ2 S3 Standard If you change the image input mode perform teaching again Shortening the Measurement Takt Time FQ2 User s Manual 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters Adjusting Judgement Parameters While Looking at Measurement Results If correct judgements are not possible you can
364. inder LT Setting Up Ethernet p 53 22 Startup Display and Display Elements FQ2 User s Manual Display Elements This Sensor has a Setup Mode and a Run Mode Refer to the following information for menu items LT p 404 Setup Mode In Setup Mode you can set the image conditions judgement parameters and I O settings for the Sensor The name of the mode or the The name of the Sensor being set up is displayed menu hierarchy is displayed The selected scene number is displayed 3 The menu changes according to the selected tab page e Buttons will appear on the right according to the mode e If the lt q Button appears pressing it will display the sub menu or commands mE seien The setup flow is shown by these five tabs Hor Image Used to adjust the image Inspect Used to set the inspection items In Out Used to set the I O Test Used to test and adjust the set measurements Run Used to switch to Run Mode This button menu is always displayed Only image Button Used to select either displaying the camera image and messages or only the camera image mR Display Button Used to select the source of the image or to zoom the image O Display Functions p 200 A Capture Button Used to capture the current screen to the SD card O p 224 ce Tool Button Used to call functions such as saving data or select scenes Note The Display Button can be used to switch between
365. ineering and for visible administrative procedures not emission practicable and MPE Required for exceeded non visible emission Protective No requirements Sometimes Specific clothing required requirements Training No require Class 1M as_ No require Class 2Mas Required for all operator and maintenance ments for Class 3R ments for Class3R personnel see note 3 Note 1 This table is intended to provide a convenient summary of requirements See text of this standard for complete precautions 2 Class 1M laser products that failed condition 1 of table10 of the standard Not required for Class 1M laser products that failed condition 2 of table10 of the standard See the text for details 3 Class 2M laser products that failed condition 1 of table10 of the standard Not required for Class 2M laser products that failed condition 2 of table10 of the standard See the text for details 500 Requirements from Regulations and Standards FQ2 User s Manual Definitions of Laser Classification For Europe Laser Product Classifications EN Class Description Class 1 Laser that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing Class 1M Laser emitting in the wavelength range from 302 5 nm to 4000 nm which are safe under reasonably fore seeable conditions of operation but may be hazardous if the user employs optics within the bea
366. ing Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 188 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 1 sition 99 999 9999 ment 190 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 191 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 192 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 193 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgeme
367. ing Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Note The timing for updating the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing can be adjusted LT Adjusting the judgement output timing p 242 Getting Individual Judgements and Expression Judgements Up to three judgement results of individual inspection items item judgement signals ORO to OR31 and expression judgements expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement can be assigned to terminals OUTO to OUT2 and output to external devices Output terminal Default assignment Output signals that can be assigned OUTO OR Total judgement Control signals OR BUSY ERROR READY and RUN STG strobe trigger OUT1 BUSY Item judgements ORO Item 0 judgement to OR31 OUT2 ERROR Item 31 judgement Expression judgements Expression 0 judgement to expression 31 judgement The timing for updating the ORO to OR31 signals and the ON time after judgement processing can be changed LT Jadiusting the judgement output timing p 242 Wiring Example Signals are assigned to terminals OUTO to OUT2 as shown below e OUTO Item 2 judgement OR2 e OUT1 Item 5 judgement ORS e OUT2 Item 14 judgement OR14 Color Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Black OUTO OR2 Outputs the judgement for Refer to the following information for signal wiring O
368. ing Recent Measurement Trends Recent Results Logging p 214 Automatically Changing to the Display for Any Sensor with an NG Result You can change the settings to automatically display the Sensor for which the measurement result is NG if more than one Sensor is connected p Run Mode Sensor monitor NG Sensor Hiding the Menu You can hide the menu and display only the image on the Touch Finder or PC Tool to check the part of the image hidden behind the menu If you press the icon again the menu will be displayed gt Setup Mode or Run Mode Turning ON OFF the Touch Finder Backlight You can use Eco Mode to turn OFF the LCD backlight and reduce the power consumed by the Touch Finder whenever there is no operation on the Touch Finder for 30 seconds or longer The LCD backlight will turn ON whenever any part of the touch panel is pressed gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings LCD Backlight ECO mode Changing the Brightness of the Touch Finder The brightness of the LCD backlight can be changed to any of five levels gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings LCD Backlight Brightness Display Functions FQ2 User s Manual 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O Status You can check if the I O connections are working normally p gt In Out I O monitor I O monitor 1 The I O status of the external devices will be dis Input Signals TRIG and INO to IN5 played Sign
369. ing control 271 live images 200 Log 201 logging deleting log 216 recent results 214 selecting data to be logged 210 settings 209 starting and stopping 213 Logging image file 201 M MAC address 422 426 macro rings 38 masking 101 Master angle 148 Max pitch maximum pitch 133 Max width maximum pitch 133 measurement data logging 208 measurement images 143 149 measurement region 102 110 117 measurement time 172 measurements continuous 237 246 Median 69 Memory state 230 menus hiding 202 Min pitch minimum pitch 133 Min width minimum pitch 133 Model model position compensation 74 models 95 mounting control panel 39 DIN Track 39 41 mounting base 30 34 Mounting Bracket 29 mounting holes 30 Multi point output 97 mutual interference prevention 67 N Negative 245 270 noise level 123 no protocol command 395 gos Index NPN Number of labels One shot output operation operation indicators BUSY CHARGE ERROR ETN OR POWER SD ACCESS Touch Finder Vision Sensor optical charts optical diagrams OR OR output OR signal OR NOT OUTO to OUT3 output polarity OUT1 Polarity Output delay Output mode Output polarity Output time outputs BUSY ERROR OR OUTO OUT1 OUT2 overall judgement Panel Mounting Adapter Parallel Cable for FQ SDU1 Parallel Cable for FQ SDU2 parallel data output parallel I O connector 43 49 148 243 179 30 29 30 31 29 30 31 29 30 29 30 31 31
370. ing items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 3 10 X 10 Y LPC 0 10 C 10 X 10 Y Const Used to insert numbers and symbols into the expression Data Used to select the inspection items for which to output data and insert the parameters to output into the expression Example Selecting Parameters for the Search Item at Inspection Item 0 Inspection item 10 Search Judgement result Judgement JG Correlation Corre CR Math Either of the following two functions can be inserted LPR function order of the measurement data The measurement data is output in order Format LPR start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 e LPC function order of the detection points Data is output for each detected measurement point Format LPC start_number number_of_data data_1 data_2 data_5 You can omit data 2 to data 5 To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor SD PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Expression Setting Example This example registers an expression to output the following inspection results for data 0 Inspection item 0 Search Parameters to output Position X Position Y Reference SX and Reference SY Multi point output setting Multi point output Check Bo
371. inspection item Only the Sub pixel and the Multi point output settings of the Search item are not included in the settings of the Search Position Compensation item Make the settings for teaching and the judgement conditions in the same way as for the Search item 4 4 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item p 95 Also the following settings are included only in the Shape Search Position Compensation Item e Rotation This setting is used to enable rotating the image to correct p gt Image Image adjustment Shape Sear pos comp Modify 1 Press Details Model parameter 2 Set Rotation to either Yes or No Parameter Setting Description Rotation No default Specify whether to automatically create several patterns of rotated images and use Yes them to measure the image The processing time will increase if you enable rotation processing e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing 7 Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken iT sobew uiye L 78 If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Shape Sear pos comp Modify 1 Press Details Scroll parameter Interpolation 2 Set
372. int for Shape Search II Inspection item 2 Position X 10th point for Shape Search II Inspection item 2 Position Y 10th point for Shape Search II The output data that is assigned is output to the output area as shown below Any output data that exceeds the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting 256 bytes is discarded PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Offset from first address in output area Output data Assigned output data 0 1 Output data 0 4 bytes Inspection item 0 Position X for Search 2 3 4 5 Output data 1 4 bytes Output data 2 Inspection item 0 Position Y for Search Inspection item 1 Position X 1st point for Shape Search II 4 bytes 62 63 Output data 31 4 bytes Inspection item 1 Position X 30th point for Shape Search II 64 65 Output data 32 Inspection item 1 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II 4 bytes 122 123 124 125 Output data 61 4 bytes Output data 62 4 bytes Inspection item 1 Inspection item 2 Position Y 30th point for Shape Search II Position X 1st point for Shape Search II 126 127 Output data 63 4 bytes Inspection item 2 Position Y 1st point for Shape Search II 128 129 Output data 64 Inspection item 2 Position X 2nd point for Shape Search II 4
373. ion Charging method Charged in Touch Finder FQ D31 Charging time 2h Usage time 1 5h Battery backup life 300 charging cycles Weight 50 g max 4 This value is only a guideline No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by operating conditions 2 This is a guideline for the time required for the capacity of the Battery to be reduced to 60 of the initial capacity No guarantee is implied The value will be affected by the operating environment and operating conditions Specifications and Dimensions FQ2 User s Manual Dimensions FQ2 D30 D31 Unit mm i i 19 2 1 Provided on the FQ2 D31 only FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions 481 z L seoipueddy Panel Mounting Adapter FQ XPM Unit mm 36 9 7 116 95 ry Y Co C
374. ion Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 193 Edge midpoint position Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 194 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 195 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 196 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 197 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Dat
375. ion 99 999 9999 ment 140 Mea Detection mode for Setting Acqui 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to 0 sure Monochrome Sensor _ sition Light ment condition 145 Judge Edge position offset Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 146 tions Edge position offset Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 460 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON X 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 _ detected edge position sition 1 Data logging ON Y 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for standard position X sition 1 Data logging ON
376. ion commands Utility commands 280F 00102010 Clears the measurement values p 380 280F 00102040 Clears the error output status error signal and p 380 error indicator 280F 00103010 Saves the settings data to the Sensor p 381 280F 00104010 Re registers the models for registered Search p 381 and Color Data inspection items 280F 0010F010 Restarts the Sensor p 382 280F 00104020 Executes teaching for all applicable inspection p 382 items Scene control com 280F 00201000 Acquires the current scene number p 383 mands 280F 00301000 Changes the scene number being used p 384 Data acquisition setting 280F 00401010 Acquires image adjustment data p 385 commands 280F 00501010 Sets image adjustment data p 386 280F 00401020 Acquires the inspection item data p 387 280F 00501020 Sets the inspection item data p 388 280F 00403000 Acquires the version information of the Sensor p 389 software 280F 00205000 Acquires the latest error code of the Sensor p 389 HE Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual FINS Command Details Executing Measurements 280F 00101010 This command executes one measurement If Ethernet output is not set only the measurement is performed If Ethernet output is set the measurement is performed and the result is returned as response data Command Format MRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 4 bytes 28 00101
377. ion data The file name extension is CGP MSD Touch Finder data The file name extension is MSD sensor_name LOGIMAGE Image data The file name extension is IFZ sensor_name LOGDATA Statistical data and measurement data The file name extension is CSV CAPTURE Captured images The file name extension is BMP Camera image data The file name extension is IFZ 1 For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder My Documents OMRON FQ Note The PC Tool does not support SD card operations 220 SD Card Operations FQ2 User s Manual Inserting and Removing SD Cards Inserting an SD Card in the Touch Finder 1 Open the cover to the SD card slot on the top of the Touch Finder 2 Insert the SD card with the back of the SD card facing the front of the Touch Finder and press it in until it clicks into place 3 Close the cover to the SD card slot Removing an SD Card from the Touch Finder 1 Open the cover to the SD card slot on the top of the Touch Finder 2 Press in on the SD card until you hear a click Pull out the SD card 4 Close the cover to the SD card slot e Never remove the SD card while data is being saved or read The data on the SD card may be corrupted Do not restart or turn OFF the power supply to the Sensor or Touch Finder while a message is being displayed saying that data is being saved to or read from the SD card The settings or system data may be corrupte
378. ions The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DT Scroll 6 This is the amount of position compensa 180 to 180 tion XO Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 position Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Expression text string Data name Description Data range YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the measured edge 0 position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the measured 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 position TH Angle edge angle This is the measured angle 180 to 180 SX0 Edg0 ref pos edge 0 This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 reference position X position when it was registered SY0O Edg0 ref pos Y edge This is the Y coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 reference position position when it was registered Y SX1 Edg1 ref pos X edge This is the X coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999
379. ions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 3 gt Press OK to enter the value Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement Parameter Edge pitch Range 0 to 1000 Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 1000 Average pitch Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Max pitch maximum pitch Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Min pitch minimum pitch Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Average width Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Max width maximum pitch Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Min width minimum pitch Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Set the range that is to be judged OK for each parameter lt Width Pitch distance between center points Edge pitch number of objects Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only You can change the following measurement conditions for Sensors with Monochrome Cameras gt Inspect In
380. is not manipulated within the control timeout time 100 to 120 000 ms in the EtherNet IP settings and data output error will occur and the ERR signal will turn ON When the ERCLR signal is turned ON the ERR signal will turn OFF However if a timeout occurs again the ERR signal will turn ON again Therefore correctly request data output DSA control or execute a Clear Data Output Buffer command 2 Indicates that the data to output is separated and output more than once Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Disabled 1 lt The data is output according to the set output cycle 1 and output time 2 lt gt After data output is completed the GATE signal turns ON and the output data is maintained for the data output Response Data Output ON Area oe hold time GATE signal OFF Output data 1 to 64 ON Output Area DATA1 to DATA64 OFF Here the Vision Sensor ends measurements and can output data FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 321 jeusey y yBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Set the parameters so that the following conditions are met for the data output period and time e Set the timeout time in the connection settings between the PLC and Sensor so that it is longer than the measure ment processing time of the Sensor e Set the data output period so that it is longer that the GATE signal ON period and shorter than the measurement interval of the Sensor e Set the
381. is turned ON Individual judgement results Inspection OK item 0 Inspection gt NG Overall judgement item 1 NG OR signal ON If there is even one NG judgement Inspection OK the overall judgement will be NG item 31 and the output will be turned ON Expression gt OK Note The overall judgement result output signal can also be turned ON when all individual judgement results are OK ER Changing the judgement output ON condition p 244 e You can select whether to include the judgement result of one of the expressions 0 through 31 in the overall judgement LT Using Calculation Results without Applying Them to the Overall Judgement p 161 e You can adjust the timing for outputting the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing LJ Adjust the Judgement Output Timing p 242 Wiring Color Signal Description The signals shown at the left are used Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default Refer to the following information for signal wiring assignment O24 Wiring p 42 Timing Chart The OR signal that is output is held until the next overall judgement is output ON l TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min OFF l l ON Brey signal OFF ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions Turned ON when overall OR signal X lt judgement is NG OR output ON for NG Overall judgement 240 Controll
382. ise level Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition 153 Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light 157 Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 183 Edge position Y lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 184 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 185 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 186 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 187 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9999 ment 439 z L seoipueddy 440 External Category Data name Setting Acqui
383. isplay Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right Blue for OK Red for NG of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 3 Press OK to enter the value A A 137 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item 3 suonoedsu dN Bues Y e Sensors with Color Cameras Only Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement Color difference 0 to 442 Sets the upper and lower limits of the difference between the average Parameter color and reference color that is to be judged as OK Color deviation 0 to 221 Set the upper and lower limits of the range of the deviation in the region that is to be judged as OK to be judged as OK R average 0 0000 to 255 0000 Set the difference in the average value of the R red component that is to be judged as OK G average 0 0000 to 255 0000 Set the difference in the average value of the G green component that is to be judged as OK B average 0 0000 to 255 0000 Set the difference in the average value of the B blue component that is e Sensors with Monochrome Cameras only Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement Density average 0 to 255 Set the judgement upper and lower limits for the average density in the Parameter measurement region Density deviat density deviation 0 0000 to 127 0000 the measurement region Set the upper and lower limits for the deviation in the average density i
384. ith positive polarity the default setting If you change the polarity of the BUSY signal take this into consideration when reading the timing charts Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the End Timing of the BUSY Signal The end timing of the BUSY signal can be changed p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output Tab Page BUSY output Item Description BUSY output Measurement default The BUSY signal turns OFF when the measurement is completed Data logging The BUSY signal turns OFF when data logging is completed Image logging The BUSY signal turns OFF when image logging is completed Result display The BUSY signal turns OFF when the result display is completed Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable between the Sensor and the Touch Finder if the Sensor and Touch Finder are connected through an Ethernet switch and the BUSY output condition is set to Data logging Image logging or Result display The Sensor will wait for the Touch Finder to answer and the results and measurement time will be affected To disconnect the Sensor and Touch Finder during measurements in the above situation clear the selection of the Sensor from the list of Sensors on the Touch Finder before you disconnect the cable Changing the Polarity of the Output Signals You can change the polarity of the o
385. ity when a range is set 7 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Area The following values can be logged as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Area 0 to 99999 9999 This is the measured color area Gravity X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the detected center of gravity X coordinate Gravity Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the detected center of gravity Y coordinate When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table O 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the reference area registered during teaching is 0 Perform the following e If the color of the measurement object has changed from the specified color set the color again and try teaching again If the specified color is not found during teaching the reference area will be registered as 0 If having no area is OK adjust the judgement parameters with this value as the reference FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item 145 suonoedsu dN Bues Yy 146 4 12 Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item
386. jection 1 Differentia tion Edge color specifica Setting Acqui 0 No edge color specifica 0 tion 1 sition tion 1 Edge color specification Edge color R1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color G1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Edge color B1 Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition Density change 1 Setting Acqui 0 Color IN 1 Color OUT O sition Edge level 1 Setting Acqui O to 100 50 sition Noise level 1 Setting Acqui 0 to 442 5 sition Monochrome density Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 change 1 sition 0 Light to Dark 1 Dark to Light Measurement method Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 i sition 0 Projection 1 Differentia tion 442 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual tion Y1 External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 180 Judge Edge position X upper Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 181 tions Edge position X lower Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge limit 0 sition 99 999 9999 ment 182 Edge position Y upper Sett
387. just the timing of taking an image with the Sensor Adjusting the Images That Were Taken Image Adjustment Filtering the Images Filter Items LT p 69 Apply filters to adjust the images that were taken Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items na p 74 Recognize measurement objects that are not in a consistent location and move them to the center of the image FQ2 User s Manual Setting Conditions for Taking Images 59 sobew uiye L 3 3 Adjusting Image Quality Adjusting the Focus p gt Image Camera setup 1 Display the Camera Setup Display The focus can be seen as a numerical value The higher the value the better the focus Focus Level 2 Adjust the focus of the Sensor while checking the im age and focus value on the Touch Finder For a Sensor with Built in Lighting manually adjust the focus using the focus adjustment screw on the Sensor In the default settings the field of view is set to the nar A Focus adjustment screw Turn clockwise to focus on closer objects The field of view will narrow rowest setting For a Sensor with a C mount use the fo cus ring on the lens to adjust the focus of the image 3 Press Back Turn the screw counterclockwise to focus on objects at a distance The field of view will widen Sensor with Built in Lighting e Turn the focus adjustment screw clockwise or counterclockwise a little bit to ma
388. ke sure that it has not already reached the dead stop Do not force the screw if it does not rotate anymore This will damage the Sensor e Do not turn the focus adjustment screw with a force that is greater than 0 1 N m This may damage it 60 Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting Image Brightness with External Lighting You can adjust image brightness with external lighting or by setting the Sensor sensitivity Using a Strobe Trigger Signal to Control External Lighting If a Data Unit is connected you can change the output time of the strobe trigger signal STGOUT to adjust the brightness LT Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 270 Adjusting the Brightness You can adjust the shutter speed gain or the brightness to make images brighter The setting method depends on whether HDR Mode is ON or OFF The setting methods are described below LI HDR Function p 64 The exposure time will be longer for higher values of the shutter speed or brightness This may cause the image to blur if the object is moving fast If the Sensor is used on a high speed line check that the images are not blurred under actual operating conditions Brightness Correction Mode FQ2 S1000000 FQ2 s200000 If the brightness changes inconsistently with each image turn ON the Brightness Correction Mode When HDR is ON p gt Brightness Kl Brightness correction When HDR is OFF gt Gain Kl Br
389. l first and then update the software for the Sensor Step 1 Update the software for the PC Tool or Touch Finder e Update the PC Tool Install the PC Tool that was downloaded e Update the software for the Touch Finder 1 Place the update file that you obtained directly in the root folder of an SD card 2 Insert the SD card into the Touch Finder 3 Press ae Setup Mode TF settings Update Step 2 Update the software for the Sensor e Updating from the PC Tool 1 Store the update file you obtained in the following directory My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard UPDATE SENSOR 2 To update the software in the Sensor press Setup Mode Sensor settings Update e Updating from the Touch Finder 1 Place the update file that you obtained directly in the root folder of the SD card 2 Insert an SD card into the Touch Finder 3 To update the software in the Sensor press Setup Mode Sensor settings Update The software will be updated automatically Do not turn OFF the power supply until updating the software has been completed The Sensor or Touch Finder may not start normally if power is turned OFF during the update z L seoipueddy 491 FQ2 User s Manual Updating the Software 492 12 5 Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor If you update the previous FQ D30 D31 Touch Finder to version 1 6 or higher you can connect it to an FQ2 S Sensor However the memory size that is
390. l sition 147 Binary level lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 128 sition 148 Extracte Binary image display Setting Acqui 0 No binary image display 1 d image sition 1 Binary image display display 149 condition Image type Setting Acqui 0 Measurement image 1 sition 1 Color extraction image 2 Selected color image 3 Binary image after extraction 152 Mea External reference Setting Acqui 0 to 100 0 sure label number sition ment 156 condi Extraction condition Setting Acqui O to 100 100 tions detection count sition 160 Nx10 Set color Registered color usage Setting Acqui 0 Not used 1 Used 1 N 0 to 3 flag N sition 161 Nx10 Registered color exclu Setting Acqui 0 OR 1 NOT 0 N 0 to 3 sion flag N sition 162 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 359 359 N 0 to 3 mum hue N sition 163 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui 0 to 359 0 N 0 to 3 mum hue N sition 164 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 N 0 to 3 mum saturation N sition 165 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 N 0 to 3 mum saturation N sition 166 Nx10 Registered color maxi Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 N 0 to 3 mum brightness N sition 167 Nx10 Registered color mini Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 N 0 to 3 mum brightness N sition FQ2 User s Manual
391. l turns OFF p gt In Out I O setting I O terminals Output Tab Page BUSY output Change the BUSY output parameter to Data logging Trigger signal Sensor Touch Finder A Data Image Image Measurements Logging Logging Display ON BUSY OFF Note File logging cannot be used when performing continuous measurements If you use the PC Tool the logging time may vary by up to 100 ms depending on the application conditions of your computer If logging data to an SD card the write time varies depending on the amount of the available space on the SD card Reference value For SDHC class 4 the time required to write image data is approx 200 to 800 ms 213 FQ2 User s Manual Logging Measurement Data and Image Data suoyouny ju ju auoo J 214 Checking Recent Measurement Trends Recent Results Logging The most recent measurement results can be logged inside the Sensor Even if data is not logged in external memory such as an SD card trends in measurement results can be easily checked on the Touch Finder However if the power supply is turned OFF or the scene is changed this data will be lost Recent measurement results Trend monitor Measurement data Calculation result Most recent 1 000 values Sensor Image data Most recent 20 images Statistical Data Touch Finder Setting Logging Conditions
392. lON cote ce ot 50 tyes er acs Seah erates a te reid E ae ene EA 193 Calibration s a a iag eaa cate aE eos ta aeaa ne athe tals ana E E EaR 193 Setting the Calibration Pattern 0 0 ene 194 Selecting the Calibration Pattern to Use 0 0 0 0 199 7 3 Display Functions 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 200 limage ZOOM sicc8 bene aeeee teense pe E A esa ee A ie 200 Displaying a Live Image 0 00 ee 200 Displaying a Frozen Image ars coriaria o an pened adwandweetwdas das 200 Displaying a Saved Image 1 6 teens 201 Updating the Display and Measurement Results Only for NG Measurement Results 0 000 000 cece eee eee 201 Automatically Changing to the Display for Any Sensor with an NG Result 202 PGI G tHE MENU coc cicisacand a mre Brave aig a ty alee Breda Eaa hs RAE dae reeset 202 Turning ON OFF the Touch Finder Backlight 0020005 202 Changing the Brightness of the Touch Finder 0000000 202 7 4 Monitoring the Signal I O Status 0 0 0c cee eee eee 203 7 5 Connecting to More Than One Sensor 000 eee ee eee 204 Setting the Sensors to Connect 0 0 0 eee 204 Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected 206 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 05 208 Logging Procedure cicea ib ee ee ated eh eA e ee eee hae 208 Logging All Data File Logging 0 0 c ccc eens 209 Checking Recent Measurement Tre
393. le Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 display sition 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X0 display sition 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 YO display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1 display sition 705 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y1 display sition Search External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR 0 to Logged data only CR 31 6 Position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X 0 to Logged data only 99 999 9999 X 31 7 Position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y 0 to Logged data only 99 999 9999 Y 31 8 Angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 TH 0 to Logged data only TH 31 9 Reference X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX only 99 999 9999 10 Reference Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY only 99 999 9999 11 Reference angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 ST only 12 Detection coordinate X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 RX only 99 999 9999 13 Detection coordinate Y Acquisiti
394. le for FQ VP1 This cable connects the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device FQ SDU1 Parallel cable for FQ VP2 This cable connects the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device FQ SDU2 RS 232C cable Recommended This cable connects the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device to connect to a PLC XW2Z 2008 V 2 m or XW2Z 500S V 5 m 1 The shape and dimensions of the Ethernet connector plug and jack are specified in ISO IEC8877 1992 JIS X 5110 1996 and RJ 45 of the FCC regulations To prevent connector connection failures the structure of the jack of this product does not allow insertion of plugs that do not comply with the standard If a commercially available plug cannot be inserted it is likely that the plug is non compliant Do not connect network devices other than PLCs on the same network as the Touch Finder or computer If another device is connected the responsiveness of displays and settings of the Touch Finder or computer may become slow FQ2 User s Manual System Configuration 27 c SUONNBUUOD pue UOT E e Su 28 Connection Compatibility Yes Supported No Not supported Type of connection to FQ2 S Other connection EtherNet IP_ PLC Link on TCP no pro FINS TCP RS 232C Parallel communications Ethernet tocol commu no protocol nications on communica Sensor s Parallel Inter E
395. lear results Clears the total results of the inspection items Delete stats total Clears the Statistical data data 2 Image logging Starts and stops logging in external ON Start or OFF Stop p 213 2 memory o Data logging ON Start or OFF Stop TF settings The same as for Setup Mode This does not apply to the PC Tool p 229 The resolution of the measurement image can be set on the PC Tool Sensor setting Switches to Setup Mode p 180 5 Multi sensor Simultaneously displays the images for p 183 multiple connected Sensors fe z NG sensor From multiple connected Sensors dis fe z 2 plays the image of only the Sensors with amp NG results Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Select Switches to the selected Sensor p 58 Connections Displays the name of the Sensor Switch sensor detected by the Touch Finder and the connection status Auto con nect Automatically detects and connects the Sensors that are connected Common Menu Commands Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence O Only image Button Hides text and displays only the image p 202 a Zoom in Enlarges the image display p 200 Button Dis play Zoom out Reduces the image display Button Button FIT Button Fits the image to the
396. lid only when automatic setting of the Sen sor s IP address is OFF Auto sensor detection The Touch Finder can detect Sensors ON default OFF p 204 and automatically connect to them in the order that it detects them Logging setting You must enable file logging before you ON default OFF p 212 can execute it Language Changes the language to display on the English German French Italian Span System p 229 Touch Finder ish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chi nese Korean or Japanese The default language is selected at startup Time settings Used to set the current date and time Default Selected at startup System p 229 Touch screen calib Used when there is an offset between p 230 the touch screen positions and pointers Initialize Initializes the Touch Finder settings p 229 Restart Restarts the Touch Finder p 229 Update Updates the Touch Finder system to the p 491 most recent data FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 427 z L seoipueddy 428 Run Mode Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence Kc Graphic Displays the input image p 182 Q 5 Graphics Details Displays the inspection item individual a judgement results and measurement val T ues 0p Statistical data Displays the total number of measure ments and the to
397. low filter 6 Gray filter R G B 7 Gray filter R 2G B 8 Gray filter user set 124 Color gray filter type Setting Acqui Color Gray Filter Type 1 sition 0 High speed 1 High precision 125 RGB gain R Setting Acqui 0 0001 to 9 9999 0 3 sition 126 RGB gain G Setting Acqui 0 0001 to 9 9999 0 59 sition 127 RGB gain B Setting Acqui 0 0001 to 9 9999 0 11 sition 128 Standard hue Setting Acqui 0 to 359 0 sition 129 Hue range Setting Acqui 10 to 180 90 sition 130 Chroma upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 131 Chroma lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 _ sition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual Weak Smoothing External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 tions sition Strong S
398. m Class 2 Laser that emit visible radiation in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm where eye protection is normally afforded by aversion responses including the blink reflex This reaction may be expected to provide adequate protection under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing Class 2M Laser that emit visible radiation in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm where eye protection is normally afforded by aversion responses including the blink reflex However viewing of the output may be more hazardous if the user employs optics within the beam Class 3R Laser that emit in the wavelength range from 302 5 nm to 10 nm where direct intrabeam viewing is potentially hazardous but the risk is lower than for Class 3B lasers and fewer manufacturing require ments and control measures for the user apply than for Class 3B lasers The accessible emission limit is within five times the AEL of Class 2 in the wavelength range from 400 nm to 700 nm and within five times the AEL of Class 1 for other wavelengths Class 3B Lasers that are normally hazardous when direct intrabeam exposure occurs i e within the NOHD Viewing diffuse reflections is normally safe see also note Class 4 Lasers which are also capable of producing hazardous diffuse reflections They may cause skin injuries and could also constitute a fire hazard Their use requires extreme caution Note Condi
399. m and remove it from the DIN Track Mounting to a Control Panel The Touch Finder can be mounted on a panel using the FQ XPM Panel Mounting Adapter e Always turn OFF the Touch Finder power before attaching or detaching the Panel Mount Adapter Attaching or detaching with the power turned ON may cause a failure 1 Set the Touch Finder in the Panel Mount Adapter 39 FQ2 User s Manual Installation c suo osuuo pue UOTe e Su 2 Press the slider up on the Touch Finder 3 Create holes in the panel for mounting Refer to the following page for hole dimensions CI p 482 4 Connect the cable to the Touch Finder 5 Mount the Touch Finder with the Panel Mount Adapter from the front of the panel 6 Hook the hooks on the Mounting Bracket in the four holes of the Panel Mount Adapter and secure them with screws 5 Tightening torque 1 2 N m Mounting Bracket 7 Check that the Touch Finder is attached properly to the Panel Using the Touch Finder as a Portable Device with Battery The Touch Finder with a Battery can be used as a portable device Use the strap when carrying it to prevent dropping it There are two types of straps FQ XH sold separately a Neck Strap and a Hand Strap Neck Strap Hand Strap 1 Attach the Mini strap to the Touch Finder There are a total of four holes for attaching the Mini strap on the left and on the right of th
400. mages cannot be achieved with the standard brightness setting The HDR function combines several images of different brightnesses shutter speed so that the resulting image has a lower degree of contrast and can be measured stably for the desired characteristic Inputting Images with a Limit Range of Brightness Combining Images to Create an Image with a Wide Dynamic Range Dark Bright Observe the following precautions e Use the HDR function only for objects that are not moving to avoid image blurring Several images are taken with different shutter speeds and combined If the object moves while the image is being taken the image will become blurred e Images with different brightnesses are combined so the resulting image will have a lower degree of con trast p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press lt q HDR on the right side of the display 2 Set the best level for the HDR Mode HOR mode As shown below the higher the level the wider the combined dy namic range will be Level 1 Level 2 Ss Level 3 Level 4 mm Dark Bright oO o Cancel Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 User s Manual Using a Polarizing Filter Only for Sensors with Built in Lighting Specular reflections can be eliminated from an image by attaching an FQ XF1 Polarizing Filter to the Sensor OSA Observe the following precautions e The image will be darker compared to when no filter is used e If the image becomes too dark adjust th
401. mand Code 0050 1010 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents as 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Position compensation item filter 5 0000 0000 0000 ogg e number 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data P 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 000 times the value FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 315 jeusey y YBnojy Bunosuuog 6 316 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of response area Bits Contents 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0001 0000 Command code 33 0000 0000 0101 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG Get Inspection Item Data Command Code 0040 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command Aree 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents response area 12 to 15 8to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command c
402. mands The control commands that are i to Sensor are written to the Vision Sensor written to the Command Area 1 20 bytes e Control inputs are executed i Command code i Command parameters PE EEE SA NE ae oe EEE eee eis eee ee te Sass i Input Tag Set Output Tag Set Input Tags i pee e ee eee ee ee eee eee ene Measurement results are 1 2 Response area written to the response area 1 i Ri n esPONSe inthe PLC The execution results Control outputs 16 bytes Output i from the Vision Sensor Command code UPH et are written here e Response code connection i i Response data toPLC eee ee eee ee p i 3 Output area After measurements Output data from the Measurement results are 32t i Vision Sensor is written written to the output area 9 i i 256 bytes i Output data 0 to 64 The response area 2 and output area 3 are assigned to continuous memory addresses or to a variable FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 3 Output area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes output 287 jeusay y YBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Connectable Controller Models SYSMAC NJ NJ501 or NJ301 Compatible CJ1W EIP21 SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H or CJ2M Compatible model with CJ1W EIP21 built in port only SY
403. me does not exceed the output period Data Output Time and TRIG Signal Input Interval Set the input interval for the TRIG signal so that it is equal to or greater than the total output time If the input interval for the TRIG signal is shorter than the total output time the output data buffer will eventually overflow and output data will be discarded Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Continuous Measurements Example Only Data 0 Set for Parallel Data Output Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO toIN6 ON toa signals are m Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 ofr OFF ON M M t IN7 signal Measurements ee S E aae __ Measurements _ OFF 1 executed l executed l executed l executed N Continuous z i Continuous measurements ended 1 1 measurements i ON 1 started i i i BUSY signal a r 7 z OFF i i i ON while measurements are being processed i Turned ON when overall judgement is NG depends on BUSY output conditions Polarity of all output signals Positive OR signal ON GATE signal OFF GATE ON delay Output time Output period 1 The RUN signal turns ON when measurements are enabled and the Sensor is in Run Mode 2 Turn ON IN7 while INO to ING are OFF If this status is held while the BUSY signal is OFF contin uous measurements will begin and the BUSY s
404. mmand Execution Bit EXE is turned OFF by the user PLC BUSY Command Execu This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor cannot execute Command tion Active a control command response com munications FQ2 User s Manual This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor can execute a control command Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 301 u1 4 4 YBnoiy Bunoauuog 6 302 Signal Signal name Function Application method READY Ready This signal turns OFF when the Vision Sensor cannot Command execute a control command response com This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor can execute munications a control command OR Overall judgement This signal turns ON when the overall judgement is NG Command Even if the OR output of parallel signals is set fora one response com shot output this signal will not be output at the same time munications This signal turns OFF when overall judgement is OK ERR Error This signal turns ON when an error is detected in the Sensor status Vision Sensor change output This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor is operating normally RUN Run Mode This signal is ON while the Vision Sensor is in Run Mode Sensor status This signal is OFF while the Vision Sensor is not in Run Change out Mode GATE Data Output Com This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor finishes out Data output pleted putting data after measu
405. mmunications errors This signal turns OFF when the Clear Error ERRCLR signal from the PLC turns ON GATE Data Output Completed This signal turns ON when the Vision Sensor Data output after finishes outputting data measurements If handshaking is enabled the GATE signal turns OFF automatically when you turn OFF the Data Output Request DSA signal from the PLC FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 335 jeusay y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 336 Signal Signal name Function Application Command code Command code This I O port returns the command code that was executed Response code Response code This I O port contains the response code of the executed command Response data Response data This I O port contains the response data of the executed command Command response commu nications Output Area Vision Sensor Slave to PLC Master First Bits Contents word 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 y 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Output data DATA 0 0 32 bits 1 14 Output data DATA 7 7 32 bits 15 128 Output data DATA 63 63 32 bits 129 512 Output data DATA 255 255 32 bits 513 Signal Signal name Function Application DATAO 255 Output data 0 to 255 These I O ports output the output data that is Data output after specified for the data output method The range
406. moothing External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sure sition 1 Previous image ment 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 tions sition Dilate External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error z 14 Figure not registered error G 15 Out of range error 3 Q 120 Mea Source image Setting Acqui 0 Camera image 1 B sure sition 1 Previous image n ment _ 121 condi Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 N tions sition FQ2 User s Manual 431 External Reference Parameters Erosion Median Extract Edges Extract Horizontal Edges Extract Vertical Edges Enhance edges External Category Data name Setting Acqui
407. mounting section Mounts the Data Unit to a DIN Track 6 Slider Used to secure the Data Unit to a DIN Track 7 RS 232C connector Connects to the RS 232C connector 8 Parallel I O connector Connects to the I O connector Pa rt Names and Functions FQ2 User s Manual 2 3 Installation Installing the Sensor FQ2 SOOOCOOC Sensors with Built in Lighting Installation Procedure 1 Align the tabs on one side of the Mounting Bracket with the slot on the Sensor The FQ XL Mounting Bracket can be attached to the back side or front of the Sensor Press the Mounting Bracket onto the Sensor until the oth er tabs click into place Mounting Bracket Use the following optical charts to check the field of view and installation distance of the Sensor so that it is mount ed at the correct position Tightening torque M4 1 2 N m Horizontal field of view _ Vertical field of view Installation distance L FQ2 SLILI010F FQ2 LIL1010F Installation distance L mm 55 r 45 L 1 35 6 8 10 12 14 Horizontal field of view mm FQ2 SLUL1050F FQ2 SLILIO50F Installation distance L mm 210 130 aes 50 0 20 40 60 Horizontal field of view mm FQ2 User s Manual The optical chart indicates the horizontal
408. move directly from the Setup Mode display to the judgement parameters display to make adjustments p gt Test Continuous test Either display 1 2 Press lt q Adjust judgement on the right of the display Press the parameters and adjust the values of the judgment conditions for them Upper limit Lower limit Setting Up the Best Judgement Parameters Automatically The judgement parameters of the selected inspection items can be automatically adjusted by using actual workpieces which are considered as good and faulty products gt Test Continuous test 1 Move to the inspection item for which you want to au tomatically adjust the judgement parameters and press lt Adjust judgement on the right side of the display Press lt q Auto adjustment METRE Display a sample image of a good object and press OK Teach Display a sample image of a bad object and press NG Teach Repeat these steps for at least three samples each Press Back The best judgement parameters will be set automatically Press OK FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Judgement Parameters 175 sBuljjas Huines pue Buys L G 176 You can select one of the following three patterns as the judgement method p gt lt Select the method on the right side of the display 1 Threshold minimum The lower limit of the variations between OK object is used as the judgement conditio
409. mpensation item is applied to the image that is taken image by the Camera This setting is used when filter items or other position compensation items have been used specifically for the position compensation item J Jusing Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items p 76 Prev previous This setting is used when the processing results of the current position item are to be applied image default to the image that results from previous filter items or other position compensation items e Using Filter Items for Processing with Position Compensation Items To more effectively perform position compensation filter items can be used to create an image specifically for position compensation and then apply only the results of processing the position compensation to the image that will be measured The processing order of filter and position compensation items and the settings of the source images are set up as shown below Processing Image processing item Source image setting order 1 0 Enhance edges Edge Source image Camera image Enhancement filter item Camera image image for processing Processed image results of processing 2 1 Search position comp Search Source image Camera image Position Compensation position Previous image image for processing Camera image results of processing compensation item Image is taken on TRIG signal Camera image no processing 0
410. mple to get the Camera coordi nates 8 Enter the actual coordinates of the specified position 0 Calit Press lt q Actual coord on the right of the display taliun dala Insp region Puint Wadel region q 9 Enter the actual X and Y coordinates and press OK p t courd selling O Calibraliun datadi 10 Repeat the above steps 4 to 8 to set the coordinates of the remaining positions Point 0 0000 Actual FQ2 User s Manual Calibration 197 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 11 When you have finished setting the coordinates for all of the positions press Generate parameters No 1 Conf igure Nu 2 Configured No 3 Configured No 4 Uncont iaured No 5 Uneont igured 12 The calibration parameters will be displayed ud ify The items in the calibration parameters are the same as those for point specification Peau Coeff iclen 0 Calibraliun ficient Coefficient F Parameter With this method you directly enter values to set calibration The calibration parameters will be automatically calculated when you enter the following three parameters Parameter Setting Description Coordinate coor Righthand or Lefthand Lefthand The positive direction is clockwise when coordinates are specified dinate system Default Lefthand Righthand The positive direction is counterclockwise when coordinates are specified Lefthand Coordinate 4 System xX 4 Positive direction Y Righthand a Coor
411. n Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement gt Inspect Inspection Add item Color Data Details Tab Page Output parameter 1 Set Reflect to None Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error AR R average This is the average value of the R red compo 0 to 255 nent AG G average This is the average value of the G green compo 0 to 255 nent AB B average This is the average value of the B blue compo O to 255 nent AD Color diff dens AV For Sensors with Color Cameras This is the dif 0 to 442 Color difference ference between the average color in the region and the standard color For Sensors with Monochrome Cameras This is 0 to 255 the difference between the average density in the region and the standard density DV Clr deviat Color devi For Sensors with Color Cameras This is the devi 0 to 221 ation ation within the region For Sensors with Monoch
412. n 2 Threshold average The median value between the OK object variations and NG object variations is used as the judgement condition 3 Threshold maximum The upper limit of the variations between NG object is used as the judgement condition Number of registered Press NG Teach to register Press OK Teach to register samples x a Measurement value 3 2 1 Adjusting the Judgement Parameters FQ2 User s Manual 5 4 Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results Individual judgement results for all inspection items can be checked in a list The individual inspection items can be selected to change the judgement parameters p gt Test Continuous test 1 Press All results region to display the list Note Judgement parameters can also be changed from this display Select an inspection item and press lt q Adjust judgement FQ2 User s Manual Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results 177 sBulyjas Bulaes pue Bus G 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor Until you have saved your settings explicitly to the memory in the FQ2 Vision Sensor the settings are only stored temporarily They will be lost if the power is turned OFF Execute Save data after you have finished making your settings The FQ2 Vision Sensor will remind you to do so with a message if you switch from Setup Mode to Run Mode You can use this feature to keep the previous settings and discard the new settings
413. n ON 398 Error Histories FQ2 User s Manual Note You cannot check the error codes from the Touch Finder Use the command to acquire the most recent error infor mation for the connection method EtherNet IP LT p 313 e PLC Link LT p 346 e No protocol Communications TCP LT p 374 e No protocol Communications FINS LT p 389 Checking the Error Histories e Checking the History of Errors That Have Occurred in the Sensor p Setup Mode Sensor settings Error history View history Errors will be displayed in order with the most recent p ones on top O 1N input error 1 1N input error 3 1N input error 4 1N input error e Checking the Log of Errors That Have Occurred in the Touch Finder gt sis Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Error history View history Clearing the Error Histories e Deleting the History of Errors That Were Detected in the Sensor gt si Setup Mode Sensor settings Error history Delete history e Deleting the History of Errors That Were Detected in the Touch Finder gt ana Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Error history Delete history FQ2 User s Manual Error Histories 399 Bunooysejqnol L L If an error occurs while making settings on the PC Tool or the Touch Finder an error message will appear on the display For these errors the ERR indicator on the Sensor will not light the
414. nal terminals that are labeled NC open 2 You can select whether to turn the external lighting ON Positive or OFF Negative when the signal turns ON The setting is called the strobe output polarity LT Changing the Output Timing and Output Time of the STGOUT Signal p 270 p This control signal is used to turn ON external lighting when an image is taken Connect this signal to external lighting 4 This signal is output to an external device when exposure of the imaging elements is completed If you want to move the Sensor to the next measurement location after a measurement is completed move the Sensor only after this signal turns ON Shutter Output Signal SHTOUT ON Trigger input TRIG pad i Trigger del Trigger delay ON Imaging element i shutter signal OFF g I ON l SHTOUT OFF 10 ms The SHTOUT signal turns ON for approximately 10 ms fixed when the shutter time exposure period elapses after the trigger is input from an external device FQ2 User s Manual Wiring c SUONOBUUOD pue UOTE e Su RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ SDU2L FQ2 S3 Sensors with Built in Lighting or Sensors with C mounts g 1 2 17 18 ey SENSOR O 3 4 19 20 ralla a Jiris 5 6 21 22
415. nals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed Clearing Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 ING IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000000 11000000 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON RUN signal OFF INO to IN6 o gt lt 11000000 signals ii 1 ON for 1 ms min ON _ IN7 signal Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 ON BUSY signal OFF ON ACK signal OFF ACK output time Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing measurement values ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO to IN5 Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This signal is the trigger for clearing measurement values Set the INO to IN6 signals wait for at least 5 ms and then turn ON the IN7 signal FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 273 Zo S v Uo 25 D O Be 98 52 ae e oO 2 o 05 532 O S gs a Q S fe D 274 Clearing an Error This command clears the error output
416. nate system tion data Magnifica Set the actual dimension that corre 0 0001 to 9 9999 default 1 0000 Calibra tion sponds to one pixel tion data Clear Clears the parameter settings for the cal ibration data Copy Copies the calibration data Rename Changes the name of the calibration 15 alphanumeric characters max data FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 421 z L seoipueddy Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 Scene data Saves scene data with an SCN file name p 218 el S extension oln amp Scene group data Saves all scene data with an SGP file o name extension Calibration data Saves calibration data with an CLB file name extension Calibration group Saves calibration group data with an data CGP file name extension Sensor system data Saves system data with an SYD file name extension All Sensor data Saves all Sensor data with a BKD file name extension Touch Finder data Saves Touch Finder data with an MSD file name extension 2 Statistical data Saves statistical data with a CSV file p 209 2 name extension p 210 le T Logging image Saves image data with an IFZ file name extension Logging data Saves measurement data with a CSV file name extension 2 Scene data Loads scene data p 219 2 Scene group data Loads scen
417. nd calibra tion group data are backed up Touch Finder data The file name extension is MSD MSD gt settings in the Touch Finder are backed up Calibration data file name extension CLB The calibration settings for each scene are backed up Calibration group data file name extension CGP 1 For the PC Tool data will be saved in the following folder Saving Sensor Settings The calibration settings for all scenes are backed up My Documents OMRON FQ FQ2 User s Manual Restoring Data to the Sensor from External Memory p Setup Mode Load from file 1 Press the data to be restored 2 The selected data will be read from external memory and displayed Press the file to load FQ2 User s Manual Saving Sensor Settings 219 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 7 8 SD Card Operations With an FQ2 Vision Sensor the following folders are automatically created in the SD card according to the data that is saved The specified data is saved in files in these folders Storage folder Data sensor_name SCN Scene data The file name extension is SCN sensor_name SGP Scene group data The file name extension is SGP sensor_name SYD Sensor system data The file name extension is SYD sensor_name BKD All sensor data The file name extension is BKD sensor_name CLB Calibration data The file name extension is CLB sensor_name CGP Calibrat
418. nd code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents ero 2 Das 8to 11 4107 Oto3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code woo oo f ooo f ooo ae orena coce own me 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 AE mag 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 37 0000 0000 0000 0000 shia version 1 000 times the 345 FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections jeusey y YBnoiy Bunosuuog 6 Get Latest Error Information Command Code 5000 0020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 2 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC 2 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 43 0000 0000 0010 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data Latest error code oe 0900 9999 0099 0099 Errors Stored in the Error History p 398 Ea PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Timing Chart For PLC Link Communications Command Response Communications Command code Command parameters Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal Command code Command Execution Active BUSY signal READY signal Response code Response data Control Command Completed FLG signal FQ2 User
419. nd code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Scene number FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands Returns the acquired scene number the number of the current scene 383 jeusey y YyBnosy Buyosuu0y 6 384 Changing the Scene Number 280F 00301000 This command changes the scene number to use Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Scene number 4 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00301000 Scene number to change to 2 digits max Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00301000 End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 to change to Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Get Image Adjustment Data 280F 00401010 This command acquires parameters or measurement values from a position compensation item or filter item Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code Position compensation item filter External reference 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes item number 4 bytes number 4 bytes
420. nd storage 35 to 85 with no condensation nity range Ambient atmosphere No corrosive gas Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz single amplitude 0 35 mm X Y Z directions 8 min each 10 times destruction Shock resistance 150 m s 3 times each in 6 directions up down right left forward and backward destruction Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20 Materials Case PC ABS PC Size 62 x 90 x 65 WxHxD Excluding connectors DIN Track and protrusions Weight Approx 150 g Accessories Instruction Manual Table 1 Item NPN PNP Input specifi ON Shorted to 0 V or 1 5 V max ON Shorted to power supply voltage or power supply volt cations OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max age 1 5 V max OFF Open leakage current 0 1 mA max Output speci NPN open collector PNP open collector fications 1 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 1 2 V max 1 Do not allow the load current to exceed 50 mA The output circuit may be damaged if the load current exceeds 50 mA 30 VDC 50 mA max residual voltage 1 2 V max FQ2 User s Manual z L seoipueddy Specifications and Dimensions aoe Dimensions FQ SDU10 SDU15 Unit mm am Fo sbU1 7 L 90 TRL ae ae ae 71 8
421. nds Recent Results Logging 214 7 7 Saving Sensor SettingS 0 cece eee 218 Backing Up Settings in External Memory 00000 e eee eee 218 Restoring Data to the Sensor from External Memory 0 219 7 8 SD Card Operations 0 0 c ccc 220 Inserting and Removing SD Cards 0 0 0 0 c cece eee es 221 Checking the Available Space on the SD Card 000000 0 222 Formatting an SD Gard seese nanami e paie ete pede atuhekde yeas sa 222 7 9 Convenient Functions for Operation 00 cee eee eee 223 Setting a Password to Prevent Unwanted Changes 05 223 Capturing the Displayed Image 00 c cee eee 224 Saving the Currently Displayed Camera Image 0005 00a 224 Setting the Startup Run Display Pattern 0 0 0 0 cee eee eae 225 Specifying the Sensors to Connect Continuously 005 225 Monitoring and Setting Up a Sensor from Two Touch Finders 225 7 10 Convenient Functions for Setup 020 eee eee ee eee 227 Making Settings with Stored Images 0 0000 c cece tees 227 FQ2 User s Manual 7 11 Functions Related to the System 0 0 e eee eee eee 229 Turning OFF the Integrated Sensor Lighting Only Sensors with Built in Lighting 0 000 e eee ee eee 229 Switching the Display Language 00 ccc eee eee 229 Setting the Time on the Touch Finder
422. nect the other devices from the network and check the update speed If the update speed returns to normal check the specifications of the disconnected devices and take suitable measures If there are power lines running in parallel with the Ethernet cable or if there are inverters or other sources of noise near the communications cable separate the communications cable from them and check the update speed Noise may be adversely affecting the communications response Data is not logged properly Check to see if the logging setting in the Sensor are correct p 208 If logging to an SD card is not possible check the available space on the SD card and check to see if the SD card is write protected p 220 The ERROR indicator lights Check the error history to see what error has occurred and take suitable measures p 398 The measurement trigger is not input Check to see it the measurement trigger is set correctly The image brightness does not stabilize FQ2 S1 FQ2 S2 only FQ2 User s Manual Turn ON the brightness correction mode When the Brightness Correction Mode is ON the timing when images are taken changes Check that the images of the measured objects taken when the Brightness Correction Mode is ON are appropriate Basic Troubleshooting 401 Bunooyseqnod L L MEMO Ka Basic Troubleshooti
423. ng Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left Gray INO OFF Command parameters for continu are used aKa o s measurements Refer to the following informa Green IN1 OFF tion for signal wiring Red iN2 OFF LT wiring p 42 White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 ORF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for continuous measurements Black OUTO OR Overall judgement default assign ment Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default assignment Timing Chart ON INO to IN4 signals m Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN5 are OFF OFF ON o IN5 signal OFF Start continuous measurements End continuous measurements ON o 1 ON while measurements are i i being processed depends on Turned ON when overall judgement is NG BUSY output conditions OR output ON for NG BUSY signal f OFF OR signal 1 i 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 Turn ON IN5 while INO to IN4 are OFF If status is held while the BUSY signal is OFF continuous measurements will begin and the BUSY signal will remain ON while continuous measurements are being performed 2 Continuous measurements end when IN5 is turned OFF Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O terminals Input Input mode Press Expanded mode Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Sample Ladder Program The following sampl
424. ng Acqui 0 Camera image 1 sition 1 Previous image Setting method Setting Acqui 0 Filtering OFF 1 Filtering ON 1 sition Image format Setting Acqui 0 Binary image 0 sition 1 Monochrome image 2 Color image Color setting mode Setting Acqui 0 RGB common 1 RGB indi 0 sition vidual Common color lower Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 limit sition Common color upper Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 eee limit sition R lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 sition R upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 mee we sition G lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 sition G upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 ee we sition B lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 sition B upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 we sition Grayscale lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 sition Grayscale upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 a TA sition External Reference Parameters 433 z L seoipueddy 434 Shape Search II Position Compensation External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG Logged data sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG
425. ng Acqui 0 Display gravity X 1 Do not 0 sition display gravity X 702 Gravity Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display gravity Y 1 Do not 0 sition display gravity Y 800 Area display pattern Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Relative 0 sition value 2 Percentage 801 Gravity X display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Relative 0 tern sition value 802 Gravity Y display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Relative 0 _ tern sition value Color Data External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not mea 2 JG sure only sured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 R average Acquisition 0 to 255 0 AR only 6 G average Acquisition 0 to 255 0 AG only T B average Acquisition 0 to 255 0 AB only 8 Color difference Acquisition 0 to 442 0 AD Logged data only The density average is dis played for a Monochrome Cam era 9 Color deviation Acquisition 0 to 221 0 DV only The standard deviation of the density is displayed for a Mono chrome Camera 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No parame sition ter 124 Judge Color difference upper Setting Acqui 0 to 442 442 Adj
426. ng FQ2 User s Manual Appendices 12 1 Menu Tables cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 404 12 2 External Reference Parameters 430 12 3 Specifications and Dimension 472 12 4 Updating the Software eees 491 12 5 Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor ccccseseeeees 492 12 6 LED Safety i sicicecccencztccecnsteccseennastenncy sain 497 12 7 Requirements from Regulations and Stan dards oaa aa Pee er ere aa er AE Eoery peer er 498 12 8 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specificatii Ssenari 502 z L seoipueddy 12 1 Menu Tables Image Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 Focus The value shown here is used as a refer p 60 2 ence when adjusting the focus with the focus adjustment screw fo E Image mode Pixel sampling can be applied to the Normal default or Fast Scene p 174 S g input image to reduce image input time Shutter speed Sets the shutter speed for Normal Mode For FQ S3 Scene p 62 Normal mode 1 1 to 1 60 000 1 250 to 1 60 000 for Sensors with Built in Lighting For FQ2 S1 FQ2 S2 1 1 to 1 50 000 1 250 to 1 50 000 for Sensors with Built in Lighting Default 1 250 Gain If the gain is high the image will be For FQ S3 Scene p 63 Normal mode bright If the ga
427. ng Image Brightness with External Lighting 61 Adjusting the Brightness 00 000 cece 61 Taking Clear Images of Moving Objects 0 000 e eee eee eee 63 Improving the Image Quality of Metallic and other Shiny Surfaces 64 Adjusting the Colors of the Image White Balance Only for Sensors with Color Cameras n n anaa 000 cee eee eee 65 3 4 Adjusting the Timing of Taking Images 0 20005 66 Delaying the Image Capture Timing from the Trigger Input 66 Adjusting External Lighting Timing 2 000 00 e eee eee 67 Preventing Mutual Interference of Multiple Sensors 00 67 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 20 220005 68 Image AGjUSIMENE ss ce we ciiasan oire a eae daa ee Sala A aes edo 68 Filtering the Images Filter Items 20 0 000 ccc eee 69 Compensating for Position Offset Position Compensation Items 74 Edge Rotation Position Compensation 0 0000 c cece eee eee 85 4 Setting Up Inspections 4 1 Inspection Item Selection Guide 002 200 e eee eee eee 90 4 2 Setup Procedure for Inspection Items 00 eee eee eee 92 4 3 Configuring Inspection Items 000 e eee eee eee eee 93 Adding New Inspection Items 0 00 aaaea eee 93 Modifying Existing Inspection Items 0 000 94 Deleting Inspection Items 20 00 e eee e
428. ng Up Ethernet Connecting to Sensors from the Touch Finder Configurations Consisting of Only Sensors and the Touch Finder When only Sensors and a Touch Finder are used IP addresses are automatically assigned No settings are required to use Ethernet Connections on Existing Networks If a Sensor or Touch Finder is connected to a network where a PLC or computer is already connected the Ethernet settings must be made compatible with the existing network Set the IP addresses with one of the following methods Setting Fixed IP Addresses e Sensor gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press Fixed 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network settings Note If you connect the Touch Finder or PC Tool to a Sensor on a different network through a router set fixed IP addresses If you use an EtherNet IP connections set fixed IP address for the Sensors e Touch Finder p Setup Mode TF settings Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press Fixed 2 Set the IP address and subnet mask according to the network settings Using a DHCP Server e Sensor gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Network Ethernet IP address setting Press DHCP e Touch Finder p Setup Mode TF settings Ethernet IP address setting 1 Press DHCP FQ2 User s Manual Setting Up Ethernet c
429. ng a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor FQ2 User s Manual e Re registering Inspection Items Filter Items and Position Compensation Items in the Sen sor Re register the inspection items filter items and position compensation items in the Sensor using the FQ Item Selector Unpack the FQ Item Selector file that you downloaded execute the setup exe file and install the FQ Item Selector Perform the following procedure without starting the PC Tool for FQ If you start the PC Tool Sensor detection and overwriting the file will not be performed normally A Q Na I4 FQ Item Selector Connect the Sensor to the PC Select All Programs OMRON FQ Tool FQ Item Selector from the Windows Start Menu to start the FQ Item Selector Select the language to display Select the model of Touch Finder to use Sensor Model __ Touch Finder Model row Function List FQ D3X Weak Smoothing Strong Smoothing Dilate Erosion Median Extract Edges Extr hor edges Extr ver edges Enhance edges Backer Suppr Shape pos comp 5 Select the inspection items to use The memory size that is required to use the selected inspection items will be displayed You must select inspection items so that the total memory size of the Touch Finder is not exceeded I
430. ng to More Than One Sensor 205 suoyouny jua ju auoo J Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected Selecting the Display When More Than One Sensor Is Connected You can select the display to appear on the Touch Finder when more than one Sensor is connected gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF Settings Startup display Startup screen type 1 Select one of the following display types Display type Multi Sensor Description Simultaneously displays the images from up to eight detected Sensors The display positions for Sensors that are not connected will remain blank The Sensors are connected in the order that they are detected You can change the display positions of the Sensors Specifying Sensor Display Positions for Multiple Sensors Multi Sensor or Auto Only p 206 If there are more than eight Sensors that can be connected select the Sensors to con nect from the list of Sensors BA Selecting the Sensors to Connect p 205 Register the Sensor to connect to display a specific Sensor BA Registering the Sensors to Connect p 204 NG sensor Of the connected Sensors displays the image from the Sensor that most recently had an NG result Single sensor Displays the image from only one Sensor Of the Sensors the image from only the Sensor that is specified in Sensor selection is displayed If a Sensor is not specified in Sensor selection the image from t
431. ng to the expected communications cycle The smaller the setting of this parameter is the more the measurement processing time will be affected For the lowest setting of 4 ms the processing time will increase by approximately 5 to 10 4 to 10 000 ms default 10 ms FQ2 User s Manual Parameter Description Setting range Timeout This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to Yes A timeout error will occur if there is no response from the PLC within the time that is set From when measurements are completed until the DSA Bit turns ON From when the GATE flag turns ON until the DSA Bit turns OFF From when the GATE flag turns OFF until the DSA Bit turns ON 0 1 to 120 0 s default 10 s Data output period This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No Set the period for outputting measurement results Set a value that is longer that the GATE ON output time and shorter than the measurement interval of the Sensor 2 to 5 000 ms default 40 ms GATE signal ON period FQ2 User s Manual This parameter is displayed and can be set only when Handshake setting is set to No Set the time to turn ON the GATE signal Set the time that is required for the PLC to read the measurement results Set the cycle time of the PLC so that it is longer than the packet interval RPI Outputting Data and Contr
432. nge Command com Area type Select the area for the If PLC Link SYSMAC is selected mand area Command Area in the CIO Area CIO PLC Work Area WR Holding Bit Area HR Auxiliary Bit Area AR DM Area DM EM Area EMO to EMC Default CIO Area CIO If PLC Link MELSEC is selected Data Register Data registers File Register File registers Link Register Link registers Default Data Register Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 command area in the PLC Default 0 Response Area type Set the PLC memory area Same as for the Command Area response area for the response area Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 response area in the PLC Default 100 Output output Area type Set the PLC memory area Same as for the Command Area area for the output area Address Set the first address of the 0 to 99 999 output area in the PLC Default 200 4 Set the communications protocol Communication type to PLC Link communications k dala vulput Comm in type PLC link SYSHAC Output handshake No ON TONNIN 256 Retry interval Max output data Item Description Setting range Output handshake Enables or disables handshaking No or Yes e Yes Data is output when the DSA signal Default No from the PLC turns ON e No Data is output regardless of the signal state from the PLC Retry details Enables or disables retrying communications ON or OFF Default OFF Retry interval
433. nications Area Access Data types are defined to access the communications areas with one data type for the command area and another data type for the response and output areas Here data types called S_ElPOutput and S_EIPInput are defined e Data Type to Access the Command Area Name of data type S_ElPOutput Type of derivative data type Structure Name of data type Data type S_ElPOutput STRUCT ControlFlag U_EIPFlag 9 ttt The data type that was defined above 1 CommandCode DWORD gt oon 32 bit bit string data CommandParam1 UDINT ttt 32 bit integer data CommandParam2 UDINT ttt 32 bit integer data CommandParam3 DINT it tts 32 bit integer data 504 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual e Assignment Example for Variable Data Type That Matches the Command Area Bits We We 2 ala do amp amp il wv G amp 4 2 2 1 0 Control 0 ERR JTRIG EXE Flag Aa laada ete ef cts en eso cee ee ete ease ces BSA Command 2 Command code Code 3 S_EIP Command 4 Parameter 1 Output Param1 5 Command 6 Parameter 2 Param2 37 Command 8 Parameter 3 Param3 9 Data Type to Access the Response and Output Areas Name of data type S_EIPInput Type of derivative data type Structure outta The data typ
434. ning ON the Touch Finder 1 Remove the cover from the power switch on the left side of the Touch Finder 2 Press the switch toward ON Power Supply Specifications a MLINE OUI a When you attach the ferrite core to the power supply cable wrap the cable only one time Use a power supply that meets the following specifications The power supply is sold separately Item Power supply voltage Description 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Output current 0 65 A min Recommended Power Supply S8VsS 015240 24 VDC 0 65 A External power supply terminal screws M3 5 tightening torque 1 0 N m Recommended power line wire size AWG16 to AWG22 length of 5 m max e Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class II DC power supply e When using the FQ D31 do not connect a switching regulator and AC Adapter FQ ACL at the same time Wiring FQ2 User s Manual Charging the Battery This section describes how to charge and install the FQ D31 Battery and provides applicable precautions Charge the Battery while it is attached to the Touch Finder Use the AC adapter to charge the battery Mounting the Battery in the Touch Finder 1 Remove the screw from the battery cover on the top o
435. nits Operation Manual for NJ series CPU Unit Cat No W495 Types of Communications Command Response Communications With EtherNet IP communications cyclic tag data link communications are performed with the connections that are set between the PLC and Vision Sensor Command response control signals are handled by storing control commands from the PLC to the Vision Sensor and responses from the Vision Sensor to the PLC in the I O memory of the PLC This allows you to control the operation of the Vision Sensor e g perform continuous measurements or change the scene without using special communications instructions e Input Connection to Sensor PLC to Vision Sensor The commands that are stored in the I O memory of the PLC are sent to the Vision Sensor e Output Connection to PLC Vision Sensor to PLC Responses from the Vision Sensor to the control commands are stored in the PLC I O memory addresses or vari ables that are specified for the response area PLC CPU Unit Vision Sensor Continuous measurements 1 0 memory or variables Switching the scene number etc Input connection to Sensor Command area 1 R Command communications areas Response area A reenereees a EtherNet IP tag data links To send a control command you write a control command to the command area i e a variable or I O memory address in th
436. not registered error 15 Out of range error X Position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 sured edge position Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 sured edge position SX Ref position X reference This is the X coordinate of the edge 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 position X position when a range is set SY Ref position Y reference This is the Y coordinate of the edge 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 position Y position when a range is set DF D position difference in This is the offset from the measured 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 position reference position O 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Position The following values can be logged as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error This is the measurement judgement results D position difference in position 893 to 893 This is the offset from the measured reference position Position X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the X coordinate of the measured edge position Position Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 This is the Y coordinate of the measured edge position When logging data is
437. ns ON the Control Command Completed FLG signal and then gets the output data ON Output data 0 to 255 DATAO to DATA255 OFF ji 1 ose PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Sample Ladder Programming Command Response Communications The following sample program is used to perform single measurements The single measurements command lower bytes 1010 upper bytes 0010 is sent to the Vision Sensor First RUN Period Flag MOV 1010 MOV 0010 3 word Execution Control Command Command Execution condition Completed FLG Active BUSY Dae a G ommand Execution Bit Control Command Completed FLG RSET ommand Execution Bit Sets the lower word of the measurement command Sets the upper word of the measurement command Turns ON Command Execution Bit When the control command is completed the Command Execution Bit is turned OFF Create the ladder program to control the TRIG signal so that it does not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input error will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON Note You can combine both parallel and PLC Link communications PLC Link commands cannot be executed while the Command Execution Active BUSY parallel communications signal is ON during execution for the parallel measure ment trigger input TRIG signal Execute PLC Link commands while the Command Execution Active BUSY paral lel communic
438. ns the software version Example When the software version is 1 60 the response is 1 60 Date Returns the date Example When the date is 13 May 2012 the response is 2012 05 13 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Acquire Sensor Model This command acqui lt Command Format gt Command res the Sensor model Parameter amaa n vietRicte r l Ir lt Response Format gt When the Command Space Delimiter 0x20 Is Processed Normally Model FQ2 s 2 00 1 0 F cR Delimiter When the Command E r cr Delimiter Delimiter Is Not Processed Normally lt Parameter Descriptions gt Model FQ2 User s Manual Returns the model Example When the model is FQ2 S20010F the response is FQ2 S20010F Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 373 jeusey y YyBnojy Bunosuuog 6 ERRGET Acquire Error Information This command acquires the latest error code from the Sensor lt Command Format gt Command e R Ris e Tt er Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Model Delimiter Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E r er Delimiter O A lt Parameter Descriptions gt Error code Returns the latest error code If there is no error history the response is 00000000 LT 11 1 Error
439. nsor e Restoring Inspection Items to the Sensor It is not necessary to delete any inspection items to connect the FQ2 D30 D31 Touch Finder To connect the FQ2 D30 D31 Touch Finder after performing the above operation repeat the above operation but select all of the inspection items in step 5 to re register all of the inspection items in the original state N a Connecting a Previous Touch Finder FQ D30 D31 to the FQ2 S Sensor FQ2 User s Manual 12 6 LED Safety For LED devices class classification to indicate dangerous level and safety standards are stipulated in respective countries Take necessary safety preventive measures according to the standards Warning Label Warning labels are supplied as accessories with products that comply with the Class 2 Laser Product Classification Attach them to appropriate positions near the Sensor where they can be easily noticed A WARNIG LED AACA T LED RADIATION eee Cet DO NOT STARE CoLEOTEAEBUCE INTO BEAM Max 65mW Max 65mW 400 700nm 400 700nm JFA2 LEDRA CLASS 2 LED PRODUCT JIS C 6802 2005 JIS C 6802 2005 FQ2 User s Manual LED Safety 497 z L seoipueddy 498 12 7 Requirements from Regulations and Standards Summary of Requirements to Manufactures For Europe EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide Summary of Manufacturer s Requirements Requirements Classification sub
440. nspect Inspection Search Modify Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Draw the figure according to the section that you want to mask LT p 100 2 While the figure to be masked is selected press lt q on the right of the display and then press OR NOT The selected area will be removed from the model Every time you press OR NOT the area will switch be tween being enabled and disabled OR Enabled range NOT Disabled range Change type of region to OR NOT Ine ATI ae e Fine tuning the Position of the Region This section describes the console which is useful to fine tune the position of the measurement region or the model registration region in 1 pixel increments gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Settings Tab Page Teach lt lt Model region 1 Press lt 4 Console on the right side of the display where you draw the region The console will appear 2 To adjust the position of the figure press within the frame To adjust the size of the figure press a corner of the figure 3 Use the cross key to align the figure with the search Coordinates object The position of the figure can be adjusted by pressing the cross key Pressing it once will change the coordinate values by one pixel FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item io suonoedsu dN Bues Y Changing the Measurement Region
441. nstruction Control data item Setting Destination network address 00 hex Local network The FINS commands must be sent to the local network Destination node address Specify the last two digits of the IP address of the FQ2 Destination unit address Always specify 00 hex Communications port number Specify any communications port Serial port number Always specify 00 hex Command Codes for the FQ2 Command codes for the FQ2 consist of a 2 byte command code which consists of an MRC and SRC and a 4 byte Vision Sensor command code Example Command Code for a Single Measurement Command Command code Vision Sensor command MRC 1 byte code 4 bytes SRC 1 byte 28 OF 00101010 Setting Up Communications FINS TCP Communications are set up in the same way as for TCP no protocol communications OJ Setting Up No protocol Communications p 351 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands 377 u1 4 4 yBnosy Bunosuuog 6 List of FINS Commands Command List The following table lists the FINS commands Commands that can be used in FINS Ethernet communications are listed below Type of command Command codes hex Function Reference MRC SRC com Vision Sensor com mand code mand code Measurement control 280F 00101010 Executes one measurement p 379 and measurement acquisit
442. nt sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion XO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion YO 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion X1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON 443 z L seoipueddy External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings X display sition 701 Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 Y display sition 702 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X0 display sition 703 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 YO display sition 704 Detected edge position Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 X1
443. o be adjusted while measurements are being performed Downtime can be eliminated with this feature because the production line does not have to be stopped while making adjustments Preparations This function is switched OFF as a default to prevent it from inadvertently working during operation Turn ON the function if you want to use it p Setup Mode Sensor settings Adjustment mode in Run 1 Press ON Changing the Judgement Parameters in Run Mode This section describes how to change the judgement parameters without stopping measurement in Run Mode p gt Run Mode 1 Select the inspection item for which you want to ad just the judgement parameters using the a and O Buttons 2 Press lt 4 Adjust judgement ez O ge D g 3 3 Press the parameters and change the values of the mermientiti judgment conditions for them with the slider Judacment 4 Press OK turre lat ion The judgement results with the changed judgement AKAM parameters will appear ot The changed judgement parameters will not be reflected in the measurement result until OK is pressed 187 FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation MEMO ss Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation FQ2 User s Manual Convenient Functions 7 1 Changing the Scene to Change the Line Process 2 eee1 190 7 2 Calibration sisccssscccisccsisssntsussccvenscicasseceswenveneacevsnevsecaevass
444. o co co lt a e 8 8 1 S 0 Panel cutout dimensions 7 11141 a ry a 1 482 FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions Sensor Data Units Specifications Item Sensor Data Units FQ SDU1L Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit SDU10 NPN SDU15 PNP FQ SDU2L RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit SDU20 NPN SDU25 PNP VO Parallel I O SDU1 11 inputs TRIG RESET INO to IN7 and DSA specifi 24 outputs GATE DO to D15 ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT and SHTOUT cations SDU2 8 inputs INO to IN5 TRIG and RESET 7 outputs ACK RUN BUSY OR ERROR STGOUT SHTOUT RS 232C 1 channel 115 200 bps max FQ SDU2L only Sensor interface FQ2 S3 connected with FQ WUOO0O OMRON interface Number of connected Sensors 1 Input specifications Refer to Table 2 Output specifications Rat Power supply voltage 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple ings Insulation resistance Between all DC external terminals and case 0 5 MQ min at 250 VDC Current consumption 2 5 A max FQ2 S 0 000 FQ SDULIL 0 4 A max FQ2 830 000 FQ SDULIL 0 1 A max for FQ SDULIL Envi Ambient temperature Operating 0 to 50 C Storage 20 to 65 C with no icing or condensation ron range mental immu Ambient humidity Operating a
445. o contact output devices e g SSR or PLC transistor output for the input signals If contacts e g a relay are used chattering may cause the trigger to be input again during execution of a measurement Power Supply Specifications When a Switching Regulator Is Connected Use a power supply that meets the following specifications They are sold separately Item Description FQ2 S2 connection FQ2 S31 L connection Power supply voltage 24 VDC 21 6 to 26 4 V Recommended Power Supplies S8VS 06024 24 VDC 2 5 A S8VS 03024 24 VDC 1 3 A External power supply terminal screws M4 tightening torque 1 2 N m Supply power from a DC power supply for which measures have been applied to prevent high voltages e g a safety extra low voltage circuit If UL certification is required for the overall system use a UL Class II DC power supply FQ2 User s Manual Wiring c SUONN UUOD pue uoejjesu 50 Wiring the Touch Finder Power Supply Wiring Connecting the Power Supply Loosen the two terminal screws using a Phillips screwdriver Attach crimp terminals to the power lines Secure the positive and negative lines as indicated using M3 screws Power supply tightening torque 0 54 N m In environments where there is excessive noise at tach a ferrite core ZCAT1730 0730 from TDK or the equivalent to the power supply cable Tur
446. ode TF settings Initialize Restarting the Sensor and Touch Finder e Restarting the Sensor gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Restart e Restarting the Touch Finder gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Restart FQ2 User s Manual Functions Related to the System 229 suoyouny ju ju auoo J 230 Checking Versions e Checking the Sensor Version p Setup Mode Sensor settings Information e Checking the Touch Finder Version gt Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Information Checking the Touch Finder Battery Level p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings Battery level e The battery level is displayed only for a Touch Finder with a DC AC battery power supply FQ D31 e The settings will be lost if the battery runs out while you are making the settings If the battery level is low save the settings and charge the battery immediately Changing the Sensor Name An alphanumeric name can be assigned to a Sensor to make it easier to recognize This is convenient when more than one Sensor is connected gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Information lt lt Rename Checking Available Memory in the Sensor If a setting cannot be made check the amount of memory that is available in the Sensor gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Information lt q Memory state Correcting the Touch Screen Positions of the Touch
447. ode 13 0000 0000 0100 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data 7 0000 0000 0000 Oooo 1000 times the value Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Set Inspection Item Data Command Code 0050 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor Firstwordof Bits Contents ss a 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 42 0001 0000 0010 0000 Commandcode 3 0000 0000 0101 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Inspection item number 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data number 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired data TS 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 000 times the value Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents e te oon a 8to 11 4to7 0to3 42 0001 0000 0010 o000 fCommandcoe 5 mo eae over aaaea e a or nen S 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Aa t Get Software Version Information Command Code 0040 3000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command ea 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0 to 3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0100 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bit
448. odels OMRON Series SYSMAC CJ2 CPU CJ2 CJ2M Interface Built in port in CPU Unit Supported Built in port only Ethernet Unit CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H CJ1G CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 CJ1M Supported Built in port only CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W ETN21 SYSMAC CS CS1H CS1D CS1G CS1W EIP21 CS1W ETN21 SYSMAC CP1 CP1L CP1W CIF41 CP1H CP1W CIF41 SYSMAC One NSJ Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Supported Built in port only NSJW ETN21 Series Model name CPU name CPU Interface Built in port in CPU Unit Ethernet Unit MELSEC QnU Universal model QnUDECPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDECPU QO6UDECPU Q10UDECPU Q13UDECPU Q20UDECPU Q26UDECPU Supported QJ71E71 100 Q71E71 B2 QJ71E71 B5 QnUDCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDCPU QO6UDCPU Q10UDCPU Q13UDCPU Q20UDCPU Q26UDCPU QnUCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU QO1UCPU Q02UCPU Basic model QnCPU Q01CPU QOOJCPU QOOCPU MELSEC Q High performance model QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO02CPU Q02HCPU A1SJ71QE71N3 T PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual Series Model name CPU name CRU Interface Built in Ethernet Unit port in CPU Unit MELSEC QnAS Q2ASCPU A1SJ71QE71N3 T Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Setting Up PLC Link Communications Setting Net
449. of figures p 117 rg 2 2 E A Add Rectangle Ellipse Wide circle or Poly Scene p 100 DB gon 5 Delete Scene oO 3 Copy Scene Q amp Console Scene p 101 5 OR NOT OR default or NOT Scene p 101 oO o 2 One All One or All Scene Ke Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene p 102 surement region Detection You can specify which part of the model Scene p 102 point to detect as coordinates during inspec tions 5 Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene p 125 o surement region changes the measure p 129 a ment direction etc p 133 ne 5 Color ON Sets whether to specify an edge color ON or OFF default Scene p 124 SNORE for Edge width 5 and Edge position S Only U Set color Specifies the color of the image for edge R 0 to 255 Scene 5 detection i e the border between the B 0 to 255 T measurement object and background G 0 to 255 O S Color pal Displays a palette for color specification 2 ette uw 5 2 Insp region Adjusts the size and position of the mea Scene p 144 g surement region p 152 Set color The color for which to find the area is Scene p 142 S specified p 148 lt 5 Color pal Displays a palette for color specification Hue 0 to 359 Saturation 0 to 255 Scene lette Brightness 0 to 255 Exclusion ON or OFF Color inv Yes or No default Display Specifies the
450. of the Touch Finders changes to Setup Mode operation will no longer be possible from the other Touch Finder When that occurs a message will be displayed on the other Touch Finder saying that another Touch Finder is currently setting up the Sensor A E Switch sensor icon will be displayed on the lower right of the display When Run Mode operations are possible again Run Mode will be displayed in the initial status Logging Monitoring or setup Logging including file logging and recent results logging can be performed by only one of the Touch Finders If logging is enabled on both of the Touch Finders logging will be performed only on the Touch Finder that was connected to the Sensor first An error will be displayed on the other Touch Finder when it connects to the Sensor and logging will automatically be disabled If logging is disabled on both of the Touch Finders when they are connected logging will be performed only on the Touch Finder for which logging is enabled first You can use the following parameter to enable and disable logging p gt Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting Trend monitors and histo grams Monitoring or setup Trend monitors and histograms can be displayed only if logging is enabled Therefore they can be displayed only on the Touch Finder for which logging is enabled as described above Convenient Functions for Operation FQ2 User s Manual 7 10Convenient
451. of the data that can be output is determined by the set value of the Max output data number of output data upper value parameter setting as follows Minimum setting 32 bytes Output data 0 to 7 Default setting 256 bytes Output data 0 to 63 Maximum setting 1 024 bytes Output data 0 to 255 measurements If the size of data that is output exceeds the set value of the number of output data upper value setting the remain ing data will be discarded O Allocating Output Data p 332 PLC Link Connections FQ2 User s Manual i Command Tables for PLC Link Communications This section describes the commands used in PLC Link communications Measurement Control Commands 1010 0010 Single Measurement Performs a single measurement p 338 1020 0010 Start Continuous Measure Executes continuous measurements p 339 ments 1030 0010 End Continuous Measure Ends continuous measurements p 339 ments Utility Commands 2010 0010 Clear Measurement Values Clears all measurement result values p 340 3010 0010 Save Data in Sensor Saves the current system data and scene p 340 groups in the Sensor 4010 0010 Re register Model Registers the model again p 340 4020 0010 External Teaching Performs reteaching p 341 F010 0010 Reset Vision Sensor Resets the Vision Sensor p 341 Scene Control Commands 1000 0020 Get Scene Number Acquires the current scene
452. ogging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for position compensa sition 1 Data logging ON tion TH 313 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion X0 314 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion YO 315 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion X1 316 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge posi sition 1 Data logging ON tion Y1 317 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 for detected edge angle sition 1 Data logging ON External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 700 Display Position compensation Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings theta display sition 701 Detected edge ang
453. oints the center of gravity and center of the model The angle against the horizontal is found The result is a value between 180 and 180 ANGL Y_component X_component Example Finding the angle of the straight line joining the centers of region 0 and region 1 ANGL R1 Y RO Y R1 X RO X TETT Horizontal Second point If the two arguments are both 0 the result is O and the judgement is NG MOD Finds the remainder after dividing a non ordinal number with an ordinal number MOD non ordinal ordinal If any of the arguments are real numbers the decimals are rounded off before calculating the remain der The remainder is the result of dividing integers Example MOD 13 4 Result 1 remainder when 13 is divided by 4 MOD 25 68 6 99 Result 5 remainder when 26 is divided by 7 SQRT Finds the square root If the argument is negative the result is 0 The judgement will be NG SQRT argument DIST e Finds the distance between two points the center of gravity and the center of the model DIST first_position_X first_position_Y second_position_X second_position_ Y Example Finding the distance between the centers of gravity of region 0 and region 1 DIST RO X R0 Y R1 X R1 Y The following calculation is performed internally J R1 X RO X R1 Y RO Y e Finds the length of a perpendicular line from point x y to line ax by c 0 DIST X_coordinate_of_point Y_coordinate_of_point coe
454. ol com SCENE S Acquires the current scene p 366 mands number SCENE Scene_number S Scene_number Changes the scene number p 367 being used Data acquisition setting POSITIONDATA PD Acquires data from a position p 368 commands Item_number Item_number compensation item or filter External_reference_data_nu External_reference_data_nu litem mber mber POSITIONDATA PD Sets data for a position com p 368 Item_number Item_number pensation item or filter item External_reference_data_nu External_reference_data_nu mber Setting mber Setting ITEMDATA ID Inspection_item_number Acquires the inspection item p 370 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu data External_reference_data_nu mber mber ITEMDATA ID Inspection_item_number Sets the inspection item data p 371 Inspection_item_number External_reference_data_nu External_reference_data_nu mber Set_value mber Set_value VERGET S None Acquires the version informa p 372 tion of the Sensor software VERGET H None Acquires the Sensor model p 373 information ERRGET None Acquires the latest error code p 374 of the Sensor FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 359 jeusay y YyBnosy Bunoauuog 6 Command Details Measurement Control and Measurement Acquisition Commands MEASURE or M Execute Measurement This command executes one measurement If data output is not set only the measurem
455. olling Operation through EtherNet IP 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms default 20 0 ms 291 jeusay y YyBnoiy Bunosuuog 6 292 Tag Data Link Setting Methods This section describes how to set data links for EtherNet IP The communications areas in the PLC for which data links are created to the Sensor are specified as tags and tag sets and the connections are set for tag data link communications Tags tag sets and connections are set from the Network Configurator Refer to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network Configurator e NJ series CPU Unit Built in EtherNet IP Port User s Manual Cat No W506 e CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Cat No W465 e CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual for NJ series CPU Unit Cat No W495 To connect the FQ2 to an NJ CJ series CPU Unit install the EDS file that defines the connection information for the FQ2 in the Network Configurator Download the EDS file from the OMRON website e After tag data links are set the Vision Sensor will automatically be restarted to enable the settings Tags Tag Sets and Connection Settings The communications areas in the PLC are set as tag data link connections as shown in the following table e Tag and Tag Set Settings in the PLC Parameter Settings Command area Response area and output area Type of tags and Output tag set Input tag set tag set Tag and t
456. olored becomes misshapen or exhibits any other unusual conditions remove it and do not use it Continuing to use such a Battery may result in the Battery heating smoking rupturing or igniting e If the Touch Finder FQ2 D31 will be installed permanently or semi permanently remove the Battery FQ BAT 1 If the rated temperature is exceeded with the Battery inserted the protective circuit may activate and stop the Touch Finder 4 AC Adapter e Use an AC cable that is suitable for the power supply and power voltage you are using e Do not touch the power plug with a wet hand Doing so may result in electrical shock e If you notice an abnormal condition such as smoke abnormal heating of the outer surface or a strange odor immediately stop using the AC Adapter turn OFF the power and remove the power plug from the outlet Consult your dealer as it is dangerous to attempt to repair the AC Adapter yourself e If the AC Adapter is dropped or damaged turn OFF the power remove the power plug from the outlet and contact your dealer There is a risk of fire if you continue using the AC Adapter FQ2 User s Manual Handling Connector Cover Always attach the connector cover when you disconnect the cable If you do not attach the connector cover foreign matter may enter the connection causing malfunctions or damage Lens Cap Always attach a C mount lens cap to the lens mount when you remove the lens If dust or dirt adhere to the
457. om two modes depending on the external device Selecting the OFF Timing e Level output default The status of the output OR signal is held until the next OR signal is output ON TRIG signal faz ON for 1 ms min OFF ON BUSY signal Dane OFF ON while measure ments are being h i processed depends i on BUSY output H ON conditions OR signal NG OK Overall judgement OR output ON for NG Held until the next judgement result is output ane Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual e One shot output The status of the output OR signal is turned OFF after a specified time has passed Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms ON TRIG signal H ON for 1 ms min OFF ON BUSY signal OFF measurements are 7 ON while being processed depends on BUSY output conditions OR signal NG OK OFF Delaying the Out When using one shot output the output timing of the OR signal can be delayed Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms ON TRIG signal BUSY signal OFF O OR signal OFF Settings Overall judgement One shot OR output ON for NG a output time Turns OFF put Timing lm ON for 1 ms min OFF N ON while measurements are being processed depends on BUSY output conditions N i NG Overall judgement One shot One shot OR output ON for NG ou
458. ommand as an ASCII string e g MEASURE for a single measurement The Vision Sensor then returns a response such as OK NG or some value Data Output after Measurements Immediately after a single or continuous measurement the Vision Sensor will automatically output to an external device e g a PLC the data for measurements that are specified for output in advance This enables you to easily transfer the measurement results data for inspection items to the external device External device Vision Sensor Data Di p Up to 32 specified data gt e Eo items can be automati cally output You must specify in advance the data to output up to 32 items after measurements That data is sent to the external device in either ASCII or binary format through a continuous serial connection There is no handshaking from the external device to confirm if it can receive the data 320 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Setting Up No protocol Communications Setting Network Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 53 Initial Settings for No protocol Communications You must set the communications
459. on 99 999 9999 to 0 RY only 99 999 9999 14 Count Acquisition 0 to 32 0 Cc Logged data only 103 Output Reflect Setting Acqui 0 Yes 1 No 0 _ parame sition ter FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 451 z L seoipueddy External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 121 Model Rotation Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 region sition 122 Rotation angle upper Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 123 Rotation angle lower Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 limit sition 132 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 0 tion coor sition 99 999 9999 dinate 133 Detection point Y Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 0 sition 99 999 9999 134 Mea Sub pixel Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment condition 136 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge ment for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment condi 137 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate X sition 99 999 9999 ment 138 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 139 Judgement l
460. on from Output_100 PLC to FQ2 Ethernet EtherNet IP Data Exchange Method To exchange data a connection is opened between two EtherNet IP devices One of the nodes requests the connection to open a connection with a remote node The node that requests the connection is called the originator and the node that receives the request is called the target Data Exchange Memory Locations The memory locations that are used to exchange data across a connection are specified as tags You can specify memory addresses or variables for tags A group of tags consists of an output tag set and an input tag set Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 Communications for EtherNet IP Connections You can use EtherNet IP tag data links to communicate between the PLC and the Vision Sensor to perform control via command response communications or to output data after measurements The FQ2 complies with EtherNet IP conformance test version A8 To connect to OMRON Controllers and communicate through EtherNet IP you use the Network Configurator to set up tag data links i e tags tag sets and connection settings Refer to the following manuals for details on the tag data link settings that are made with the Network Configurator e NJ series CPU Unit Built in EtherNet IP Port User s Manual Cat No W506 e CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Cat No W465 e CJ series EtherNet IP U
461. on ment 142 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui O to 100 100 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 143 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 145 Density deviation upper Setting Acqui Color Cameras 0 to 221 Color Cam Adjust judge limit sition Monochrome Cameras 0 era 221 ment to 127 Monochrome Camera 127 146 Density deviation lower Setting Acqui Color Cameras 0 to 221 0 Adjust judge limit sition Monochrome Cameras 0 ment to 127 147 NG sub region upper Setting Acqui 0 to 100 100 limit sition 148 NG sub region lower Setting Acqui O to 100 0 limit sition 153 Mea Plain inspection Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 169 condi Gain setting Setting Acqui 0 3x3 sub divisions 1 5x5 1 tions sition sub divisions 2 9x9 sub divisions 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 correlation sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 1 for density deviation sition 1 Data logging ON 455 FQ2 User s Manual External Referenc
462. ons areas in the I O memory of the PLC Vision Sensor slave Command The control commands written to the Command Area are executed lt e Execution Measurement results are written to Response the Response Area of the PLC e Vision Status Flags e Command code e Response code e Response data After measurements Measurement results are written to the Output Area e Output data 0 to 31 PLC master Command area The following control commands are written to the Vision Sensor e Control signals e Command code e Command parameters Command P response communi cations Response area The execution results from the Vision Sensor are written here Output area Data output Output data from the Vision Sensor after is written here measure ments Note A PLC Link uses three link areas to perform communications the Command Area Response Area and Output Area A PLC Link is not the same as the Serial PLC Link protocol used to connect PLCs together with serial communications e An FQ2 Sensor operates as a TCP server Therefore the TCP connection must be made from the PLC Refer to the manual for the PLC for TCP connection methods The port number on the FQ2 Vision Sensor is always 9877 FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections jeusay y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 326 PLC Link compatible M
463. ontinuous measurements the BUSY signal remains ON The Vision Sensor will acknowledge the EXE signal only after the End Continuous Measurements command is executed Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled First data output Second data output 4 a ON gt Data Output i Command Request Bit DSA i Area signal OFF l oi i i ON i i Data Output Response Completed GATE Area signal OFF i I I i i I i I i I I i 1 i i i on T Output data 1 1 1 1 i Output Area to 64 DATA1 to Eoi DATAS OFF m o oi i i I i i i 1 Here the Vision Sensor ends t t t tt 4 measurements and can output data 1 2 3 4 5 1 After measurements are completed the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON by the PLC and a request is made to the Vision Sensor to output the data 2 The Vision Sensor outputs the data After the data is output the Data Output Completed GATE signal turns ON The master confirms that the Data Output Completed GATE signal has turned ON loads the data and turns OFF the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal 4 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Data Output Request DSA signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Data Output Completed GATE signal 5 The Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON from the PLC and a request is made to output the data 1 If the data output request signal
464. or Ethernet recorded as logging data output Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Examples for Calculation Finding the Distance between Two Measured Points This example finds edge position 2 by detecting the two edge positions of inspection item 0 and inspection item 1 and calculates the distance between the two points Calculate this distance Region 1 Region 0 Re Edge position Edge position e Region 0 edge position coordinates of inspection item 0 10 X 10 Y e Region 1 edge position coordinates of inspection item 1 11 X 11 Y e Distance between two points DIST 10 X 10 Y 11X 11 Y Procedure Calculation 1 Press Inspect Calculation sati FO 0 Scenel Image i Ce Calculation Inspection Setting Expressions 1 Press Expression on the Settings Tab Page Calculation 2 Press the expression number that you want to use FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 157 suonoedsu dN Buijes Y 3 Press Modify on the menu Note Performing Similar Calculations At Different Locations Rename The name of the calculation can be changed 16 characters max Copy Previously registered calculation expressions can be copied 4 Set the expression by selecting items from the Da ta Const and Math Tab Pages The expression will be displayed in the space under Ex pression s
465. or the Vision Sensor turn OFF the EXE signal before the tion Vision Sensor restarts If you leave the EXE signal ON the Vision Sensor will restart repeatedly Command Details Start Continuous Measurements Command Code 0010 1020 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command 12 to 15 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 area 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents pene eal eed oS 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0010 0000 Command code 13 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FEFFFFFF NG The measurement results are written to the output area if data output is set The measurement results are not output if data output is not set LT Setting the Data To Output Automatically after Measurements p 295 FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 309 jeusay y YyYBnosy Bunosuuog 6 End Continuous Measurements Command Code 0010 1030 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0001 0000 0011 0000 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0001 0000 0011 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0001 0000 The command code for w
466. orced OFF PLC Link Connections 347 jeusey y YBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Enabled 1 When the PLC is ready to receive output data the Data Output Request Bit DSA is turned ON from the PLC and a request is made to the Vision Sensor to output the data 2 The Vision Sensor outputs the data First data output Data Output ON After the data is output the Data Request Bit DSA Output Completed GATE signal turns signal OFF ON 3 The PLC confirms that the Data ON Output Completed GATE signal has turned ON loads the data and turns OFF the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal 4 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Data Output Request DSA signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Data Output Completed GATE signal 5 The Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is turned ON from the PLC Ji 4 TT and a request is made to output the following data 1 2 3 5 If the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal is not turned OFF within the time that is set for the retry interval in the PLC Link settings the Data Output Completed GATE signal is forced OFF and data output is completed Data Output Completed GATE signal off Output data 0 to ON 255 DATAO to DATA255 OFF Data Output after Measurements When Handshaking Is Disabled 1 Data is output automatically when the Vision Sensor completes a measurement The PLC tur
467. output the data is output in the order of the above table If more than one item is stored results are output for each model OJ 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item 125 suonoedsu dN Buas 174 126 Errors Errors in Teaching A teaching error message will appear if the edge position cannot be detected when teaching Perform the following e If the color of the measurement object has changed from the specified color set the color again and try teaching again e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected adjust the Noise level on the Details Tab Page and try teaching again Edge Not Found If an edge is not found the measurement result will be NG Perform the following e If a color was specified make sure the color of the measurement object has not changed from the specified color e Set the color again if necessary e If there is an edge and it cannot be detected make sure the Edge level parameter on the Details Tab Page is correct LI Edge level p 122 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual 4 8 Inspecting with the Edge Width Inspection Item Edge Width Inspection Item This inspection item is used to measure dimensions Places where the color changes greatly are called edges The distance between two edges is called the edge width Sample Settings Sample Measurement Edges ar
468. ower limit 99 999 9999 S Upper limit 99 999 9999 E Position Y 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Scene uw Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Edge width Sets the Edge width OK range When the result type is set to relative Scene p 128 values g Range 99 999 9999 or 99 999 999 D Default Upper limit 99 999 9999 Lower limit 99 999 9999 When the result type is set to ratios Range 0 000 to 999 9999 Default Upper limit 999 9999 Lower limit 0 000 5 Edge pitch Sets the Edge pitch OK range Range 0 to 1000 Scene p 132 Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 1000 S Average Range 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 Scene W pitch Defaults Lower limit 0 0000 Upper limit 99 999 9999 Max pitch Scene maximum pitch Min pitch Scene minimum pitch Average Scene width Max width Scene maximum pitch Min width Scene minimum pitch FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 409 z L seoipueddy 410 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 b 5 Color differ Sets the upper and lower limits of the dif 0 0000 to 442 0000 Scene p 137 rs E 8 ence ference between the average color and Sl Ele 210l 215 reference color that is to be judged as Slo OK gA Color devia Set the upper and lower limits of the 0 0000 to 221 0000 Scene tion range of the deviation in the region that
469. ower limit Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge for search coordinate Y sition 99 999 9999 ment 140 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 141 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 142 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 100 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 143 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui O to 100 60 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 146 Mea Sort condition Setting Acqui For Multiple Searches 1 sure sition 0 Ascending order of corre ment lation value condi 1 Descending order of cor tions relation value 2 Ascending order of posi tion X 3 Descending order of position X 4 Ascending order of posi tion Y 5 Descending order of position Y 148 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 32 32 Adjust judge ment for detection count sition ment condi 149 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 32 0 Adjust judge for detection count sition ment 452 External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 1
470. parameter and set the range that is to be Multi point output must be enabled judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Continuous measurements will be performed for the im maaan ages that are taken Note ement JF m iL 39 600 You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display i imit ower limi Upper limit 3 Press OK to accept the value Blue for OK Red for NG 4 Press Back to end making the setting Parameter Setting Description Correlation Range 0 to 100 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the correlation for an OK judge Defaults Lower limit 60 Upper limit 100 ment Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position X for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of measurement position Y for an Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 OK judgement Upper limit 99 999 9999 Angle Range 180 to 180 Adjust the upper and lower limits of angle for an OK judgement Defaults Lower limit 180 Upper limit 180 Count Range 0 to 32 Adjust the upper and lower limits of the detection count for an OK Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 32 judg
471. per limit Setting Acqui 0 to 1 000 1 000 Adjust judge ment sition ment condi 131 tions Edge pitch lower limit Setting Acqui O to 1 000 0 Adjust judge sition ment 132 Average pitch upper Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge limit sition 999 ment 133 Average pitch lower Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 Adjust judge limit sition ment 134 Pitch upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge sition 999 ment 135 Pitch lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 Adjust judge sition ment 136 Average width upper Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge limit sition 999 ment 137 Average width lower Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 _ Adjust judge limit sition ment 138 Width upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge sition 999 ment 139 Width lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 Adjust judge sition ment 140 Mea Edge enhancement Setting Acqui 0 to 442 100 sure level sition ment 141 condi Color to count Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 tions sition 0 White 1 Black 142 Mode Setting Acqui Monochrome Cameras 0 sition 0 Standard 1 Precise 463 z L seoipueddy 464 External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Dat
472. peration BUSY This signal is ON when the Sensor is performing measurements changing scenes or performing other tasks Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON The process that is currently being executed and the command that is input will not be executed correctly OR This signal outputs the overall judgement The signal is valid when the measurements are completed i e when the BUSY signal changes from ON to OFF D These signals output the parallel judgement output data and the calculation results of the expressions that are set for parallel data output You can set whether the signal turns ON for an OK or for an NG judgement in the Judgment output condi tion output setting BA Changing the Signal Specifications p 245 GATE This signal is used to control the timing of reading the D signals at an external device It is turned ON for the period of time that is required to reliably read the D signals at the external device Set the output period so that the total output time is shorter than the measurement interval i e the TRIG signal input interval The GATE signal is output only if parallel judgement output and parallel data output are set The OR signal will be ON while the TRIG signal can be input Input Signals Signal Function TRIG This signal is used to input a measurement trigger from an external device such as a photoelectric switch One measurement is performed on the rising edge OFF to ON transition of th
473. pported 360 Model position compensation Edge position compensation pensation Number of reg 8 32 istered scenes Calibration Supported Image Image process Real color Monochrome Real color Monochrome input ing method Image filter High dynamic range HDR image adjustment polarizing filter attachment and white balance Sen sors with Color Cameras only Image elements 1 3 inch color CMOS 1 2 inch color 1 2 inch Mono 1 2 inch color 1 2 inch CMOS chrome CMOS CMOS Monochrome CMOS Shutter Built in lighting lit 1 250 to 1 50 000 Built in lighting lit 1 250 to 1 60 000 1 1 to 1 60 000 Built in lighting not lit 1 1 to 1 50 000 Built in lighting not lit 1 1 to 1 60 000 Processing res 752x480 928x828 1280x1024 olution Partial input Supported horizontally only Supported horizontally and vertically function Lens mounts C mounts Lighting Lighting method Pulse Lighting color White Data log Measurement In Sensor 1 000 items If a Touch Finder is used results can be saved up to the capacity of an SD ging data card Images In Sensor 20 images If a Touch Finder is used images can be saved up to the capacity of an SD card Auxiliary function Math arithmetic calculation functions trigonometric functions and logic functions Measurement trigger External trigger single or continuous Communications trigger Ethernet TCP no protocol Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol EtherNet IP or
474. pression 25 Data 26 D26 This is the result of expression 26 Data 27 D27 This is the result of expression 27 Data 28 D28 This is the result of expression 28 Data 29 D29 This is the result of expression 29 Data 30 D30 This is the result of expression 30 Data 31 D31 This is the result of expression 31 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Setting Description J00 to J31 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 0 to 31 This are the judgement results of expressions Results 0 to 31 999999999 9999 to 999999999 9999 This is the results of expressions 1 to 31 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data FQ2 User s Manual Testing and Saving Settings 5 1 Performing Test Measurements ccscccceccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenseeeeeeeeees 170 5 2 Shortening the Measurement Takt Time cessceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 5 3 Adjusting the Judgement Parametelrs 2 cc cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 5 4 Checking a List of All Inspection Item Results scceseeeeeeees 177 5 5 Saving Data to the S MSOM cccssecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseesenseneeneas 178 5 1 Performing Test Measurements After completing the settings in the Image Inspect and In Out Tab Pages move to the Test Tab Page The displayed image is m
475. pression item works as described below to suppress the background for the specified brightness range e Enhancing Contrast The range of the input brightness that is within the specified brightness range 0 to 255 is converted to 255 levels to enhance the contrast e Background Suppression Input values from 0 to the lower limit are converted to level 0 and input values between the upper limit and 255 are converted to level 255 to remove as the background any places that are not within the specified brightness range 255 Output value Upper limit 255 0 Input value You can use either of the following methods to set the upper and lower limits of the brightness range to extract with the Background Suppression item w Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual e Enhancing the Contrast of a Specific Area You specify the location on the image to enhance the contrast p gt Image Image adjustment Background Suppression Modify 1 Press lt Suppression level on the right of the ee display p 2 Drag on the image to specify the location to empha size the contrast The contrast in the specified range will be reset to be tween 0 and 255 Press OK 4 Press Back e Extracting Only a Specified Range of Brightness You set the upper and lower limits of the brightness range to extract with the Background Suppression item p gt Image Image adjustment Background suppression
476. program to control the TRIG and IN5 input signals so that they do not turn ON while the BUSY signal is ON If not a TRIG input error will occur and the ERROR signal will turn ON e Operation When the Sensor Power Supply Is Turned ON The BUSY signal will operate as shown below when the Sensor s power supply is turned ON Create the ladder program in the PLC or other external device so that the BUSY signal is ignored while it turns OFF ON and OFF again for up to 5 s after the power supply is turned ON 24V Power supply 1 4655 35s Turns OFF when the gt __________ gt Sensor is ready for ON i operation BUSY i i OFF H Depends on the scene data Note ha J N Sensor system is initializing You can mount a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to enable using other signals and increase the number of sig nals that you can use with parallel communications And in addition to outputting OR judgement results you can also use a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to output the judgement results of judgement conditions that you set for parallel output called parallel judgement output and the results of measurement values and expressions for inspection items called parallel data output BA 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit p 256 Configuring the Operation The following settings can be selected depending on the system configuration and application
477. ption Sorting method Corr ascending order ascending order of correlation value Sorts the results in order from the smallest correlation to the largest Corr descending order descending order of correlation value Sorts the results in order from the largest correlation to the smallest Pos X ascending order ascending order of position X Sorts the results in order from the smallest measure ment X position to the largest Pos X descending order descending order of position X Sorts the results in order from the largest measure ment X position to the smallest Pos Y ascending order ascending order of position Y Sorts the results in order from the smallest measure ment Y position to the largest Pos Y descending order descending order of position Y Sorts the results in order from the largest measure ment Y position to the smallest FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item 97 suonoedsu dN Bues Y 98 Select the Results to Output You can use multiple conditions to determine which results to output from all the objects detected with a correlation at the candidate level or higher Only the results that meet all the specified conditions are output p gt Inspect Inspection Search Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Extraction condition and adjust the candi jee date level so that only objects higher than
478. qui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 165 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge for search angle sition ment 166 Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui O to 100 100 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 167 Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui O to 100 60 Adjust judge for correlation sition ment 168 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge X upper limit sition 999 ment 169 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge X lower limit sition 99 999 9 ment 999 170 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 99 999 9 Adjust judge Y upper limit sition 999 ment 171 Position compensation Setting Acqui 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust judge Y lower limit sition 99 999 9 ment 999 172 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sation upper limit sition ment 173 Theta position compen Setting Acqui 180 to 180 180 Adjust judge sation lower limit sition ment 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0
479. r data output timing and signal status after measurement trigger execution LT Aligning the Data Output Timing with the External Device p 262 Performing One Measurement for Each External Trigger A measurement trigger is input as the TRIG signal from a proximity sensor PLC or other external device One measurement is performed when the TRIG signal turns ON 1 TRIG signal ON N Or other device Trigger input Sensor 2 Performs measurements once Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Performing Continuous Measurements Continuous measurements are performed while the continuous measurement command is input from an external device 1 IN7 signal ON INO to IN6 are OFF Or other device Shy 2 Performs continuous measurements Setting Output Data You can set the data to output after measurements Output Data You can output any of the following data through the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Data Output contents Signal used to output the data OR signal Overall judgement result The results is output with the OR signal Parallel judgement Judgement results of the judgement conditions The results are assigned to and output with output that are set for parallel output DO to D15 Parallel data output Measurement values for inspection items and The data is output as 16 bit data on DO to results from e
480. r of labels dis Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 settings play sition 701 Total label area display Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 sition 702 Area display Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 sition 703 Gravity X display Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 sition 704 Gravity Y display Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 sition 705 Master angle display Setting Acqui 0 ON 1 OFF 0 sition FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 471 z L seoipueddy 472 12 3 Specifications and Dimensions Sensor Specifications Item Single function Standard mod High resolution models models els Model NPN FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S30 13 FQ2 S30 10 20 S30 08 S30 08M 13M PNP FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S35 13 FQ2 S35 S15 S25 S35 08 S35 08M 13M Field of view Refer to Table 1 Lens is select according to the field of vision and installa Installation distance Refer to Table 1 tion distance Refer to the Optical Chart page Main func Inspection items Search shape search Il sensitive search area color data edge position edge pitch edge width and tions labeling Number of 1 32 simultaneous measurements Position com Su
481. range that is to be judged as OK The measured value is displayed beside the parameter name Continuous measurements will be performed for the images that are displayed Note You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the S RE e Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right Blue for OK Red for NG of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 3 gt Press OK to enter the value A 141 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item suonoedsu dN Bues 174 Item Parameter Setting Description Judgement Parameter Area Range 0 00000 to 999 999 999 9999 Set the upper and lower limits for an OK Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 judgement The set range is the differ Lower limit 0 0000 ence between the reference area and the measured areas Gravity X Range 999 999 999 9999 to Set the upper and lower limits of the 999 999 999 9999 range of gravity X that is to be judged Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 as OK Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Gravity Y Range 999 999 999 9999 to Set the upper and lower limits of the 999 999 999 9999 range of the gravity Y that is to be Default Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 judged as OK Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Note You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result
482. rder S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 108 judgement results of an inspection item S in the overall judgement ei a 5 O S Rotation Sets the angle range for the registered No default Yes Scene p 116 2 model 5 Angle range 180 to 180 Scene p 116 G 2 Sub model You can change the number of divisions 3 x 3 5 x 5 default or 9 x 9 Scene p 110 3 number of the registered model Plain inspec Enables or disables inspecting plain sec Yes or No default Scene p 110 tion tions S Sub pixel You can increase the accuracy of mea No default Yes Scene p 115 g surement positioning amp Candidate Sets the detection target to only objects 0 to 100 default 60 Scene p 115 A level with a correlation above the specified g candidate level S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 115 g judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement Si Qa 5 g F S Edge level Sets the color density level of the edge O to 100 default 50 Scene p 122 e p 133 o amp p 129 3 A Noise level Sets the color density level to treat as 0 to 442 default 5 Scene p 123 e g noise p 133 g p 129 a S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 122 ii g judgement results of an inspection item p 133 S S in the overall judgement p 129 3 8 o 3 D 2 Wis Menu Tables
483. re If Handshake setting is set to Yes this signal automati cally turns OFF when the Data Output Request Bit DSA signal from the PLC turns OFF If Handshake setting is set to No this signal turns OFF after the data output period has elapsed ments Command code Command code This I O port returns the command code that was exe cuted Command response com Response code Response code This I O port contains the response code of the executed command munications Response data If measurements are executed in parallel Response data This I O port contains the response data of the executed command the EtherNet IP BUSY signal will also turn ON Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual e Output Area The output area is assigned immediately after the response area in I O memory Bits Contents is afl wi apolele rile ls 4i s 2 1 is 8 Output data DATA 0 0 32 bits 9 22 Output data DATA 7 7 32 bits 23 38 Output data Eo DATA 15 15 32 bits 39 70 Output data DATA 31 31 32 bits 71 134 Output data a DATA 63 63 32 bits 135 Signal Signal name Function Application DATAO 63 Output data 0 to 63 These I O ports output the output data that is Command specified for the data output method response commu The data that can be output is determined by the set value of th
484. removed FQ2 User s Manual Specifications and Dimensions aie Item Single function Standard mod High resolution models models els Model NPN FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S30 13 FQ2 S30 10 S20 30 08 30 08M 13M PNP FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 FQ2 S35 13 FQ2 S35 S15 S25 S35 08 S35 08M 13M Materials Sensor PBT PC SUS Cover Zinc plated steel Mounting Bracket PBT Thickness 0 6 mm Polarizing Filter Attachment PBT PC Case Aluminum diecast alloy Ethernet connector Oil resistance vinyl compound ADC 12 I O connector Lead free heat resistant PVC Mounting base Polycarbon ate ABS Weight Depends on field of view and installation distance Refer to Table 1 Approx 160 g without base Approx 185 g with base Accessories Mounting Bracket FQ XL 1 Polarizing Filter Attachment FQ XF 1 1 Instruction Manual Quick Startup Guide Member Registration Sheet Warning Label Mounting Base FQ XLC 1 Four Mounting Screws FQ XLC M3x8 mm 4 Instruction Manual Quick Startup Guide Member Registration Sheet LED class 2 Class 2 Applicable standards EN standard EN 61326 and EC Directive No 2004 104 EC EN 61326 1 2006 and IEC 61010 1
485. rmed at 10 10 21 pm on May 10 2012 2012_05_10 22_10_21 CSV 1 A five digit number is assigned as a name to the image data storage folder in the order of folder creation as shown below Up to 100 images are stored in each folder 00000 00001 2 Files are stored in the following folder when the PC Tool is used My Documents OMRON FQ SDCard 3 You can change the img at the beginning of the file name 4 You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name e Setting the File Name for Logged Data You can set a character string to add to the beginning of the file name for logged data Image data You can change the img_ at the beginning of the file name for logged data to another text string Measurement data You can add a character string to the beginning of the file name for logged data p Setup Mode or Run Mode TF settings File format 1 Select the item for which to add to or change the file name and then press Logging image file or Logging data file AOUN FQ2 User s Manual Press File name prefix Enter the file name up to 15 alphanumeric characters and press OK Press OK Logging Measurement Data and Image Data 211 suogouny ju ju auoo J File Format Image data Image data is saved in a special format for OMRON Vision Sensors The file name extension is IFZ Measurement data Measurement data is saved in the following CSV format yyyy mm d
486. rnal reference number ber Q 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Setting Specifies the set value 1 12 2 External Reference Parameters p 430 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with FINS TCP No protocol Commands FQ2 User s Manual Getting the Software Version 280F 00403000 This command acquires the version information of the Sensor software Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00403000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Software version 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes text string 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00403000 Software version 1 000 times the actual value End Codes End code hex Meaning 0000 Command execution ended normally FFFF Command execution ended in an error Parameter Descriptions Software version text Returns the software version string Example When the software version is 1 20 the response is 1200 4B0 hex Getting the Error Information 280F 00205000 This command acquires the latest error code from the Sensor Format MRC SRC Vision Sensor command code 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 28 OF 00205000 Response Format MRC SRC MRES SRES Vision Sensor command code Error code 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 4 bytes 28 OF End code 00205000 Error code Parameter Descriptions
487. rnet port Used when connecting the Touch Finder to the Sensor with an Ethernet cable Insert the connector until it locks in place 11 Strap holder This is a holder for attaching the strap 12 AC power supply connector 1 Applicable to the FQ2 D31 only FQ2 User s Manual Used to connect the AC adapter Part Names and Functions 31 c suo osuuo pue UOT e e Su 32 Sensor Data Units 1 2 No 1 Front Surface of Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit Name Sensor connector Back Surface of Parallel Interface RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit Sensor Data Unit Description Connects to the FQ2 S3 2 Power supply and ground termi nal block Connects to the 24 V power source and the ground line 3 Parallel I O connector Connects to the I O connector 4 I O indicators POWER ERROR Lights green when power is being supplied Lights red when an error occurs RUN Lights green during operation BUSY Lights yellow when the Sensor is executing a process SENSOR Lights yellow when the Sensor is connected OR OK Lights green when the overall judgement result is OK OR NG Lights red when the overall judgement result is OFF or an error occurs 232C_COM Lights yellow during RS 232C communications Provided only on the FQ SDU2L1 5 DIN Track
488. rome Cameras This is 0 to 217 the deviation within the region OJ 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Inspecting with Color Data Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Logged Color Data The following values can be logged as measurement data Measured item Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error R average 0 to 255 This is the average value for the R red component G average 0 to 255 This is the average value for the G green component B average 0 to 255 This is the average value for the B blue component Color diff dens AV O to 442 This is the difference between the color that was registered Color for Sensors as the reference and the measured color The average color with Color Cameras within the measurement area is used in both cases Color diff dens AV 0 to 255 This is the difference between the average density in the Color for Sensors region and the currently measured density with Monochrome Cameras Clr deviat for Sen O to 221 This is the deviation within the measurement region sors with Color Cam eras Clr deviat for Sen O to 127 This is the deviation in the average density in the measure sors with Mono chrome
489. rple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for saving data to the Sensor Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Timing Chart INO to IN4 IN5 signal BUSY signal OFF ON OFF ON FQ2 User s Manual Allow 5 ms min and then in the Sensor Saving data 1 Turn ON INO and turn OFF IN1 to IN4 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the BUSY signal is OFF to save the data Saving data in in Sensor started Sensor completed Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 253 8 UONDAUUOD a eseg e y m e eq Buiynd no pue uopesado BuljjojuoD Executing External Teaching You can use the image that is currently being input to execute teaching for all of the registered inspection items Note Application is possibly only from the Run Mode If the parameter is applicable to more than one inspection item it will be external teaching for all inspection items Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left are Gray INO ON Command parameter for external teaching used Refer to the following information for Green IN1 OFF x ba signal wiring Red IN2 OFF me nc aR LT 2 4 wiring p 42 Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for external teaching Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in
490. rror indicator color red ERROR Error indicator color red ERROR SD card access indicator color yellow SD card access indicator color yellow SD ACCESS SD ACCESS Charge indicator color orange CHARGE Opera Touch screen Method Resistance film tion interface Life expect 1 000 000 operations ancy Exter Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T nal inter face SD card SDHC compliant Class 4 or higher recommended Ratings Power supply voltage DC power connection 21 6 to 26 4 VDC DC power connection 21 6 to 26 4 VDC including ripple including ripple AC adapter manufactured by Sino Ameri can Japan Co Ltd connection 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Battery connection FQ BAT1 Battery 1 cell 3 7 V Continuous operation on Bat 1 5h tery 3 Current consumption DC power connection 0 2 A max DC power connection 0 2 A max Charging battery 0 4 A max Insulation resistance Between all lead wires and case 0 5 MQ at 250 V FQ2 User s Manual z L seoipueddy Specifications and Dimensions ot 480 Item Model with DC power supply Model with AC DC battery power supply FQ2 D30 FQ2 D31 Environ Ambient temperature range Operating 0 to 50 C Operating 0 to 50 C when mounted to DIN mental Storage 25 to 65 C Track or panel immu with no icing or condensation 0 to 40 C when operated on a Battery nity Storage 25 to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity r
491. s p 252 Saving data in the Sensor This command saves the settings data to the Sensor p 253 External teaching This command executes teaching for all applicable inspection items p 254 Change to Expanded Mode before you input any command other than a command to change the scene If you change to Expanded Mode you can use any of the commands However in Expanded Mode you can change to only 16 scenes with the parallel SCENE command instead of 32 scenes Changing the Scene This section describes how to change the line process by changing the scene Wiring Color Signal State Description The signals shown at the left input Mode are used Refer to the following Standard Mode _ Expanded Mode A x di information for signal wiring Gray NO Scene number Scene number Specifies the scene number 0 to 31 0 to 15 INO to IN4 correspond to the binary iiaa Green IN1 bits of the scene number LH 2 A Wiring p 42 To change to scene 1 in Standard Red N2 Mode specify 00001 White IN3 Purple IN4 ON Yellow N5 ON Trigger to change the scene Orange OUT1 Processing in progress default BUSY 2de Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection FQ2 User s Manual Timing Chart INO to IN4 signals in Standard Mode gt Scene number 0 to 31 i Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN5 ON i IN5 signal a ON for 1 ms min OFF
492. s Contents response area 12 to 15 8 to 11 4107 0to3 2 0011 0000 0000 0000 Command code a 0000 0000 0100 0000 The command code for which the response applies is stored 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code Command execution result 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 OK FFFFFFFF NG 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 37 0000 0000 0000 0000 a version 1 000 times the FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 317 jeusey y YyBnojy Bunosuuog 6 Timing Chart for EtherNet IP Communications Performing Measurements with the TRIG Signal Command kE Measure ON Area ment TRIG signal OFF Command Execution ON Active BUSY signal OFF ON Response READY signal OFF Area ON Overall judgement OFF OR 1 2 3 4 5 1 Measurement starts when the TRIG signal turns ON while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The BUSY signal turns ON when measurement begins 3 The TRIG signal turns OFF when the BUSY signal turns ON 4 The OR of the measurement results is output when measurements are completed 5 The BUSY signal turns OFF when the BUSY output condition is met SE Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Execution of Control Commands Other Than Continuous Measurements with the Control Command Execu tion Bit EXE Signal Command code Command parameters Command Area Control Command Execution Bit EXE
493. s That Were Taken 1 y The image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Press an unused number and then press Add pos comp Make any detailed settings as required for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Search Position Compensation below Press OK Press Back 81 s bewj uiye L 82 e Detailed Settings for Two edge Position Compensation The settings for the Two edge Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position inspection item LL 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item p 120 However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching Set the measurement regions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Basic 1 Press Teach Edged region 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera 3 gt Move the rectangle to the location to be measured and then press OK This concludes setting the measurement region and edge search direction for edge 0 Next go to step 4 to set the measurement region and edge search direction for edge 1 4 Press lt q Edge1 region on the right of the dis pm play move the
494. s are output Number of delay 1 to 15 default Reading Data When the GATE Signal Is Output No Handshaking The Sensor will output the measurement results without synchronizing with the external device but the GATE signal is also output The GATE signal is used to control the timing of when the external device reads the measurement data Adjust the external device so that it reads the measurement results when the GATE signal is output External device 1 Measurement processing and results output OR and DO to D15 2 GATE signal You can change the settings of when the GATE signal is turned ON after the measurement data is output and the length of time that the GATE signal will remain ON Setting the Output Timing fo the GATE Signal p 262 a Note The GATE signal will not be output if there is no data set for parallel judgement output and parallel data output If only the OR signal is output read the OR signal when the BUSY signal turns OFF FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 263 Zo S o v2 2 3a O ge 98 532 Do 25 2 o 05 Sa O S O E Ey l Q w D v D 264 Single Measurement Example Three Data Items Set for Parallel Data Output Timing Chart N Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered O RUN signal D OFF ON TRIG signal ON for 1 ms min OFF ON
495. s that are set Press lt q Console on the right of the display to display the console Press the Cross Key on the console to change the coordinates one pixel at a time 6 Press OK 7 Enter the actual coordinates of the specified position eure O Calibratiun datat Press lt q Actual coord on the right of the display a o Enter the actual X and Y coordinates and press OK memEmET selling O Calibralion dalad 9 Repeat the above steps 4 to 8 to set the coordinates of the remaining positions Point Actua 10 When you have finished setting the coordinates for yuyu all of the positions press Generate parameters O Calibratiun datat fet rea Nu 2 Configured fe 8 tna FQ2 User s Manual Calibration 2a suoyouny jua ju auoo J 196 11 The calibration parameters will be displayed Wud ify O Calibration dala The items in the calibration parameters are listed in the following table Coefficient A nettirient ii ficient amp fic ient ficient Cuefficient F Item Setting Calculated value Calculated value Calculated value Calculated value Calculated value cul s est fey tes Calculated value Reference Description These are the calibration conversion values These values are used to convert the Camera coordinates to the actual coordinates The following formulas are used to convert to actual coordinat
496. s the angle when the model was 180 to 180 registered RX Detection coordinate X This is the X coordinate of the detec 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 tion point when the model was regis tered RY Detection coordinate Y This is the Y coordinate of the detec 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 tion point when the model was regis tered Cc Count This is the number of models found 0 to 32 LT 4 13 Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data p 155 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged The following values can be logged as measurement data Parameter Range of value Description Judgement 0 Judgement is OK This is the measurement judgement results 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error Correlation 0 to 100 This is the measured correlation Position X 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position X Position Y 99999 999 to 99999 999 This is the measurement position Y Angle 180 to 180 This is the measurement angle Count 0 to 32 This is the number of models found x When logging data is output the data is output in the order of the above table If more than one item is stored results are output for each model O 7 6 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data p 208 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item 103 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 Errors Errors
497. s turned ON if the BUSY signal is OFF Single BUSY signal measure ment command bit TRIG TRIG signal The TRIG signal is kept ON for 2 ms and then turned OFF T0000 OUT1 OUTO When the BUSY signal turns OFF to indicate that the measurement has been finished the judgement result is added to the total count OK measurements CIO 1000 NG measurements CIO 1002 BUSY signal OR signal OUTO OR signal e I O Signal Allocations Signal Address Output signals OUTO OR signal CIO 0 00 OUT1 BUSY signal CIO 0 01 Input signals TRIG CIO 1 00 The BUSY signal will remain ON while the measurement is being executed Performing Continuous Measurements Continuous measurements are performed while the continuous measurement command is input from an external device Immediately after a measurement is performed the next measurement is performed This is repeated while a continuous measurement command is input with the INO to IN5 signals 1 IN5 signal ON INO to IN4 are OFF Or other device 2 Performs continuous measurements Note This function can be used only when the input mode is set to Expanded Mode FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 237 Zo S o v2 25 3a O ge F 5308 Do 25 2 o 05 Sa O S gs E Ey l Q w D v D 238 Wiri
498. shows how to assign the measured position X of 0 Search to data O for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data setting Press I0 Search KR DH A Press Position X X Currelation CR Angle IH Judgment JG T CR ey Reference X 5 if the inspection item allows multi point output press the number 0 to 30 of the inspection result for which to output the data from the list of inspec tion results To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sen EE sor FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 329 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following inspection results e Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results e Inspection results that support multi point output You can assign inspection results within the specified range 0 to 31 The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection result to data 0 p gt In Out I O settings Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data 3 Set the follow
499. sing OUTO Polarity You can change the polarity of the output Positive default Negative System p 245 signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT1 Polarity OUT2 regardless of what signal is Positive default Negative System assigned to the output OUT2 Polarity Positive default Negative System BUSY LED You can change the BUSY indicator to a BUSY default RUN System p 231 RUN indicator Output control You can select the data output method None default Handshaking or Sync System p 263 Only when the FQ SDU1 nected is con Output FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables 415 z L seoipueddy 416 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 2 2 3 Output period Sets the period for outputting measure 2 0 to 5 000 0 ms System p 263 ment results Only when the FQ SDU1L 10 0 ms default ajojo is connected glo GATE ON delay Sets the time from when the result is out 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 263 put to the parallel interface until the 1 0 ms default GATE signal turns ON Only when the FQ SDU1L is con nected Output time Sets the time to turn ON the GATE sig 1 0 to 1 000 0 ms System p 263 nal 5 0 ms default Only when the FQ SDU10 is con nected Timeout Sets the timeout time for output control 0 5 to 120 0 s System p 263 Only when the FQ SDU10 is con 1
500. sition Compensation The settings for the Edge Rotation Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item Make the settings in the same way as for the Edge Position inspection item LO 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item p 120 However the following settings are included only in the Edge Position Compensation Item e Teaching e Measurement Regions and Measurement Directions Set the measurement regions and measurement directions for both edge 0 and edge 1 p gt Image Image adjustment Edge rot pos Comp Modify Basic Teach The settings are the same as those for the Two edge Position Compensation item LT Teaching p 82 e Reference Angle Set the reference angle Press lt q Edit Ref angle on the right of the display and set the angle e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment 2Edge position comp Modify Details Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 77 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculat
501. sor has been set up it can be operated alone to perform measurements The same functions as those that are without the Touch Finder or PC Tool provided by the Touch Finder can be performed from a computer The PC Tool is available free of charge FQ2 series Vision Sensors are available in two different models There are also Sensors with C mounts that allow you to change the lens and Sensors with Built in Lighting The differences are given in the following table Models Single function models Standard models High resolution models Type Sensors with Built in Lighting Sensors with C mounts Model number FQ2 S1 FQ2 S2 FQ2 S3 08l FQ2 S3L 13 Number of simultaneous 1 32 measurements Number of registered 8 32 scenes Partial input Horizontally only Horizontally and vertically Lens mount C mount Image processing Real color Real color or monochrome Model numbers for method Monochrome Sensors end in M Connection to Sensor Not possible Possible Data Unit Processing resolution 752x480 928x828 1280x1024 20 TE FQ2 series Vision Sensors FQ2 User s Manual This section describes the basic flow of the measurement process e The measurement is started by inputting a trigger signal from an external device 3 Images are taken a
502. spection Edge Pitch Modify Details Tab Page Meas parameter Parameter Setting Description Color to count White default Black Sets the color of edges to measure Mode Standard default Precise Select the Precise Mode if the pin width or pitch is less than 2 pixels Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Pitch Details Tab Page Output parameter Unstable Edge Pitch Results Sensors with Color Cameras Only If the measurement result is not stable adjust the Edge level Noise level and Set color parameters O e 122 Increasing Edge Pitch Processing Speed Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time 01 Changing the measurement region p 102 FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Edge Pitch Inspection Item 133 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be output to external devices or used in calculations as measurement data Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error
503. spection Item Sensitive Search Inspection Item This inspection item automatically divides the registered model into smaller areas and performs matching for details The lowest correlation for all of the divisions is output A sensitive search is suitable when the differences between the model image and measurement image are too small to produce differences in correlations with a normal search Sample Settings Sample Measurement A search is made for sections that are similar to the model and then a finely divided model is used to check the correlations in detailed divisions If there is no pattern in the divided model then you can inspect the degree by which there is no pattern Search region EPEEFETERTER region to search for the model Finely divided Model desired image pattern Setup Procedure for the Sensitive Search Inspection Item Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item p gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Sensitive Search O Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow ca at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Sensitive Search Inspection Item is suonoedsu dN Bues 174 114 Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and partial image as reference data for the measurement p gt Inspect Inspection Add i
504. splay as desired Checking the Judgement Results of Inspection Items Checking the Overall Judgement Result History Graphics Graphics Details Statistical data f Seoreh aya The image and region currently being In addition to Graphics display indi The currently measured image and history of measured will appear vidual judgement results and measure the overall judgement results measurement ment values of selected inspection count NG count and NG rate will appear items will appear Checking the Judgements of All Inspection Items in a List Displaying Measurement Result Histories All results region Trend monitor Histogram Standard Models and High resolution Models Only The judgement results of all inspection The statistical data for the currently The distribution of measurement results of the items can be checked in a list selected inspection item can be currently selected inspection item can be checked against time checked LT p 184 LT p 185 gt Run Mode Select display Note If Logging setting is not set to ON you will not be able to display trend monitors or histograms in Run Mode BE Enabling File Logging p 212 Configuring the Run Mode Display FQ2 User s Manual The following displays are convenient if more than one Sensor is connected Multi sensor NG sensor Displays the measurement results of Automatically changes to the display for all connected
505. status Parameters Execution Command Input example IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 INO 1 1000001 11000001 Timing Chart Run Mode entered Setup Mode entered ON cece RUN signal OFF ON TRIG signal fe ON for 1 ms min DEF TRIG is input ON w__y BUSY signal ORF Measurements executed ON OR signal i OFF 7 D signals gt X Data ON i i GATE signal i oat OFF lt lt lt GATE ON delay Output time ON ERROR signal OFF i INO to ING gt L i 1000001 signals Boa Allow 5 ms min and then turn ON IN7 1 N u ON for 1 ms min ON DA IN7 signal H OFF ON ACK signal H OFF ACK output time Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit FQ2 User s Manual Output Signals Signal Function RUN This signal is ON while the Sensor is in Run Mode It will be OFF in Setup Mode BUSY This signal does not change while clearing errors However do not clear an error while the BUSY signal is ON The command will not be executed correctly OR This signal does not change while clearing errors DO to D15 These signals do not change while clearing errors GATE This signal does not change while clearing errors ACK When the command has been completed normally this signal is turned ON for the time that is set for the ACK output time Input Signals Signal Function INO Turn ON IN1 to INS Turn OFF ING Turn ON IN7 This
506. sults DO to D31 Each calculation judgement result JO to J31 is turned ON if the result falls within the upper and lower limits The OR logic of these results will be the overall judgement result JG You can reflect the judgement results JG of the calculations in the overall judgement You can also set the output parameters so that the judgement results are not reflected in the overall judgement FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 155 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 156 Outputting the Calculation Results The overall judgement JG of the calculations are reflected in the overall judgement of the inspection item The calculation results DO to 31 can be output as Ethernet outputs or it can be output by using logging Individual A judgement results Overall judgement ORO to OR31 result OR Inspection items 10 to 131 Data logging Judgement results Reference values Reference values Calculation Process Calculation Z0 Upper and lower Calculation limit judgement p Calculation judgement results DO result J0 m n 7 Overall judgement 5 m ORIogic_ result of calcula E 7 Upper and lower n tions JG Calculation limit judgement Calculation judgement bm results D31 result J31 Logging p 208 Touch Finder Ethernet output SD card Computer The results can be allocated The results can be to data 0 to 31 f
507. t OR 1 it i tt i H i i i wt i i I II I I i i rt i I i Di i 14 t M 111 There is no signal to acquire measurement results during continuous measurements 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Set the Start Continuous Measurements command code and the command parameters from the PLC while the BUSY signal is OFF 2 The Controller turns ON the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal The execution command is sent to the Vision Sensor 3 When the Vision Sensor receives the execution command the Command Execution Active BUSY signal turns ON the READY signal turns OFF and the command is executed Continuous measurements start at this time 4 The command code response code and response data are set when the Vision Sensor completes execution of the command 5 The Control Command Completed FLG signal turns ON 6 When the PLC detects that the Control Command Completed FLG signal is ON it turns OFF the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal 7 When the Vision Sensor detects that the Control Command Execution Bit EXE signal is OFF it automatically turns OFF the Control Command Completed FLG signal The BUSY signal remains ON until continuous measurements are completed 8 During continuous measurements an OR of the measurement results is output each time a measurement is completed 320 Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Note During execution of c
508. t direction and color Measurement region Edge search Color of edge direction tobefound L o Setup Procedure for Edge Position Step 1 Selecting the Inspection Item gt Inspect Inspection 1 Press an unused inspection item number and press Add item 2 Press Edge position na Registering inspection items p 93 Note Drag the arrow Lol at the bottom of the menu upward to display all of the inspection items 120 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Step 2 Teaching Teaching means to store the region and the edge position in the region as reference data for the measurement p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Position Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure ment reference in front of the camera KR Q Press OK Move the rectangle to the location to be measured 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching OJ Changing the measurement region p 102 The arrow in the middle shows the direction for detecting an edge Moves the starting Moves the end point point of the of the measurement measurement region region Drag to move Changes the width the region of the meas
509. t from 0 to 31 Note The assignments of I O signals can be changed LT Section 8 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Connection p 233 Wiring FQ2 User s Manual I O Signal Circuit Diagrams NPN anes a Saas 7 Brown Power supply 24 VDC eee es Brown Power supply 24 VDC MM l i Pink TRIG iBlack OUTO OR S i M Gray INO ad i lt l l Orange OUT1 BUSY i Wy Green IN1 Y g Light blue OUT2 ERROR Hi Red IN2 if HA m white INS IE i i 24 VDC IE sy o Purple _IN4 i Blue GND 0V ije io Yelow _IN5 i JS ike Pink TRIG i Y L E M i Gray INO k gt 24VDC 7 2 W Green NT a ile Light blue OUT2 ERROR l my 4 Red IN2 4 Orange OUT1 BUSY l White N3 v i ok Black OUTO OR i Ny jeune IN4 i i J Load Yelow IN5 v i Blue GND OV Preventing Chattering e The Sensor is equipped with an anti chattering function but if the chattering is 100 us or longer a faulty input may occur Input signals of 99 us or shorter are ignored Signals of 100 us or longer are treated as input signals e Use no contact output devices e g SSR or PLC transistor output for the input signals If contacts e g relay are used chattering may cause the trigger to be input again during execution of a measurement
510. t operation Important If you leave the EXE signal ON when you use it to execute the Reset command the Vision Sensor will restart repeatedly After you execute the Reset command turn OFF the EXE signal before the Vision Sensor restarts Get Latest Error Information Command Code 0020 5000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor 0101 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Command code Response Vision Sensor to PLC 0101 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 a 000 e J eooe re a 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 ee a 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 7 0000 0000 0000 io oe LT Errors Stored in the Error History p 398 FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP yeusau y yBnosu Buyoauu0D 6 Get Scene Number Command Code 0020 1000 Command PLC to Vision Sensor First word of Bits Contents command area TOMS 8 to 11 4to7 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 3 0000 0000 0010 0000 Response Vision Sensor to PLC First word of Bits Contents eee ee Roos 8to 11 4107 0to3 2 0001 0000 0000 0000 Command code 5 mo f wo oo aaaea nea or nen S 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response code 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 Sa ipani ah 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Response data 37 0000 0000 0000 0000 Acquired scene number
511. t that is to be used as the measure Drag a corner to ment reference in front of the camera size the rectangle 3 gt Move the rectangle to the location to be measured 4 Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed Note Information on the color that has the largest area in the measure ment region is extracted and registered The color information is extracted only the first time The extracted color information will not change from the second time on To specify a desired color refer to Extraction Is Automatically Performed for an Undesired Color When Teaching p 142 6 Press Back to end teaching BA Changing the measurement region p 110 Note If you press the TEACH Button without specifying a color the color with the largest area in the measurement region will be extracted and the resulting color information will be registered The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Reference area The area for label 0 to use as a reference is set automatically Reference position X The gravity position X for label 0 to use as a reference is set automatically Reference position Y The gravity position Y for label 0 to use as a reference is set automatically Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item
512. t version set one of the following as the total data size for the output area data output size and the response area 16 bytes 48 bytes default 80 bytes 144 bytes e 272 bytes 2 Although the data size can be set as high as 502 bytes with the current version use the default setting of 20 bytes 3 The packet interval RPI is set in the connection settings between the PLC and the Sensor No setting is required here FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 293 u1 4 4 YyYBnosy Bunosuuog 6 294 Connection Settings Parameter Setting Originator device PLC Input tag set PLC_tag_set_name Byte This is the total size of the response area and output area that you set Connection type Any default multi cast connection Output tag set PLC_tag_set_name 20Byte Target device Vision Sen sor Output tag set Input_101 Byte This is the total size of the response area and output area that you set Input tag set Output_100 20Byte Packet interval RPI 4 If multi cast connections are used however use an Ethernet switch tha in the network Any default 20 0 2 has multi cast filtering unless the tag set is received by all nodes 2 Set the same value as you set for the refreshing task period in the EtherNet IP communications settings If O memory addresses are specifi
513. ta fa Up to 64 specified data items can be automatically output EtherNet IP tag data links To output data you must specify in advance the data to output up to 64 items after the measurements are executed You must also specify in advance the output area i e I O memory addresses or variable for the input tag to store the data in the PLC After a single measurement or continuous measurements the data is automatically stored in the output area i e O memory addresses or variable that is specified for the input tag in the PLC via the connection from the Vision Sensor to the PLC Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP FQ2 User s Manual Types of Communications Areas For EtherNet IP communications the following three communications areas are used in the PLC to perform communications Areas Used for the Different Control Methods Command response This is the area to which you write control commands for communications 1 Command area the Vision Sensor to execute 2 Response area area This is the area to which the Vision Sensor writes the results of control commands executed from the command Data output after mea surements data for measurements after an inspection is performed PLC Vision Sensor PO a ey ee ee ee E Output Tag Set Input Tag Set Output Tags 1 Command area i Input z i connection he following control com
514. ta LF or CR LF S g s a w tor Si el ae X Se g Record Selects the separator to use between None default comma tab space CR Scene al S Ka separa sets of output data LF or CR LF SES tor O a 2 z 16 D Deci Selects the numerical expression for Floating point decimal or fixed decimal Scene mal binary output default m output Fixed decimal point data is multiplies by n form 1 000 and the result is output E amp Q 5 fa 3 Output data set The same as for no protocol data output above Scene p 300 5 p 333 Output format Scene no ma S FIS Settings Data0 to Data15 Scene o o S a 2 Settings Sets the data from the inspection item to Inspection item text strings Scene p 258 judge a Oo 2 Rename Changes copies or clears the data Scene 5 2 opy Scene a fs Delete Scene ire T 5 Data 0 to Sets the range of the output data to Range 999 999 999 9999 to Scene 5 Data 15 judge OK 999 999 999 999 2 5 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 a 2 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 o E 5 1S 2 ne g 5 2 2 S Reflect You can specify whether to reflect the No Yes default Scene p 259 wales judgement results of an inspection item AlS in the overall judgement S 8 Data output Sets whether to output the judgement No Yes default Scene p 259 e results O Menu Tables FQ2 User s Manual
515. ta has not been set yet a message will be displayed asking if you want to go to the cali bration setting display 199 FQ2 User s Manual Calibration suoyouny ju ju auoo J 7 3 Display Functions The procedures given in this section can be used to make the Sensor easier to use and the display easier to see Image Zoom The display can be zoomed in or out to make the image easier to see P R Setup Mode or Run Mode Enlarges the display Reduces the display Fits the image to the display size Press Back to end setting the display Displaying a Live Image You can display a live image to check the image that is input by the Sensor in realtime P A Setup Mode Press Ea Press Camera Press Live Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play AUN a Displaying a Frozen Image You can display a frozen image to stop image refreshing and display the last image that was input P R Setup Mode Press E Press Camera Press Freeze AUN Press the Back Button to return to the Display Dis play 200 Display Functions FQ2 User s Manual Displaying a Saved Image You can display an image that was saved in internal memory in the Sensor or in an SD card This can be done to configure inspection items or to check measurements using saved images P A Setup Mode 1 Press Select image display 2 You can select one of the following types of imag
516. tailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications FQ2 User s Manual 1 6 04h Assembly Object Class Attributes ID Access Name 1 Get Revision Data type Description Revision of the object Attribute value 2 Instance Attributes O to T Instance ID 100 ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 3 Get Set Data BYTE array Byte data Data format is Refer to Memory defined by application Assignments input connection to Sen sor 4 Get Size Number of bytes Oto T data size Set before going online Instance Attributes T to O Instance ID 101 ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 3 Get Data BYTE array Byte data Data format is Refer to Memory defined by application Assignments input connection to Sen sor 4 Get Size Number of bytes OtoT data size Set before going online Services Code Service name Class Instances Remarks OE hex Get_Attribute_Single Yes Yes 10 hex Set_Attribute_Single No Yes FQ2 User s Manual z L seoipueddy 505 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications Index A Color deviation 138 lor difference 138 AC Adapter 487 S9 l AC power supply connector Color Gray Filter 69 Color ON OFF 124 Touch Finder 31 color palette 124 143 149 ACK 45 47 ACK signal ON period 270 COMINO 49 41 adjusting parameters ri H adjustment in Run Mode 187 COMOUTO 47 adjustment during operation
517. tal number of NG overall judgements and the NG ratio from when the power supply was turned ON All results Region Displays the inspection item individual judgement results for all inspection items Trend Monitor Displays the individual judgement results p 184 saved in the Sensor in a trend monitor Histogram Displays the individual judgement results p 185 saved in the Sensor in a histogram Model region Changes to Setup Mode and changes the output form for measurement values Insp region Changes to Setup Mode and changes the parameters for judgement conditions Adjust judgement Adjusts judgement parameters without p 187 Except for statistical stopping measurements data Auto display trend Automatically sets the display range OFF or ON default p 184 monitor and histo according to the measurement results p 185 gram only Display range trend Changes the display range of measure 999 999 999 to 999 999 999 p 184 monitor and histo ment values p 185 gram only Number of data Changes the number of displayed mea 200 400 or 1 000 default 200 p 184 trend monitor only surement values Number of data his Changes the number of displayed mea 5 to 1 000 p 185 togram only surement values i e the vertical display range of the histogram Clear results Clears the measurement results of the graphic or graphic inspection items details list C
518. tartup display 1 Set Specify sensor to ON 2 Set Sensor selection to the IP address of the Sensor Note If the Touch Finder cannot connect to the specified Sensor when the Touch Finder is started it will continue to retry until a connection is made If connection to the specified Sensor is not possible press the Cancel Button to cancel connecting to the specified Sensor Monitoring and Setting Up a Sensor from Two Touch Finders You can monitor and set up the same Sensor from two Touch Finders You can simultaneously monitor the Sensor from both Touch Finders You can set up the Sensor only from one of the two Touch Finders at any one time Touch Finder Touch Finder Sensor Switching Hub 4 Looocccce page ere You can monitor the same Sensor at the same time from a locally installed Touch Finder and a remotely installed Touch Finder 225 FQ2 User s Manual Convenient Functions for Operation suoyouny ju ju auoo J 226 Operations during Simultaneous Connection of Two Touch Finders The following restrictions apply to operations when two Touch Finders are simultaneously connected to the same Sensor Operation Sensor status Changes Editing model regions in Run Monitor Operation is possible with only one of the Touch Finders Mode Operation will be possible from the Touch Finder where Model region was pressed first Run Mode operations Setup When either
519. te XO Edge 0 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position YO Edge 0 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 0 position X1 Edge 1 position X This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position Y1 Edge 1 position Y This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sured edge 1 position SX0 Edge0 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position X SY0 Edge0 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 0 reference position when it was registered position Y SX1 Edge1 ref position X This is the X coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position X SY1 Edge1 ref position Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 1 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 edge 1 reference position when it was registered position Y Two edge Midpoint Compensation This position compensation item detects edges in two directions If the specified color is detected or the specified density is detected for a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera it is recognized as an edge Two edge positions are detected The image is adjusted so that the coordinates of the midpoint position of a line that connects t
520. ted that there is no danger of exposure to AEL above Classes 1 or 2 when adjustments are made Viewing optics Not required Emission from all viewing systems must be below Class 1M AEL Scanning Scan failure shall not cause product to exceed its classification Class label Required wording Figures A required wording Aperture label Not required Specified wording required Service entry label Required as appropriate to the class of accessible radiation Override interlock label Required under certain conditions as appropriate to the class of laser used Wavelength range label Required for certain wavelength ranges LED label Make required word substitutions for LED products User information Operation manuals must contain instructions for safe use Additional requirement apply for Class 1M and Class 2M Purchasing and ser vice information Promotion brochures must specify product classification service manuals must contain safety information Note 1 This table is intended to provide a convenient summary of requirements See text of this standard for complete requirements 2 For the safety medical laser products IEC 60601 2 22 applies 3 AEL Accessible Emission Limit Requirements from Regulations and Standards FQ2 User s Manual The maximum accessible emission level permitted within a particular class For your reference see ANSI Z136 1 1993
521. tem Sensitive Search Settings Tab Page 1 Press Teach Drag the rectangle to move it Drag a corner to 2 Place the object that is to be used as the measure size the rectangle ment reference in front of the camera Move the rectangle to the location to be measured A Press OK 5 Press TEACH on the lower right of the display The basic settings will be registered when teaching has been completed 6 Press Back to end teaching The following data is stored as the measurement reference Item Parameter Description Reference data Model image This is the partial image that is stored as the reference Reference position X These are coordinates of the model image that are stored as reference Reference position Y Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Sensitive Search Settings Tab Page 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Press each parameter and set the range that is to be judged as OK Set the range for each of the following parameters Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are taken Note You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display Blue for OK Red for NG 3 gt Press OK to accept the value
522. tem Scene i However the Sub pixel and Multi point output settings of the Search inspection item do not exist Edge Position Compensation Two edge Position Compensation Two edge Mid point Compensation and Edge Rotation Position Compensation The settings for the Edge Position Compensation item are almost the same as those for the Edge Position inspection item 5 Source image You can select the image to which to Camera Prev default Scene p 77 2 apply the results of position compensa E g tion processing Q z Interpolation You can select the precision of position Bilinear None default Scene p 77 amp compensation Inspect Tab Page Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 P Add item Used to add modify delete copy or Search Shape Search II Sensitive p 93 8 change the name of an inspection item Search Edge Position Edge Width 2 E Edge Pitch Area Color Data Labeling Modify ma p 94 Delete p 94 Copy Rename 15 alphanumeric characters FQ2 User s Manual Menu Tables euy z L seoipueddy 408 Menu command Description Setting range Data Refer ence 5 S 5 5 Model region Used to specify the region of the image Scene p 100 2 g to register as the model with a combina p 110 olp E oa Q w tion
523. th the Sensitive Search Inspection Item 113 Sensitive Search Inspection Item 20 0 0c eee 113 Setup Procedure for the Sensitive Search Inspection Item 113 Reflect in Total Judgement 0 0 0 115 Increasing Measurement Position Accuracy 00000002 eee 115 Select the Results to Output 0 0 eee 115 Changing the Number Region Divisions 000 ccc eee 116 Inspecting Plain Regions 000 c cee eee 116 Unstable Search ResulltS ric 2co0e04 sented iiaia Pen aeaa eee ea ek 116 Increasing Processing Speed 0 0 0 tenes 117 Editing the Model Regions and Measurement Region 117 EMOS ys facet gee e ae hee eae ede ad eae ee be ane debs 119 4 7 Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item 120 Edge Position rocs essi dead eae ad dea aa ea ee es 120 Setup Procedure for Edge Position 20 0 0 c cece eee 120 Reflect in Total Judgement 2 0 0 0 cee 122 Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only 00 cece eee ee 122 Unstable Edge Position Results annuun aan 00002 cee eee 122 Increasing Processing Speed for Edge Position 000 125 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations 125 Measurement Data That Can Be Logged for Edge Position 125 EMOS osiy once ae pee ae kee ede ew bavadiaedanevbaedan d
524. than a certain correlation are detected 2 Set the conditions for outputting the detected ob jects Extraction X Y and Detection Count Extraction con Range Description dition Candidate level 0 to 100 Outputs only objects with a correlation that is higher Defaults Lower limit 80 Upper limit 100 than the specified candidate level Extraction X 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Results are output only for objects with a measured X Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 coordinate that is within this range Extraction Y 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Results are output only for objects with a measured Y Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 coordinate that is within this range Detection 1 to 32 Sets the maximum number of detection results to out count Default 1 put The processing time changes if you change the candidate level Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Shape Search Il Details Tab Page Output parameter Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Unstable Shape Search II Results Inclined Measurement Objects Adjust the Angle range parameter to increase the range in which a search is made for the model The Shape Searc
525. the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the product At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document FQ2 User s Manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RA
526. the coordinate values one pixel ata AMIG GRD EI time Note The detection coordinates will automatically return to the center coordinates of the model if you change the model region 102 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error CR 0 to CR 31 Correlation This is the correlation of the Nth 0 to 100 model that was found X 0 to X 31 Position X This is the X coordinate where the Nth 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 model was found Y 0 to Y 31 Position Y This is the Y coordinate where the Nth 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 model was found TH 0 to TH 31 Angle This is the angle in which the Nth model was found 180 to 180 SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered ST Reference angle This i
527. the display Drag to move the region 2 Adjust the size and position of the region to which Drag a corner to size the rectangle the filter is to be applied e p m To fine tune the region press lt q Console on the right of the display to display the console This will allow you to change the coordinates of the rectangle at the pix el level Setting the Filter Type for Color Gray Filter Only You can specify the ranges of colors to which the Color Gray Filter item is applied p gt Image Image adjustment Add filter Color Gray Filter 1 Press lt lt Filter type on the right of the display Filter type TAREE 2 Set the filter type to either RGB or HSV Parameter Description iiid RGB default The red green and blue extraction ranges are specified HSV The extracted color ranges are specified with the hue and chroma saturation Cance I 3 Press lt q Filter settings on the right of the display 4 Make the detailed filter settings e RGB Select the type of color filter to use If you select Custom filter set the gains for red green and blue e HSV Filter settings O Color Gray Filter Set the following ranges Std Hue Hue range and Chroma Cance 5 Press OK 6 Press Back FQ2 User s Manual Adjusting the Images That Were Taken 71 sobew uiye L e RGB Parameter Setting Description Filter settings Red filter defa
528. the following images Camera The image taken by the camera is displayed Live The live image is displayed Freeze The image that was taken last is displayed Log A log image saved in internal memory is displayed Logging image file A log image saved in external memory is displayed Camera image file An image that was saved in external memory with Log Image Button is displayed Run Mode In Run Mode measurements are performed and measurement results are output LT e 179 FQ2 User s Manual Startup Display and Display Elements 23 L uononpowjuy 24 1 4 Basic Operational Flow The following flow shows the basic operation of FQ2 series Vision Sensors Connections and Wiring Section 2 Installation and Connections Starting the S Section 1 saring ine Serisor 1 3 Startup Display and Display Elements Image Setup aa Section 3 Taking Images Image Tab Page Calibration Settings F 77777 Section 7 Convenient Functions Image Adjustment met we Section 3 Filtering the images 3 5 Adjusting the Images That Were filter items Taken Compensating for position offset position compensation items Inspection Setup Inspect Tab Page Section 4 Setting Up Inspections Inspection Registering Inspection Items Setup Evaluation Setting Judgement Parameters Calculation Settings Inspect Tab Page Se Section 4 Setting Up Inspections Output
529. the image brighter but it will also reduce image quality to the point that the noise component in the images will stand out Select a suitable factor for the inspection p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press lt Shutter speed on the right of the dis play 2 gt Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the shutter speed Moving it to the left will make the shutter speed slower and the image brighter Moving it to the right will make the shutter speed faster and the image darker FQ Series 3 Press OK If you cannot obtain the required brightness by adjusting me the shutter speed adjust the gain 4 Press lt q Gain on the right of the display 5 Move the bar to the left or right to adjust the gain Moving it to the right will increase the gain and make the image brighter Moving it to the left will reduce the gain and make the image darker FQ Series 6 Press OK 9 7 Press Back ata Yo concer Parameter Setting Description Shutter speed Range If the shutter speed is slow the image will be For FQ S3 bright If the shutter speed is fast the image 1 1 to 1 60 000 will be dark 1 250 to 1 60 000 for Cameras with Built in Lighting For FQ2 S1 or FQ2 S2 1 1 to 1 50 000 1 250 to 1 50 000 for Cameras with Built in Lighting Default 1 250 6z Adjusting Image Quality FQ2 User s Manual Parameter Setting Description Gain For FQ S3 If the gain is high t
530. the interpolation to Bilinear or None Parameter Setting Description Interpolation Bilinear default Points are connected with lines to find approximations This create smoother images None Position compensation is performed at the pixel level e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position compen 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 sation for the Y coordinate DT Scroll 0 This is the amount of angular compen 180 to 180 sation 0 X Position X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found Y Position Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was found TH Angle This is the angle at which the model 180 to 180 was found SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99
531. thernet tions on standard par face 2 Ethernet allel commu nications EtherNet IP No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PLC Link on Ethernet No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TCP no protocol communi Yes Yes No No Yes Yes cations on Ethernet FINS TCP no protocol com Yes Yes No No Yes Yes munications on Ethernet RS 232C Yes Yes No No on Yes No Parallel Sensor s stan Yes Yes Yes Yes No No communi dard parallel cations communica tions Parallel Inter Yes Yes Yes Yes No No face 2 AE This applies when an RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit is connected 2 This applies when a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit is connected Connections Across Network Routers You can connect to a Sensor on a different network than the Touch Finder or PC Tool through a router To connect to a Sensor directly specify the IP address of the Sensor Automatic connection to a Sensor is not possible e Use a fixed IP address for the Sensor to connect to System Configuration FQ2 User s Manual 2 2 Part Names and Functions FQ2 SOOOOOO OOH Sensors with Built in Lighting 5 1 2 4 89 3 No Name Description 1 Lighting LEDs for illumination 2 Camera lens This lens can be focused 3 I O Cable connector An FQ WD or FQ WU I O Cable is used to connect the Sensor to the power supply and external I O 4 Ethernet
532. ting Press I0 Search WK DH A Press Position X X Currelation CR u t JG ce X SX 5 if the inspection item allows multi point output press the number 0 to 30 of the inspection result for which to output the data from the list of inspec tion results To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process jaye pesres The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sensor R e X FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 295 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following inspection results e Parameters for the same inspection item You can assign up to five inspection results e Inspection results that support multi point output You can assign inspection results within the specified range 0 to 31 The following procedure shows how to assign more than one inspection result to data 0 p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set 1 Press 0 Data 0 2 Press Multi data setting 3 Set the following items on the display to set expres sions Item Description Expression Register the expression to use to output multiple data Examples LPR 0 3 10 X 10 Y LPC 0 10 C 10 X
533. ting method Arca descending order Item Parameter Setting Description Measure Sorting method Area ascending order Set the condition to use for label number reassignment ment Area descending order When sorting by X or Y coordinates the upperleft corner parameter Pos X ascending order ascending order of is the origin X coordinate default Pos X descending order descending order of X coordinate Pos Y ascending order ascending order of Y coordinate Pos Y descending order descending order of Y coordinate FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item it suonoedsu dN Bues 174 152 Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt Inspect Inspection Add item Labeling Details Tab Page Output parameter Editing the Measurement Region This section describes how to edit the measurement regions You can edit the measurement region in the same way as for a search region LT Changing the Model Registration Region to a Shape Other Than a Rectangle p 100 Measurement region If the measurement region is changed perform teaching if required LT p 147 Inspecting with the Labeling Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Increasing the Processing Speed Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time 7 C
534. ting method Corr ascending order ascending order of correlation Sorts the results in order from the smallest correlation value to the largest Corr descending order descending order of correlation Sorts the results in order from the largest correlation to value default the smallest Pos X ascending order ascending order of position X Sorts the results in order from the smallest measure ment X position to the largest Pos X descending order descending order of position X Sorts the results in order from the largest measure ment X position to the smallest Pos Y ascending order ascending order of position Y Sorts the results in order from the smallest measure ment Y position to the largest Pos Y descending order descending order of position Y Sorts the results in order from the largest measure ment Y position to the smallest FQ2 User s Manual Inspecting with the Shape Search II Inspection Item 107 suonoedsu dN Bues Y 108 Select the Results to Output You can use multiple conditions to determine which results to output from all the objects detected with a correlation at the candidate level or higher Only the results that meet all the specified conditions are output p gt Inspect Inspection Shape Search II Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Extraction condition and adjust the candi ENEE O Shape Searc date level so that only objects higher
535. tings File format Logging data file 1 Press Output format 2 Change the required items in the CSV format 3 Press Back Item Symbol Field separator None comma default tabs space colon semicolon CR or CR LF Decimal symbol None point default or comma Record separator None comma tabs space colon semicolon CR or CR LF default Enabling File Logging You must enable file logging before you can execute it p Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting 1 Press ON 212 Logging Measurement Data and Image Data FQ2 User s Manual Starting and Stopping Logging After logging is started i e set to ON the specified image data and measurement data will be saved in the SD card or computer hard disk each time measurements are performed p Run Mode 1 Press Logging 2 Press Image logging or Data logging 3 Press ON to start logging Press OFF to stop logging 4 Press Back Note To save logged data you must first select either All all data is saved or Only NG only NG data is saved in the logging parameters LT Jsetting Logging Conditions p 209 Ensuring That All Measurement Results Are Logged in External Memory To ensure that all measurement results are actually saved change the settings so that the BUSY signal remains ON until logging has been completed During operation do not input the next trigger until the BUSY signa
536. tions operate at the cyclic period that is specified for each application regardless of the number of nodes Data is exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle that is set for each connection The communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of nodes is increased i e the concurrency of the connection s data is maintained Because the refresh cycle can be set for each connection each application can communicate at its ideal refresh cycle For example interprocess interlocks can be transferred at high speed while the production commands and the status monitor information are transferred at low speed On a network to which many devices are connected performance may drop e g responses may be delayed or packets lost or communications errors may occur when there is temporarily high traffic on the network Test the operation under actual conditions before you start actual operation of the system FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 283 jeusay y YyYBnosy Bunosuuog 6 284 Data Exchange with EtherNet IP Data is exchanged cyclically between Ethernet devices on the EtherNet IP network using tag data links as PLC Vision Sensor shown below a aN o D Q oO a Input tag set name A Connection Output tag set name Connection from Input 101 FQ2 to PLC Tag DO Tag Input_101 Output tag set name B Connection Input tag set name Connecti
537. tions for safe viewing of diffuse reflections for Class 3B visible lasers are minimum viewing distance of 13 cm between screen and cornea and a maximum viewing time of 10 s Other viewing conditions require a comparison of the diffuse reflection exposure with the MPE FQ2 User s Manual Requirements from Regulations and Standards 501 z L seoipueddy 12 8 Detailed EtherNet IP Communications Specifications This section lists the objects that are mounted in the Sensor 1 1 01h Identity Object Class Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 41 Get Revision UiT Revision of the object 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Maximum instance number 1 3 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of object instances 1 4 Get Revision Structure Revision of Identity object 1 1 Major Revision UINT Major revision 1 Minor Revision UINT Minor revision 1 7 Get Maximum ID Number UINT Attribute ID of instance 7 Instance Attributes attributes Instance Attributes ID Access Name Data type Description Attribute value 1 Get Vendor ID UINT Vendor ID 47 2 Get Device Type UINT General device type 43 3 Get Product Code UINT Product code 1645 4 Get Revision Structure Revision of Identity object 11 Major Revision UINT Major revision 1 Minor Revision UINT Minor revision 1 5 Get Status WORD Current status of device 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Serial numb
538. to the I O cable connector on the Vision Sensor Sensor Data Unit and connect the Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device This allows you to output the results of judgement conditions measurements from inspection items and the results of expressions with parallel communications RS 232C Interface FQ SDU2 You can connect a Sensor Data Unit to the I O cable connector on the Vision Sensor Sensor Data Unit and connect the RS 232C Interface Sensor Data Unit to an external device This allows you to use no protocol communications to send and receive commands inspection item parameters and other data between the Sensor and the external control device that is connected with the RS 232C cable You can also use the ACK signal parallel command normal completion signal for a parallel output from the Sensor Data Unit FQ Ethernet Cable FQ WNO Connects the Sensors to external devices such as the Touch Finder computers and PLCs Standard RJ45 Connects the Switching Hub to the Touch Finder computers and PLCs Use a con Ethernet Cable nector that complies with the FCC RJ45 standard STP shielded twisted pair cable category 5e or 6 impedance 100 Q I O Cable FQ WDO Connects the Sensor to the power supply and external devices Switching Hub W4S 1 0 Used to connect multiple Sensors to one Touch Finder or PC Tool Sensor Data Unit FQ WUO This cable connects the FQ2 S3 Sensor to the Sensor Data Unit cable Parallel cab
539. to use 3 Make any detailed settings as required for the filter Refer to the detailed settings for each of the following fil ter items Press OK Press Back PRE 6 Make any the following settings as required for each filter item e Setting the Source Image for Filtering LU Jp 70 e Setting the Region to Filter LUp 71 e Setting the Filter Type for Color Gray Filter Only LU p 71 e Setting the Brightness Range to Extract for Back ground Suppression Item Only Mp 72 aA Setting the Image to Filter Source Image You must set the image to which the filter is to be applied p gt Image Image adjustment Add filter Filter item to select 1 Press lt q Source image on the right of the display 2 Set the source image to Camera or Prev Parameter Setting Description Source image Camera camera image The filter is applied to the image that is taken by the Camera Prev previous image The filter is applied to the image that resulted from the previous filter items or posi tion compensation items in the processing order Adjusting the Images That Were Taken FQ2 User s Manual Setting the Region to Filter You can specify the region to which to apply the filter This setting does not exist in the Color Gray Filter item p gt Image Image adjustment Add filter Filter item to select 1 Press lt Filter region on the right of
540. tput delay output time p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output 1 Press Output mode and press Level output or One shot output 2 Press Output delay and set the one shot output de lay 3 Press OK 4 Press Output time and set the one shot output time 5 Press OK FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 243 8 UOND UUOD J lleIed e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uogesado BuljjouoD 244 Item Description Output mode One shot output After the measurement results are finalized if the judgement output ON condition is met the OR signal is turned ON for the one shot output time It is then turned OFF once the specified time has expired Level output default The judgement is output after measurement results are finalized and the ON OFF status of the OR signal is held until it is changed for the next measurement result Output delay When one shot output mode is selected this parameter sets the delay from when a measurement is completed until when the OR signal turns ON Setting range 0 to 1 000 ms Output time When one shot output mode is selected this parameter sets the time that the OR signal is ON Setting range 1 to 1 000 ms When one shot output is selected as the output mode make the following value smaller than the trigger input period e One shot delay time One shot output time
541. tput to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error CR 0 to CR 31 Correlation This is the correlation of the Nth 0 to 100 model that was found X 0 to X 31 Position X This is the X coordinate where the Nth 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 model was found Y 0 to Y 31 Position Y This is the Y coordinate where the Nth 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 model was found TH 0 to TH 31 Angle This is the angle in which the Nth model was found 180 to 180 SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the position 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 where the model was registered ST Reference angle This is the angle when the model was 180 to 180 registered RX Detection coordinate X This is the X coordinate of the detec 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 tion point when the model was regis tered RY Detection coordinate Y This is the Y coordinate of the detec 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 tion point when the model was regis tered Cc Count This is the number of models found 0 to 32 LT
542. traction conditions You can select to extract only labels that satisfy all four of the following Number of labels specified area gravity X and gravity Y conditions p gt Inspect Inspection Labeling Modify Settings Details Details Tab Page Meas Parameter Extraction condition 1 Press and set each of the parameters for the extrac fap 6 Labeling tion conditions Number of labels Gravity X Gravity Y Item Parameter Setting Description Extraction Number of Range 1 to 100 Set the maximum number of labels to detect condition labels Default 100 Area Range 0 to 999 999 999 9999 Specify the area range to judge as a label Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 9999 Lower limit 0 Gravity X Range 99 999 999 9999 to Specify the gravity X position to judge as a label 999 999 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Gravity Y Range 999 999 999 9999 to Specify the gravity Y position to judge as a label 999 999 999 999 Defaults Upper limit 999 999 999 999 Lower limit 999 999 999 9999 Sorting Extracted Labels Set the sort condition and count for extracted labels You can set the sort condition and the maximum number of detections for detection results p gt Inspect Inspection Labeling Modify Details Tab Page Meas Parameter 1 Press Sorting method Sorting method 6 Labeling 2 Select the sor
543. trolling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications 363 u1 4 4 YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 CLRERR Clear Errors This command clears the error output status error output and error indicator lt Command Format gt Command oO oo eft fRiefRiR cr Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally E R eR Delimiter DATASAVE Save Settings This command saves the current system data and scene groups to the Sensor lt Command Format gt Command mwa pfajila sja y E cr Delimiter lt Response Format gt When the Command Is Processed Normally o Jor Delimiter When the Command Is Not Processed Normally R fer Delimiter E oes Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual MODEL Re register Models This command re registers the models for registered Search and Color Data inspection items lt Command Format gt Command oo oo M o o fe ferl lt Response Format gt When the Command o k Jor Delimiter When the Command E R Jor Delimiter RESET Resets the Sensor Delimiter Is Processed Normally Is Not Processed Normally This command resets the Sensor lt Command Format gt Command Rle s e rc lt Response Format gt When the Command Delimiter Is Processed
544. ts The expression that is registered for data 0 assigns the data for 16 items 64 bytes in the output area as shown below Output area data Assigned data Output data 0 4 bytes 10 X 0 Position X 1st point Output data 1 4 bytes 10 Y 0 Position Y 1st point Output data 2 4 bytes Output data 3 4 bytes 10 SX 0 Reference SX 1st point 10 SY 0 Reference SY 1st point Output data 4 4 bytes 10 X 1 Position X 2nd point Output data 5 4 bytes Output data 6 4 bytes 10 Y 1 Position Y 2nd point 10 SX 1 Reference SX 2nd point Output data 7 4 bytes 10 SY 1 Reference SY 2nd point Output data 8 4 bytes 10 X 2 Position X 3rd point Output data 9 4 bytes 10 Y 2 Position Y 3rd point Output data 10 4 bytes 10 SX 2 Reference SX 3rd point Output data 11 4 bytes 10 SY 2 Reference SY 3rd point Output data 12 4 bytes 10 X 3 Position X 4th point Output data 13 4 bytes 10 Y 3 Position Y 4th point Output data 14 4 bytes 10 SX 3 Reference SX 4th point Output data 15 4 bytes 10 SY 3 Reference SY 4th point Note The inspection results will be output according to the sorting method that is set for multi point output for the inspec tion item FQ2 User s Manual Outputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP 297 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 298 Output Data Size and Number
545. ts changing scenes clear ing errors and clearing measurement values If a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit is mounted you can output the judgement results of judgement conditions the measurement values from measurement items and the results of expressions through the parallel interface LT 8 2 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit p 256 If an RS 232C Sensor Data Unit is mounted you can transfer data through an RS 232C connection using TCP no protocol commands LT 10 Connecting with RS 232C p 391 Introduction FQ2 User s Manual 9 2 Qutputting Data and Controlling Operation through EtherNet IP Introduction to EtherNet IP EtherNet IP is an industrial multi vendor network that uses Ethernet The EtherNet IP specifications are open standards managed by the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association EtherNet IP is used by a wide range of industrial devices Because EtherNet IP uses standard Ethernet technology various general purpose Ethernet devices can be used in the network EtherNet IP has mainly the following features High speed High capacity Data Exchange through Tag Data Links The EtherNet IP protocol supports implicit communications which allows cyclic communications called tag data links with EtherNet IP devices Tag Data Links at Specified Communications Cycle for Each Application Regardless of the Number of Nodes Tag data links cyclic communica
546. tting Input Input mode Press Expand mode Wiring Color Signal State Description Gray INO OFF Command parameter for clearing errors Green IN1 OFF Red IN2 ON White IN3 OFF Purple IN4 OFF Yellow IN5 ON Command input for clearing errors Orange OUT1 BUSY Processing in progress default Light blue OUT2 ERROR ERROR signal default Timing Chart IN5 signal ON BUSY signal ERROR signal FQ2 User s Manual i Allow 5 ms min and then Eam The signals shown at the left are used Refer to the following information for signal wiring C 2 4 Wiring p 42 1 Turn OFF INO to IN1 and IN3 to IN4 and turn ON IN2 INO Ne signals gt lt 2 Turn ON the IN5 signal while the turn ON IN5 ON a ON for 1 ms min OFF 7 FF ON OFF Po BUSY signal is OFF to clear the error Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 251 8 UON UUOD a eseg e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uogesado BuljjouoD Clear Measurement Values This command clears the measurement values that are stored in the Sensor However the OR signal and the output signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT2 are not cleared Note This function can be used in Run Mode only Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Input Input mode Press Expand mode
547. ttings ON OFF password Enter Sets a password 15 characters max password Adjustment mode in Sets whether to adjust measurement OFF default or ON p 187 Run contents in Run Mode Ethernet p 53 p IP address set Sets the method to use to set IP Auto default Fixed DHCP System 2 ting addresses fo IP address Enter the IP address of the Sensor a b c d System p 53 z Valid only when the IP address setting a 1 to 223 is set to Fixed b 0 to 255 c 0 to 255 d 2 to 254 Default 10 5 5 100 Subnet mask Inputs the subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 System p 53 Valid only when the IP address setting Default 255 255 255 0 is set to Fixed Gateway Sets the default gateway address When 1 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 System the IP address setting is set to Fixed Default 10 5 5 7 3 fa Communication Sets the communications type to use to Invalid default No protocol TCP No System p 351 3 type output no protocol data protocol FINS No protocol RS 232C p 394 S t 2 When the com A S munications type is TCP no proto col or FINS TCP no protocol Connec Sets whether to communicate with the TCP server default TCP client System p 351 tion mode communications devices as a server device or a client device IB Sets the IP address to which to output a b c d System p 351 address no protocol data a 1 to 223 Setting is not possible if the connection b 0 to
548. type on the right of the display Absolute value default The measured coordinates are output Relative value The difference from the reference position is output as coordinates Ratio The percentage of the reference value is output This applies to the area only Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them p gt Inspect Inspection Add item Area Details Tab Page Output parameter Unstable Area Results The Desired Color Cannot Be Detected Add a specific color or enlarge the color range Extraction Is Automatically Performed for an Undesired Color When Teaching Manually set the color for which to measure the area p gt Inspect Inspection Area Modify Settings Tab Page Teach e Sensors with Color Cameras Only 1 Press lt q Set color on the right of the display 2 Drag around the color for which you want to measure the area Areas with that color will be automatically detected Continuous measurements will be performed for the im ages that are displayed Only the extracted color will appear on the display 3 gt Press OK Cancel 4 Press TEACH 5 Press Back to end teaching Inspecting with the Area Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Note Measuring More Than One Color Set the colors using the color palette
549. u must make the following setting in advance in Setup Mode gt Setup Mode TF settings Logging setting ON Trend Monitor Changes in the measurement values of the selected inspection item against time can be observed from the graph It becomes possible to predict when malfunctions may occur or to analyze the cause of the malfunction by checking the trends in the measurement values The most recent 1 000 measurement values are displayed on the graph e Trend monitor Display Switches the display to the previous inspection item number Specifies the BN og e parameters to display on the Trend Monitor amp Used to select the ee detection information to display when more than one detection point is detected at the same time for one item Switches the display to the next inspection item number Measurement values Changes in the measured value of the selected inspection item are displayed against time in a graph gt Run Mode Select display Trend monitor Arranging the Trend Monitor Display The display range for the vertical axis and display conditions for the horizontal axis can be changed Note You can display only one parameter in the Trend Monitor You cannot display multiple parameters at the same time e Disabling Automatic Selection of the Display Range 1 Press lt Auto display on the right of the trend monitor 2 Press OFF
550. u set the range The image in the input range will be displayed in the inspection item setting displays and measurement displays p gt Image Camera setup 1 Press lt q Partial input on the right side of the dis play 2 Press Y and set the input range along the Y axis by setting the Y coordinate of the partial input start point and the Y coordinate of the partial input end point 3 Press X and set the input range along the X axis by setting the X coordinate of the partial input start point and the X coordinate of the partial input end point 4 Press OK Partial input Y start line Partial input Y end line Y coordinate of the partial input end point Y coordinate of the partial input start point Partial input X start line Partial input X end line X coordinate of the partial input end point X coordinate of the partial input start point Parameter Setting Description X coordinate of the partial input start Range 0 to 1 267 Specify the partial input range along the X point Default 0 axis X coordinate of the partial input end point Range 15 to 1 279 Default 1 279 Y coordinate of the partial input start point FQ SHOOO Range 0 to 472 Default 0 FQ S 08 Range 0 to 820 Default 0 FQ2 S3L Range 0 to 1 016 Default 0 Specify the partial input range along the Y axis Y coord
551. ues that are equivalent to the o judgement values is displayed in a histogram for the selected inspection item 5 p Run Mode Select display Histogram Arranging Histogram Display The display range on the horizontal axis and the number of data on the vertical axis of the histogram can be changed e Disabling Automatic Adjustment of the Display Range 1 Press lt q Auto display on the right of the histogram 2 Press OFF e Changing the Display Range of the Horizontal Axis 1 Press lt lt Display range on the right of the histogram 2 Select the maximum measurement value the minimum measurement value and the class 185 FQ2 User s Manual Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs e Changing the Number of Data on the Vertical Axis 1 Press lt q Number of data on the right of the histogram 2 Select the maximum number of data to display Note e Histogram data is held until the power supply is turned OFF e You can select whether to display all data in the histogram or only data for which the overall judgement is NG Logging settings are applied to the histogram as well However they are not applied to histograms displayed in Setup Mode LT Icheck recent measurement trends recent results logging p 214 186 Checking the Trend of Measurement Results with Graphs FQ2 User s Manual 6 4 Adjusting Judgement Parameters during Operation This Sensor enables judgement parameters t
552. ui 0 Data logging OFF 1 detection count sition 1 Data logging ON 700 Display Correlation display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 settings sition 701 Position X display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 702 Position Y display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 703 Measurement angle Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 display sition 704 Count display Setting Acqui 0 Display 1 Do not display 0 sition 800 Position X display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 tern sition tive value 801 Position Y display pat Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 tern sition tive value 802 Measured angle display Setting Acqui 0 Absolute value 1 Rela 0 pattern sition tive value FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters 453 z L seoipueddy Sensitive Search External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Correlation Acquisition
553. uired for the position compensation processing Refer to Detailed Settings for Search Position Compensation below way as for the Search item RE 4 4 Inspecting with the Search Inspection Item p 95 Also the following settings are included only in the Search Position Compensation Item e Source Image You can select the image to which to apply the results of position compensation processing LT Applying the Results of Position Compensation p 75 e Interpolation You can select the precision of position compensation If you select Bilinear the precision of position compensation will increase p gt Image Image adjustment Search position comp Modify Details Scroll parameter Interpolation The settings are the same as those for the Shape Search Position Compensation item LT Interpolation p 77 e Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for t
554. ult These filters achieve the same effect as when using the selected optical Green filter filter e Blue filter e Cyan filter Magenta filter e Yellow filter Brgt F brightness filter R G B Brgt F brightness filter R 2G B e Custom filter R Range 0 0001 to 9 9999 These are the RGB gain settings for a custom filter Default 0 3000 Increase the gain to increase the density of that color component G Range 0 0001 to 9 9999 a set the gains only if Custom filter is selected in the filter set Default 0 5900 B Range 0 0001 to 9 9999 Default 0 1100 e HSV Parameter Setting Description Std Hue stan Range 0 to 359 Sets the standard hue for the HSV filter dard hue Default 0 The density will decrease as the difference between the hue and the standard hue increases Hue range Range 10 to 180 Sets the hue range for the HSV filter Default 90 The hue range centered on the standard hue is divided into 255 levels to find the difference in the hue Hues that are outside the hue range will have a density of 0 Chroma satura Range 0 to 255 Set the upper and lower limit values for the chroma saturation tion Defaults Lower limit 0 Upper limit 255 Setting the Brightness Range to Extract for Background Suppression Item Only The range in which to enhance the contrast and the brightness range to extract are set for the Background Suppression item The Background Sup
555. ured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG DX Scroll X This is the amount of position com 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the X coordinate DY Scroll Y This is the amount of position com _ 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 pensation for the Y coordinate x Position X edge position This is the X coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 X sured edge position Y Position Y edge position This is the Y coordinate of the mea 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Yy sured edge position SX Reference X This is the X coordinate of the edge 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 position when it was registered SY Reference Y This is the Y coordinate of the edge 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 position when it was registered Two edge Position Compensation This position compensation item detects edges in two directions If the specified color is detected or the specified density is detected for a Sensor with a Monochrome Camera it is recognized as an edge When an edge is recognized the image is adjusted so that the edge appears at the position it was in when it was registered Registered position of the edge Measurement region for edge 0 Edge search direction for edge 0 p gt Image Image adjustment aA UNa FQ2 User s Manual Measurement region for edge 1 Edge search direction for edge Color of edge to be found Press Edge 2Edge position comp Adjusting the Image
556. urement region The following data is stored as basic measurement data gt Item Parameter Description g Reference data Reference position X The reference coordinates X Y of the position are set automatically a Reference position Y Cc v Step 3 Adjusting Judgement Parameters E O gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Position Settings Tab Page 3 1 Press Judgement Lower limit Upper limit 2 Press the parameters and set the range that is to be eye Edge P 7 judged as OK The measurement value is displayed next to the param eter name Continuous measurements will be performed for the images that are displayed You can change the parameters for judgement conditions on the a a Display Settings Display Press lt q Display setting on the right Blue for OK Red for NG of the display to switch to the Display Settings Display 3 Press OK to enter the value Parameter Setting Description Position X Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of edge Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 position X for an OK judgement Position Y Range 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Adjust the upper and lower limits of edge Defaults Lower limit 99 999 9999 Upper limit 99 999 9999 position Y for an OK judgement Note e You can change the output form for each measurement value to one of the following settings Press lt q Result type on the right of the display Absolute v
557. ust judge ment limit sition ment condi 125 tions Color difference lower Setting Acqui O to 442 0 limit sition External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual FQ2 User s Manual External Reference Parameters External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 126 Mea Color deviation upper Setting Acqui O to 221 221 sure limit sition ment 127 condi Color deviation lower Setting Acqui 0 to 221 0 z tions limit sition 130 Density average upper Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 limit sition 131 Density average lower Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 limit sition 132 Density deviation upper Setting Acqui 0 to 127 127 limit sition 433 Density deviation lower Setting Acqui 0 to 127 0 limit sition 134 R average upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 135 R average lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 oe z sition 136 G average upper limit Setting Acqui O to 255 255 sition 137 G average lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 s z sition 138 B average upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 255 sition 139 B average lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 255 0 sition 310 Logging Entire Unit logging Setting Acqui
558. ut You can output up to 32 data items data 0 to data 31 The measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings can be output For data that can be output refer to the Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations for each inspection item Assigning Inspection Results to Output Data You can individually assign the parameters of the inspection items to output data data 0 to data 31 The following procedure shows how to assign the measured position X of 0 Search to data O for a binary output p gt In Out I O setting Output data setting Link data output Output data set Press 0 Data 0 Press Data setting Press I0 Search WK DH Press Position X X Currelation CR u nt JE nee X S 5 if the inspection item allows multi point output press the number 0 to 30 of the inspection result for which to output the data from the list of inspec tion results To register something to data 1 and higher repeat this process The settings will be enabled after you restart the Sen sor 332 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Assigning More Than One Inspection Result to the Same Output Data You can assign more than one inspection result to the same data output to output all of the assigned results This is possible for the following
559. utput signals that are assigned to OUTO to OUT3 regardless of what signal is assigned to the output Settings p gt In Out I O setting I O setting Output OUTO Polarity OUT1 Polarity or OUT2 Polarity Item Description OUTO Polarity OUT1 Polarity or OUT2 Polarity Positive default The output signal that is assigned to OUTO to OUT3 is turned ON when the Sen sor is executing a process Negative The output signal that is assigned to OUTO to OUT3 is turned ON when the Sen sor can receive the trigger FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with the Sensor s Standard Parallel Connection 245 8 UOND UUOD a eseg e y m e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado BuljjosjuoD Controlling the Sensor from an External Device The following Sensor functions can be controlled with command inputs from an external device without connecting the Touch Finder Function Description Reference Switching the scene This command changes the scene when the line process changes p 246 Re registering the model or refer This command re registers the judgement references for measurement when lev p 249 ence color els are changed Clearing an error This command turns the ERROR signal OFF p 251 Continuous measurement Continuous measurement is performed while this command is input p 237 Clearing measurement values This command clears the measurement value
560. value 1 Rela 0 pattern sition tive value External Reference Parameters FQ2 User s Manual External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 1000 N Mea Sub region correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CRN N 0 to sure N only 99 ment result 1100 N Sub region density Acquisition Sub region density devia O DVN N 0 to deviation N only tion N 99 Shape Search Il External Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 0 Mea Judgement Acquisition 2 No judgement not 2 JG Logged data sure only measured ment 0 Judgement is OK result 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not per formed error 14 Figure not registered error 15 Out of range error 5 Correlation Acquisition 0 to 100 0 CR 0 to Logged data only CR 31 6 Position X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 X 0 to Logged data only 99 999 9999 X 31 7 Position Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 Y 0 to Logged data only 99 999 9999 Y 31 8 Angle Acquisition 180 to 180 0 TH 0 to Logged data only TH 31 9 Reference X Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SX only 99 999 9999 10 Reference Y Acquisition 99 999 9999 to 0 SY only 99 9
561. work Settings in the Sensor This section describes how to set the IP address and other network settings in the Vision Sensor Refer to the following section for details LT 2 5 Setting Up Ethernet p 53 e Changes to settings are not applied until the Vision Sensor is restarted Therefore save the settings and then restart the Vision Sensor LT 5 5 Saving Data to the Sensor p 178 BA Restarting the Sensor p 229 e The port number on the FQ2 Vision Sensor is always 9877 Initial Settings for PLC Link Communications You must set the IP address of the PLC to connect to assign the Command Area Response Area and Output Area and make other settings to perform PLC Link communications gt Setup Mode Sensor settings Data output Link data output 1 Press Communication type 2 Press PLC link SYSMAC or PLC link MELSEC depending on the PLC that is connected 3 Press Area settings Here you specify the addresses in the I O memory of the PLC that are to be allocated as the communica tions areas for PLC Link communications Press Command Response and Output and set the memory area Area type and first word Ad dress in the I O memory of the PLC to allocate to i each of these communications areas When you are im finished press Back FQ2 User s Manual PLC Link Connections 327 jeusey y YyBnosy Bunosuuog 6 328 Item Description Setting ra
562. x selected Count 4 LPR 0 10 C 10 X 10 Y 10 SX 10 SY Function Number_of_data data_A data_B data_d Detection count Start_number Output Results The expression that is registered for data 0 assigns the data for 16 items 64 bytes in the output area as shown below Output area data Assigned data Output data 0 4 bytes 10 X 0 Position X 1st point Output data 1 4 bytes 10 Y 0 Position Y 1st point Output data 2 4 bytes 10 SX 0 Reference SX 1st point Output data 3 4 bytes 10 SY 0 Reference SY 1st point Output data 4 4 bytes 10 X 1 Position X 2nd point Output data 5 4 bytes 10 Y 1 Position Y 2nd point Output data 6 4 bytes 10 SX 1 Reference SX 2nd point Output data 7 4 bytes 10 SY 1 Reference SY 2nd point Output data 8 4 bytes 10 X 2 Position X 3rd point Output data 9 4 bytes 10 Y 2 Position Y 3rd point Output data 10 4 bytes 10 SX 2 Reference SX 3rd point Output data 11 4 bytes 10 SY 2 Reference SY 3rd point Output data 12 4 bytes 10 X 3 Position X 4th point Output data 13 4 bytes 10 Y 3 Position Y 4th point Output data 14 4 bytes 10 SX 3 Reference SX 4th point Output data 15 4 bytes 10 SY 3 Reference SY 4th point Note The inspection results will be output according to the sorting method t
563. xecution Result Parameter 1 o Jor Delimiter o Jor Delimiter If the command is not processed normally the command execution result is NG Command Execution Result Delimiter An error occurs in the following cases e A non existent command was specified The number of parameters is incorrect e The parameter range is incorrect e The parameter content is incorrect e Operation could not be performed normally for the operation command 358 Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with TCP No protocol Communications FQ2 User s Manual Command List The following table lists the no protocol commands Commands that can be used in no protocol Ethernet communications are listed below Type of command Command Abbreviation Function Reference Measurement control MEASURE M Executes one measurement p 360 d t i Sen E ma MEASURE C M C Starts continuous measure p 361 ments MEASURE E M E Ends continuous measure p 362 ments Utility commands CLRMEAS None Clears the measurement val p 363 ues CLRERR None Clears the error output status p 364 error signal and error indica tor DATASAVE None Saves the settings data to the p 364 Sensor MODEL None Re registers the models for p 365 registered Search inspection items RESET None Restarts the Sensor p 365 TEACH None Executes teaching for all p 366 applicable inspection items Scene contr
564. xpression 31 Data 0 D00 This is the result of expression 0 Data 1 D01 This is the result of expression 1 Data 2 D02 This is the result of expression 2 Data 3 D03 This is the result of expression 3 Data 4 D04 This is the result of expression 4 Data 5 D05 This is the result of expression 5 Data 6 D06 This is the result of expression 6 Data 7 D07 This is the result of expression 7 Data 8 D08 This is the result of expression 8 Data 9 D09 This is the result of expression 9 Data 10 D10 This is the result of expression 10 Data 11 D11 This is the result of expression 11 Data 12 D12 This is the result of expression 12 Data 13 D13 This is the result of expression 13 Data 14 D14 This is the result of expression 14 Data 15 D15 This is the result of expression 15 Data 16 D16 This is the result of expression 16 Data 17 D17 This is the result of expression 17 Data 18 D18 This is the result of expression 18 Data 19 D19 This is the result of expression 19 Data 20 D20 This is the result of expression 20 Data 21 D21 This is the result of expression 21 Data 22 D22 This is the result of expression 22 Data 23 D23 This is the result of expression 23 Data 24 D24 This is the result of expression 24 FQ2 User s Manual Calculations and Judgements Using Inspection Item Data 167 suonoedsu dN Bues 174 168 Data name Expression text string Description Data 25 D25 This is the result of ex
565. xpressions D15 Outputting the Overall Judgement Result OR Signal When the results of the inspection items are judged if even one individual judgement result is NG the OR output signal is turned ON Note e You can also turn ON the overall judgement result output signal when all individual judgement results are OK LT Changing the Judgement Output ON Conditions p 244 e You can select whether to use the judgement result of one of the calculations 0 through 31 as the overall judge ment LT Using Calculation Results without Applying Them to the Overall Judgement p 161 You can adjust the timing for outputting the OR signal and the ON time after judgement processing LT Adjusting the Judgement Output Timing p 242 FQ2 User s Manual Controlling Operation and Outputting Data with a Parallel Interface Sensor Data Unit 257 8 UOND UUOD J leIed e UM e eq Bulyjndjno pue uopesado BuljjojuoD Parallel Judgement Outputs You can set judgement conditions for parallel output and then output the judgement results for those conditions Setting the Items to Judge and the Judgement Conditions You can assign up to 16 judgement results to and output them from the DO to D15 signals As the items to judge you can specify the measurement data from inspection items that can be output and the calculation results from the expression settings Use the following procedure to set the items to judge an
566. xternal Category Data name Setting Acqui Data range Default Expres Logged data refer sition sion text Judgement ence string parameter number 124 Model Reference X Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 region sition 125 Reference Y Setting Acqui 0 to 99 999 9999 0 sition 145 Detec Detection point X Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 tion coor sition dinate 146 Detection point Y Setting Acqui 0 to 9 999 0 sition 147 Mea Sub pixel Setting Acqui 0 No 1 Yes 0 sure sition ment 148 condi Candidate level Setting Acqui 0 to 100 70 tions sition 166 Judge Judgement upper limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 100 Adjust judge ment for correlation sition ment condi 167 tions Judgement lower limit Setting Acqui 0 to 100 60 for correlation sition 310 Logging Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 condi entire unit sition 1 Data logging ON tions 311 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 judgement sition 1 Data logging ON 312 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll X sition 1 Data logging ON 313 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 scroll Y sition 1 Data logging ON 315 Data logging switch for Setting Acqui 0 Data logging OFF 0 position X sition 1 Data logging ON 316 Data logging switch for Setting Acqu
567. y the region Item Parameter Description Detection mode Color IN Detects as an edge any position where the color changes from another color to the specified color Color OUT Detects as an edge any position where the color changes from the specified color to another color Beginning ss Ending Beginning e alfe Ending position position position position Color IN Color OUT Note It is also possible to check the extraction colors or specify them using the color palette The RGB values of the extraction color can be checked and adjusted using the color palette If you press lt q Color palette a color palette will appear When a color is pressed on the color palette its RGB values will be displayed Inspecting with the Edge Position Inspection Item FQ2 User s Manual Increasing Processing Speed for Edge Position Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time 7 Changing the measurement region p 102 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be used as measurement data and output to external devices via the Ethernet or used in calculations Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14 Figure
568. ype on the right of the display Absolute value default The measured edge width is output Relative value The difference from the reference value is output Ratio The percentage of the reference value is output Changing Edge Detection Conditions Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Only You can change the measurement conditions for Sensors with Monochrome Cameras Change the Density change and Measurement method parameters LT p 122 Reflect in Total Judgement You can specify whether to reflect the judgement results of an inspection item in the overall judgement The default is to reflect them gt Inspect Inspection Add item Edge Width Details Tab Page Output parameter Unstable Edge Width Results Sensors with Color Cameras If the measurement result is not stable adjust the Edge level Noise level and Set color parameters O e 122 Increasing Edge Width Processing Speed Make the measurement region smaller to reduce the processing time en Changing the measurement region p 102 Measurement Data That Can Be Used for External Outputs and Calculations The following values can be output to external devices or used in calculations as measurement data Expression text string Data name Description Data range JG Judgement This is the judgement result 2 No judgement not measured 0 Judgement is OK 1 Judgement is NG 13 Teaching not performed error 14

FQ2 Smart Camera User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents